Home

Dokumentation DDC4000

1. Aneen ana Betriebsmeldung J BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I S Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter BrOn Control signal BMBr Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation Delay automatic start Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message burner Target operating status Burner on output Status command execution check If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 383 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Ansteuersignal an die Hardvvare Uberwachungszeit
2. Software structure Objects 4 3 263 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6965 Priority 5 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6966 Priority 6 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6967 Priority 7 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6968 Priority 8 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6969 Priority 9 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6970 Priority 10 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6971 Priority 11 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6972 Priority 12 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6973 Priority 13 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6974 Priority 14 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6975 Priority 15 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6976 Priority 16 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6977 Priority 17 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6978 Priority 18 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6979 Priority 19 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6980 Priority 20 actual value 1 3 1 integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 2 30 S901 Signal generator Function summary Signal generator for test purposes Produces a sinus signal Ramp sawtooth signal Rectangular signal with selectable period duration Amplitude Amplitude offset 4 3 264 The cycle time of the signal generator is 50ms All three different signal generators have a reset input that restarts the production of the output signal Functi
3. No unit description 90 Winkel in Grad 91 C h Grad Celsius pro Stunde 92 C min Grad Celsius pro Minute 93 F h Degrees Fahrenheit per hour 94 F min Degrees Fahrenheit per minute 96 ppm Parts per Million 97 ppb Parts per Billion Milliarde 98 Prozent 99 s Prozent pro Sekunde 100 1 min pro Minute 101 1 s pro Sekunde 102 psi F psi per degree Fahrenheit 103 rad Radiant rad 104 1 min 115 in Square inches inch2 116 cm Quadratzentimeter cm2 117 BTU Ibs btu per pound 118 cm Zentimeter 119 Ibs s Pounds mass per second 120 A F Delta degrees Fahrenheit 121 A K Temperaturdifferenz in Kelvin 122 KQ Kiloohm kOhm 123 MO Mega Ohm MOhm 124 mV Millivolt mV 125 kJ kg Kilojoule pro Kilogramm KJ Kg 126 MJ Mega Joule MJ 127 JIK Joule pro Grad Kelvin J K 128 J kgK Joule pro Kilogramm Grad Fahrenheit J KgF 129 kHz Kilohertz KHz 130 MHz Megaherz MHz Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 70 No unit description 131 1 h Pro Stunde 132 mW Milliwatt mW 133 hPa Hecto Pascal hPa 134 mbar Milli Bar mBar 135 m h Kubik Meter pro Stunde 136 I h Liter pro Stunde 137 kWh m Kilowattstunden pro Quadratmeter 138 kW
4. object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 SY_ExtCent ext Central Unit unreleased SY_FAX FAX 0 2 0 SY_FBM38 System FBM38 0 4 0 SY_FBM48 System FBM48 unreleased SY_File File unreleased SY_Hosts Hosts 0 2 0 SY_I18N Localisation unreleased SY_Lon System LON unreleased SY_ModConf Modem Config 0 4 SY_Modul System 0 1 9 SY_MsgMan Message_Storage 0 1 9 SY_MsgOut Message output 0 3 SY_Network Network config 0 2 0 SY Printer Printer unreleased SY Route Route unreleased SY SBM51 System SBM51 0 2 0 SY SBM52S System SBM52S unreleased SY Serial ser Interface 0 4 0 SY_Shadow Shadow unreleased SY_Simu Simulation value 1 0 4 SY_SMS SMS 0 2 0 SY_Stat Statistics unreleased SY_TelChar TelCosts Limit 0 4 0 SY_Trace Trace unreleased SY_TrMan Trend storage unreleased SY_User Usergroup unreleased Version 05 06 4 3 434 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 435 4 3 5 2 SY Module Module settings general Function summary This system object contains the setting parameters above all that are important for each DDC Central Unit BMR and also bus modules IO cards This includes in particular the softvvare version number in parameter 899 and the Bacnet device ID GER Prog Version Revision 1 0 13 otate otate aktiv Dub dr Adresse doppelt 0 Error St rung Modul U Erro st rungs Code U Devid BACnet Deviceld 23 Anton Anmeldez hler 1 DAC Pri BACnet Fr
5. Aneen ana Betriebsmeldung J BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I S Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter BrOn Control signal BMBr Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation Delay automatic start The Auto request must always be switched on Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message burner Target operating status Burner on output Status command execution check Kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 360 Ifthe actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal gt an die Hardware
6. Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Special Functions Objects 4 3 108 If during the movement process the manual influence or central influence is exercised the movement process is aborted and the desired control status is started The external sensor used is the PID control set in the parameter in the basic program 5103 TO If no external sensor is set in the basic program the movement switch always works The function as to whether the DCC submenu start up works in the conditions stated above can be switched on Status 1 or off Status 0 via a binary source 5438 Q EA Movement If no binary source is set the function can always operate If additionally DDC sub menu 15308 Minimum room temperature is set the movement switching can also be switched via the minimum room temperature to OFF in the control status i e ifthe minimum room temperature becomes active the movement switching is processed first before the minimum room temperature is active In combination with DDC sub menu 15305 Optimize heating if the temperature conditions are appropriate the movement switching is processed before the ventilation optimization Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5331 Ziel set point 4 0 value text Destination startup Y multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5332 TA limit AF set point 0 12 8 C float 5333 br actual value deletab
7. Function description cover control during the warm up phase request for control If the fan is to be switched on the cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational cover open 1 if this input is wired Then fan on is set to 1 and if connected the plant waits for fan operating message 1 Only then is request control set to 1 For operational message cover open this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 322 Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation Delay automatic start Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the fan can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the fan operating message is not switched the control output fan on is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Anteuersignal Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 Eu Betriebsstundenz hler Betriebs stunden Set
8. nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung im weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e gt Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch stCEC Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters for the actual operating status Setting that is formed as described above The target operating status is control valve the output is Status command execution check Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Ansteuersignal an die Hardware Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Bsz Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK x HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Y Control signal from the object Bsz Yr Acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardware Bst s
9. HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 32 H901 Pump single stage Function summary The pump single stage function block controls a single stage pump and supports Switching delays Pump blocking protection Operating hours limiting value Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence direct operating level DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Attention malfunction blocked An important note How does malfunction blocked work 4 3 394 The malfunction blocked parameter can be set to yes or no If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM Reset malfunction messa
10. Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Typ set point 5 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 1 Binary input 2 Binary output 3 Analog input 4 Analog output 2 AN set point 3 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 3 Analog input 4 Analog output 3 Al set point 2 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 3 Analog input Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 4 AO set point 2 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 4 Analog output 5 DN set point 3 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 1 Binary input 2 Binary output 6 DI set point 2 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 1 Binary input D DO set point 2 0 value text Pin type selection multistate 0 no function 2 Binary output 8 Rn set point deletable deleted Pin connection text Version 05 06 4 3 425 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 426 4 3 4 4 BO S Switches Function summary Is there for the sake of completeness This switch aims to integrate the switches of the SBM into the DDC4000 system Jede der Tasten auf den Modulen kann als Taster T Schalter S oder als Teil einer Schaltergruppe mit gegenseitiger Ausl sung de
11. Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5230 Q1 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source E Sel 1 float 5231 Q2 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source E Sel 2 float 5232 Inv set point 0 selection list Inv select selection list No text 0 for Y1 1 for Y2 2 for Y3 3 for Y4 5235 diff set point 0 20 1 E Sel difference float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 128 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5237 xsd set point 0 10 2 Xsd Energy select float 5238 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Energy select boolean i023 Energy select actual value 0 boolean kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 129 4 3 2 9 11 S311 Sequence change Activation Sub function of Basic program PID ventilation can be set 1x Function summary The purpose of the sub software object S311 sequence converter is to switch the operating direction ofthe Y outputs in the basic program depending on particular plant statuses Function description In parameters 5240 source SP YL1 to 5243 source SP YL4 a binary source is set If the binary source signal switches from 0 to 1 or 1 to O the corresponding Y outputs YL1 to YL4 on the PID basic program are switched to inverted or bac
12. Bsz BAR Bst R ckmeldung Alarnyerz gerungszet von der Hardware mer BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter BrOn Control signal from the object Bsz BMBr acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC BriOn and Br2On Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs a not malfunction blocked 0 b switches the outputs request pump cover request control and Burner on off malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the outputs to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet gt anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Hardware Ansteuerung Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Sign
13. External set point for supply temperature If an outside set point parameter 5183 TStarget ext is set it replaces the target day value calculated in the basic heating program The start reduction is still operational at night Reducing the start reduction for particularly low outside temperatures remains effective There is no TS reduction if the outside temperature is close to the design temperature of the heating plant 5172 T design In this case the heating continues to be controlled via the day regulation TOGrenzabs T design TR target 18 If TO lt TOGrenzabs then night rules gt day regulation Economy The economy function is switched on with parameter 5170 Economy The economy status is displayed via i019 Economy If the calculated start set point falls so far that only lovv heating energy can be supplied to the room the recirculating pump is switched off and the Y valve closed when the economy function is activated The boiler is also switched off it is not switched on by another heating control circuit or boiler request PLC If a higher start set point is calculated the boiler and recirculating pump come on again The economy function differentiates between floor and radiator heating using the steepness of the heating curve EF Conditions for switching the economy function on and off Boiler EF lt 1 0 EF gt 1 0 Circulating pump under floor heating radiator heating Off TStarget lt TRta
14. 4 3 6 15 9 FB_MV multistate parameters Function summary Dieses Objekt kann an Parameter des Typs Multistate angehangen werden Dies bewirkt dass der Parameter an dem dieses Objekt angehangen worden ist auf dem BACnet als BACnet Multistate Value Objekt sichtbar wird Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer Z E actual value 0 boolean 4 3 7 Sub objects 4 3 7 1 Sub objects Sub objects are definitions for the functions of certain objects These sub objects are used for example for outputs and inputs A PIN object only receives its function by stipulating the type of sub objects e g binary input or output Sub objects are used for example for SBM51 PIN objects FBM38 object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 CAI Analog input 0 1 9 CAO Analog output 0 1 9 CB_NC BACnetMsgDest unreleased CDI Binary input 0 1 9 CDO Binary output 0 1 9 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 CD_EL Electrical counter unreleased CD_PUO1 Basic fos max 0 3 33 CD_PUO2 Wilo Pump 0 3 33 CD PU03 Double pump unreleased CD SB51 SBM51 Menu unreleased CD SB51S Sim unreleased CD WA VVater
15. Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 Ysoll actual value 0 100 0 Yset float 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted 90 Servo back fan float 5 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Setting no float 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp valve float 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE Status boolean 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence integer 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Enter malf msg boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Valve malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 StLock boolean 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer 19 Zw actual value deletable deleted Forced control boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 354 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 20 ZwSw set point 0 100 100 Force setpoint integer 21 StzVBS set point 0 1440 720 min Starttime Blocksw integer 22 LzVBS set point 0 2147483647 5 min Run time Blockshu integer 23 YVBS set point 0 100 0 Setp fan block integer 24 vbs actual value 0 Blocking prot Status boolean 25 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean P
16. Jagoschinski start 3 S QS DDC4000 Oberfl chenbil 38 St nderrack PS 40 W PS4000_1 Paint E CEU SANG 3 0838 If a projection file has already been created you can send this immediately to the DDC4000 To do so in Project move to TAB4000 and using the right mouse button click on a DDC4000 and select Send projection to device Now the projection can be selected from a dialog for example see image above and then be sent 4 5 2 3 Data restore backup CF card Data backup file restoration with compact flash card A CF compact flash card with 128 MB 32 MB in beta phase is used as a data medium in the DDC4200 Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 505 This card is inserted into the slot behind the front cover The card s recessed grip is on the left This compact flash card provides data backup file restoration To do so the object Sy Datsi in 01 000 00 00 central unit Module O plant 0 Group 0 must be opened kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure 701 Zentrale L 000 DDC4200 L 002 Digital IO L 001 Analog IO L 102 BMD4064 L 101 BMA4024 UIC EI 01 000 00 2 Gruppe 0 701 000 00 00 5Y_Datsi 01 Datensicherung L command Anweisung Bereit state Zustand Bereit procBar Fortschritt 100 96 report Bericht kein Fehle As of August 2004 Service level da
17. Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet Anteuersignal berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 M Betriebsstundenz hler Betriebs stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich _ Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter BriOn Control signal BMBr Operating message Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 367 HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation Delay automatic start In automatic mode burner level 2 is only activated after a minimum time at level 1 Delay Level 1 gt Level 2 Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status for both burner levels Operating message burner 2 or 2 Target operating status Burner 1 or 2 on output Status command execution check 1 or 2 If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled Release malfunction catch
18. ccccceccccceecesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeescesaeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 19 9 20 2 3 NEE 19 3 2 3 3 PC operation with a browser cece cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeaeaeeaaeaaaeaaecaeceaeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeess 20 3 2 3 5 BMS CONNECHION WAPRPRREHEPNBEREFREFFREFREREHEEEEEREEEHEESEHEEEEEEEEEPERTERTELTEREEFEEREEFEEEEEEUSEHEEEEERFEEEEEFEEEEEEHEHERERFERERER 25 EE 25 3 4 control cabinet BUS enden dee dee dvd e Edel eg 29 S Re EE 29 3 4 1 1 Installation autistes ti EHRE 29 3 4 1 3 POWER SUPDIY na SRH kein 29 3 4 2 BMA4024 EE 29 34 3 BMD4032 u er ned a eee eee eee eon Cae in See 32 3 4 4 TR E 33 3 4 5 SBM51 E 35 3 5 Field Nr TC 41 3 9 1 EC 41 e Be el 41 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 12 3 2 central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 1 DDC Central Units 3 2 1 1 DDC4200 3 2 1 1 1 Connection occupancy gt aa Din Coll oO I LA SER IE w LES Kk16 10V 50mA GND10V J Gi J Aj 1 UI A S M CO A HW ay EB Contact occupancy device viewed from behind to the right D sub plug to the left Ethernet socket Please note Kk means a software switching option between a contact input and an output BY means a software switching option between an analog input and an output When connecting a field bus no 12 V DC voltage must be set to the DDC4200 The SMC1 bus connection RS232
19. deleted Reset opr hours boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 288 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 35 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Generating the operating release A Level 1 release is recognized by the Ytarget as being above a limiting value GVV1On Basis 40 It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value GW1Off Basis 20 For the level 2 requests the GW2On Basis 20 and GW2Off Basis 55 limiting values apply In addition for a request the air flow monitoring even in Z forced or manual operation must provide a normal message The outputs Heater level 1 on and Heater Level 2 on outputs are not locked against each other The safety temperature limiter also ends the request chain in non automatic operation In Z forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the two stage electrical fan heater can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the corresponding input for the heater operating message is not switched the output Heater Level 1 on or Heater level 2 is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different
20. text 3 EmailAdr 2 set point deletable deleted text 4 Name 2 set point deletable deleted text 5 EmailAdr 3 set point deletable deleted text 6 Name 3 set point deletable deleted text 7 EmailAdr 4 set point deletable deleted text 8 Name 4 set point deletable deleted text 9 EmailAdr 5 set point deletable deleted text 10 Name 5 set point deletable deleted text 11 EmailAdr 6 set point deletable deleted text Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 484 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 12 Name 6 set point deletable text deleted 4 4 2 1 13 Fax recipient SY_FAX Function summary 1s settable This object administrates 6 different fax connections The fax addresses and the related participant names are saved as string parameters There is no default entry Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 FaxNr 1 set point deletable deleted FAX Number 1 text 2 Name 1 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 1 text 3 FaxNr 2 set point deletable deleted FAX Number 2 text 4 Name 2 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 2 text 5 FaxNr 3 set point deletable
21. Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Rep Y 0 Ant 0 Zw Y ZwSw kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 280 Priority Parameter Value Action Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Anf 0 Z Y Z Preset 1 Y 0 Anf 0 lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 10 H401 Electrical air heater single stage Function summary 4 3 281 The electrical fan heater single stage function block controls a single stage electrical fan heater and supports Generating the operating release Operating hours limiting value Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 BM actual value deletable deleted Plant message Er boolean 4 GW1Ein set point 0 100 60 GVV1ON integer 5 GW1Aus set point 0 100 20 GWIOFF integer 8 STB actual value deletable deleted STB boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE boolean 10 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 11 Ysoll actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Yset integer 12 LS actual value deletable deleted Airstream monit
22. Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 182 Calculating the gliding of the target limitation value glide start lt glide end BegrenzungsSollwert BegrenzungsSollwert Gleitbereich A Begrenzungswert Gleitbereich MIN MAX Sollwert verschi bung Sollwert verschi bung EFg gt 0 EFg lt 0 MIN MAX invertiert MIN MAX Begrenzungswert Gleitanfang lt Gleitende F hrungsgr e Gleitanfang lt Gleitende F hrungsgr e Pie ee ee ee F hrGr lt Gleitanfang BegrSoll BegrWert FuhrGr lt Gleitanfang BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitanfang EFg Gleitanfang F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitende F hrGr Gleitende F hrGr Gleitanfang EFg EFg Gleitende lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende lt Fuhrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitanfang EFg XW Begr BegrF hl BegrSoll glide end lt glide start BegrenzungsSollwert BegrenzungsSollwert Gleitbereich Gleitbereich Begrenzungswert MIN MAX Sollwert verschi bung Sollwert verschi EFg lt 0 EFg gt 0 MIN MAX Begrenzungswert ima Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 183 F hrGr lt Gleitende BegrSoll BegrWert F hrGr lt Gleite
23. Manual influence Y1 float 7802 hY2 set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence Y2 float 7803 hY3 set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence Y3 float 7804 hY4 set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence Y4 float h01 Analoge GLT influence 1 actual value deletable O 100 deleted float h02 Analoge GLT influence 2 actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float h03 Analoge GLT influence 3 actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float h04 Analoge GLT influence 4 actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float i011 System ON actual value 0 boolean i012 Control ON actual value 0 boolean Z Z set point 3 2 value text Z contacts multistate 1 21 Day 0 24 Off 9 Automatic Nr Beschreibung 1 5115 Hier wird die Zuweisung zum Scheduler Wochenprogramm durchgef hrt Ung ltige Werte ergeben sich durch weglassen Folgende Zustandswerte f r den Modus werden unterst tzt 1 Tag 2 Nacht 4 Aus Aus wird demn chst auf 0 ge ndert Dieser Parameter beschreibt den Zustand des Zeitprogramms f r die Regler im folgenden Format aktuellerModus n chsterModus Zeit bis Modus Wechsel in Minuten Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 89 DDC sub software objects Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 90 4 3 2 9 1 S301 Y limitation Activation Sub function of each hea
24. 4 3 7 6 CModMO Function summary 99x settable This object is attached to objects from the Type SY_Module and is used to produce module failure plant messages The malfunction ErrNo DubAdr and Active parameters for each SY_Module are monitored and if there is an ongoing malfunction in one of these parameters a corresponding plant message is generated This message is distributed as per the plant messages by selecting a relevant message set Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 466 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 MSet set point deletable deleted Selection MSet text 2 E A set point deletable deleted ON OFF boolean 101 ju actual value 0 Module message boolean 102 Status actual value 6 0 value text internal Status multistate 0 Start 1 1 Logon running 2 Logged on 3 Logoff running 4 Logged off 5 Feedback running 201 Delay set point 1 3600 600 s Delay integer 202 MTxt actual value 5 0 value text Message text multistate 0 OK 1 double address 2 Fault module 3 Malfunction 4 Fault Code 4 3 8 Device objects 4 3 8 1 Gateway Objects 4 3 8 2 Volume counter 4 3 8 2 1 CD_WA volume counter Function summary Dies ist ein Subobjekt f r die wichtigsten Parameter eines Wasser Z hlers Die hier enthaltenen Parameter sind das Minimum das man von einem Wasser
25. Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM1 and SM2 Malfunction s occurring stCEC1 and stCEC2 StLock Malfunction blocked Pu1 and Pu2 Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z off pump 1 on pump 2 on DOL manual off pump 1 on pump 2 on Zw offlon Rep1 Rep2 SM1 SM2 Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest Manual Off Zw Off Pu1 0 Pu2 0 Rep1 Rep2 Rep1 1 gt Pu1 0 Rep2 1 gt Pu2 0 SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Malfunction blocked 1 Pu1 0 Pu2 0 HI Malfunction blocked 0 As per malfunction dependent pump switching pump is only activated for automatic operation or Zw On Manual Pump 1 on Put 1 Pu2 0 Manual Pump 2 on Pu1 0 Pu2 1 Zw On Pump is activated as per pump switching Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 420 Priority Parameter Value Impact Zlclosed DOL Pu1 0 Pu2 0 Z Pump 1 on Pu1 1 Pu2 0 Z Pump 2 on Pu1 0 Pu2 1 lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 kie
26. Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 327 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 10 BhAktiv set point 0 BHActive Y N boolean 11 BhGw set point 0 infinity 2000 h GW Operating float 12 LEin1 actual value 0 Level 1 boolean 13 LEin2 actual value 0 Level 2 boolean 14 DBE set point deletable deleted DBE boolean 15 Hand actual value 4 0 value text Manual switching status multistate 9 Auto 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 0 OFF 16 Rep actual value deletable deleted Rep switch boolean 17 ResBh actual value deletable deleted ResBh boolean 18 ResSM actual value deletable deleted ResSM boolean 19 Z actual value 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 0 OFF 20 BhGw1 set point 0 infinity 2000 h GW 1 Operating float 21 BhGw2 set point 0 infinity 2000 h GW 2 Operating float 22 SM1 actual value deletable deleted SM Level 1 boolean 23 SM2 actual value deletable deleted SM Level 2 boolean 24 StSperr set point 0 SM blocked boolean 25 tv12 set point 0 infinity 30 S Time Hrs 1 2 float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 328 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 26 tv21 set point 0 infinity 30 S Time Hrs 2
27. malfunction blocked If the unlock catch ResSM is not switched there is a malfunction if at least one of the malfunction message inputs SM 1 If input ResSM is switched the malfunction message output is only reset if there is no other malfunction and the unlocking was released this implements stopping the malfunction message St rmeldeausgang bei HVVOs Reset malfunction message is not occupied T SM1 SM2 SMOut ResSM SM IL sm P oder SM2 oder SM2 Ressm Ressm frei mit Quelle SMOut M SMOt In unabhangig von St rung sperrt und Zustand BAK Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 275 St rmeldeausgang bei HWOs Reset malfunction message is E occupied SM1 SMOut SM2 ResSM SM1 rr oder SM2 ResSM N N mit Quelle SMOut unabh ngig von St rung sperrt und Zustand BAK The objects H501 Cover open closed H611 Valve open closed H801 Volume flower counter constant do not have a malfunction message output as they do not have a malfunction message input 4 3 3 8 H301 Steam moistening unit constant Function summary Areas of use steam moistening unit with the following are supported separate steam feed own steam generation with small tank start up with Y not equal to 0 own steam generation with large tank separate heating requirement before operation The steam moistening unit constant function blo
28. 1 depending on LSU and STB Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 292 Priority Parameter Value Impact lowest Auto Heater level 1 on 1 and or Heater level 2 on depending on Ytarget LSU and STB Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 3 12 H403 Electrical air heater 3 stage Function summary 4 3 293 The electrical fan heater three stage function block controls a three stage electrical fan heater and supports Generating the operating release Operating hours limiting value Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 BM1 actual value deletable deleted Plant message St1 boolean 2 BM2 actual value deletable deleted Plant message St2 boolean 3 BM3 actual value deletable deleted Plant message St3 boolean 4 GW1Ein set point 0 100 30 GVV1ON integer 5 GW1Aus set point 0 100 10 GVV1OFF integer 6 GVV2Ein set point 0 100 60 GW2ON integer 7 GW2Aus set point 0 100 40 GW2OFF integer 8 STB actual value deletable deleted STB boolean 9 DBE actual value deletab
29. 7 The plants are classified into groups vvith logically related functions e g a heating register or a fan vvith guard The DDC4000 objects are sub divided for better clarity Softvvare objects The softvvare objects have functions that control the DDC central unit These include for example the basic programs heating ventilation and separate objects such as arithmetic The basic programs were summarized by function All software functions that are directly related to the basic ventilation program are found under object number S238 This includes for example the cascade or Y limitation Hardware objects The hardware objects describe summarized functions that are used to control plant parts for example operating pumps fans burners etc Basic objects Simple basic functions are implemented with basic objects as timers markers lamps switches and module clamps the PINs Attached objects Parameters may contain attached objects that change them or extend their function For example you can attach a F001 scaling function object to the control variable sensor parameter if this parameter shall to be read in and scaled as a O 10V signal system objects This includes functions that are processed in the DDC Central Unit In general they are not directly related to a plant For example date and time settings or configuring network connections modems etc are system objects Sub objects These objects are used to descr
30. Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 320 4 3 3 18 H601 Fan single stage Function summary The fan single stage function block controls a single stage fan and supports m cover control during the warm up phase request for control Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 AnfRI actual value 0 Begin Flap boolean 3 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 s Start delay Automatic integer 4 BMKIAuf actual value deletable deleted Plant msg Flap OPEN boolean 5 BMLu actual value deletable deleted Plant msg Fan boolean 6 Bh set point 0 2147483647
31. Sender E mail text 17 FAXID set point FAX ID text Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 481 4 4 2 1 10 Plant status signalizing Assignment of symbols and statuses in the quick start bar Plant overview with quick start bar Heizung L ftung K lte RLT Elche EZR Back ffice 1 EG Anmelden With regard to the stated number for the priority the highest value represents the highest priority Off automatic active Priority 1 On automatic active Priority 2 Malfunction automatic active not confirmed symbol flashes Priority 3 Malfunction automatic active confirmed symbol does not flash Priority 3 Off manual influence available Priority 4 O manual influence available Priority 5 Malfunction manual influence available not confirmed symbol flashes Priority 6 Malfunction manual influence available not confirmed symbol does not flash Priority 6 E E EEE Ag Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure 4 4 2 1 11 SMS parameterizing 4 4 2 1 11 1 SMS numbers SY_SMS Function summary 4 4 482 1s settable This object administrates 6 different SMS connections The SMS numbers and the related participant names are saved as string parameters There is no default entry Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit SMS Provider 1 s
32. Source Y limitation float 5312 4 G4 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 4 MMBegr4 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 4 Inv4 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 4 XP4 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 4 EF4 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 174 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5317 4 Anf4 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 4 End4 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 4 EA4 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 4 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 4 active boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 175 4 3 2 10 4 S302 Y set Activation Sub function of basic heating and ventilation program 0 can be set 4 x Can be switched on off via 5327 Q Y SET if not defined ON Function summary With the Y set DDC submenu the Y outputs of the DDC control circuits are stipulated by binary signals on certain parameterizable Y values If the binary signal 1 the stipulated Y value works on the Y output Function description The Y set DDC software object can be installed and set up to four times for one DDC cont
33. The data format of the backup is XML XML means Extensible Markup Language This stores the data backup in well structured plain text Please do no change this file Even saving it with a normal editor can make this file unusable for the DDC Central Unit For interested parties more information from www xml com 4 5 2 5 Plant software update Insert the card with the new firmware software version into the slot on tne DDC4000 Central Unit and press Reset place pen into the hole and activate hidden button with it The yellow LED should flicker for around 90 seconds and then OK will be displayed on the LCD kieback neler Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 508 Then remove the card and press Reset again The device will now be booted with the new version of the program 4 5 2 6 Update bootloader How is the boot loader renewed The compact flash card is inserted into the opening behind the front cover Then a cold start is carried out u Raltstart 1 Taster im Loch bet tigen 2 kurz danach gleichzeitig Warmstart Taster bet tigen 3 Taster im Loch loslassen 4 Warmstart Taster nach 3 Sek loslassen Achtung Daten k nnen verloren gehen Als Best tigung ist ein langer Ton During loading the screen turns grey Then OR appears Boot loader and program updates are made at the same time and register after completion Version 05 06 Kleback net
34. deleted FAX Number 3 text 6 Name 3 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 3 text 7 FaxNr 4 set point deletable deleted FAX Number 4 text 8 Name 4 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 4 text 9 FaxNr 5 set point deletable deleted FAX Number 5 text 10 Name 5 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 5 text 11 FaxNr 6 set point deletable deleted FAX Number 6 text 12 Name 6 set point deletable deleted Participant Name 6 text Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 485 4 4 2 2 Plant messages Plant messages are saved in the message memory SY MsgManintem 01 that is created in 000 00 00 when starting the plant This object is used as an internal message memory Messages with internal message memory destinations e g messages during the start up phase are attached to parameter 103 of the SY_MsgManIntern 01 It is only possible to write in the local internal message memory not in the internal memories of other central units Object status Each object has an object status with fixed defined priority statuses The object status of a parent object is the result of the highest priority object status of its child objects Object statuses stating the priority Lowest priority 1 Off automatic active 2 On automatic active 3 Malfunction automatic active
35. is transferred to the Y output Parameter 5325 destination Y SET sets the Y output that is to be influenced For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs For the basic heating program the Y set always works on the heating control for a Y output Priorities Priority Function Highest Manual intervention Central influence Y set Index 01 Y set Index 04 Limitation functions lowest Basic program control function Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Grundprogramm YL1 YL2 YL3 YL4 Y Set digitale Quelle et Ziel Y SET Y SET Wert Q Y SET Parameters Parameter 5325 x only applies if used in the GP PID YL2 40 001 000 R1 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 1 Ziel1 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 1 Wert1 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 1 Q1 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 2 Ziel2 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 2 Wert2 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 2 Q2 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean Version 05 06 4 3 98 Kleback neter So
36. kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 363 4 3 3 27 H702 Burner 2 stage Function summary The burner 2 stage function block controls a two stage burner and supports pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control Chimney sweep function Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deleted Begin Automatic deletable boolean 2 AnfBr1 set point deleted Begin Burner level 1 ON deletable boolean 3 AnfBr2 set point deleted Begin Burner level 2 ON deletable boolean 4 AnfPK actual value 0 Begin Pump Flap boolean 5 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Start delay Automatic integer 6 BMBr1 actual value deleted Oper msg burner level 1 deletable boolean 7 BMBr2 actual value deleted Oper msg burner level 2 deletable boolean 8 BMPuKl actual value deleted Oper msg pump flap deletable boolean 9 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 10 BhAktiv set point 0 Re Activate oper hrs counting boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software
37. malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Y Z DOL Rep Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Rep Y 0 valve may be set manually Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 349 4 3 3 24 H613 Valve 3 point Function summary The function block supports Idle zone Valve blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control The 3 point valve function block controls a 3 point valve using an analog signal 0 100 If the value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN pulse is created If the Y signal is to be reduced a CLOSE pulse is created Independent of a set idle zone above 97 an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3 an ongoing CLOSE signal is issued The length of the OPEN and CLOSE pulses is calcula
38. 0 Pump ON boolean 5 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Pump setp setting integer 7 BM actual value deleted Pump operation deletable boolean 8 SM actual value deleted Pump fault deletable boolean 9 AnfMin actual value deleted Begin Minimum oper deletable boolean 10 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Start delay Automatic integer 11 PuMinEin actual value 0 Minimum Oper ON boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 410 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 12 Bh set point deletable 0 2147483647 deleted h Operating hours integer 13 BhAktiv set point 0 Oper hrs cnt activation boolean 14 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 16 DBE actual value deleted Direct operating level active deletable boolean 17 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual switch multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 18 LzPBS actual value 0 2147483647 0 min Pump blocking prot run time integer 19 PuNach set point 0 120 0 min Pump coasting integer 20 RMAna actual value 0 100 deleted RM Setting FU deletable integer 22 ResSM actual value deleted Unlock malfunction catch deletable boolean 27 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 28 StzPBS set po
39. 0 h Operating hours integer 7 BhAktiv set point 0 Activate oper hrs counting boolean 8 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 10 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual switch multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 11 LEin actual value 0 Fan ON boolean 12 Rep actual value deletable deleted Repair switch boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 321 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 13 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Entr malfunction catch boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Fan malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 S stBAK delayed integer 18 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 19 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 20 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 21 reg actual value 0 es Begin Control boolean 22 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK Fan boolean 23 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Delay BAK integer 24 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean
40. 2212 Betr std actual value 2147483648 2147483647 0 h Operating time integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 468 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2215 Volumen1 actual value infinity infinity 0 m Volume 1 float 2222 StorZahl actual value 0 Fault counter boolean 2251 Ser nr actual value Serial number text 2252 Volumen2 actual value infinity infinity 0 m Volume 2 float 4 3 8 3 Electrical counter 4 3 8 3 1 CD_WM Electrical counter Function summary Die wichtigsten Parameter eines W rme Z hlers Die hier enthaltenen Parameter sind das Minimum das man von einem W rmez hler erwarten kann Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2211 Energie actual value infinity infinity O kWh energy float 2222 St rZ hl actual value 0 Malfunction message boolean 2251 Ser nr actual value Serial number text 4 3 8 3 2 CD_WM Electrical counter 01 Function summary Die Standard Parameter eines Warme Zahlers am M Bus Viele Warme Zahler am M Bus bieten die hier enthaltenen Parameter an Somit sind diese f r viele Warme Zahler geeignet insbesondere auch f r unbekannte Z hler Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Obj
41. 4 Low outgoing quit green constant triangle Within a priority class the oldest message has the lowest priority and logically the newest message the highest If the maximum number of messages in the message memory is reset to a value that is smaller than the current number of messages deletions are also made as per the rules described above until the new maximum number is reached Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 101 neuM actual value 0 new message boolean 102 quMS set point deletable deleted MS receipt boolean 103 aktM actual value 0 99 0 act number msg integer 104 l6MS set point deletable deleted MS delete boolean 105 maxM set point 1 99 64 max number msg integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 106 voll actual value 0 Memory full boolean 107 kmdM actual value 0 coming notification boolean 108 glob L set point deletable deleted global delete boolean 109 vip l actual value deletable 0 99 deleted VIP Index integer 4 4 2 1 4 Output definition SY_MsgOut Function summary 4 4 475 20x settable In this object the output destinations message sets are defined for messages In diese
42. Analog input P xx CAI 01 Analog output P xx CAO 01 Refer also to the description of the Pin object Each terminal can be configured to an analog input for various sensor types or to an analog output with acknowledgement The sensor type is selected from P xx CAI 01 SType The selection parameter provides all the options for the bus module The terminal s sensor value is available via P xx CAI 01 b The unit depends on the sensor type set and the current module firmware The value is invalid for a sensor break or short circuit Possible values for the BMA4024 details under sensor types Sensor type Value range and unit 0 10V KP10 Pt100 Pt1000 Ni100 Ni1000 DIN Ni1000 L amp G KP250 ML2 The output value is expected on P xx CAO 01 Y Unit is The returned output value is available onP xx CAO 01 y unit is Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus Ze 3001 DOP 01 040 14 40 47 Analog Ausgang GC WV WV Output b100 y y Input O General parameters SY_Module 01 Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module 3 4 31 In SY_Module 01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored Peculiarities m 899 Version number of the firmware module Active The module is reachable and has full function If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module 01 Active is set to 0 m DubAdr The module notifies a
43. Back notify contact 19 actual value deletable deleted reference 6720 Back notify contact 20 actual value deletable deleted reference 6721 Min Switched on time 1 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6722 Min Switched on time 2 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6723 Min Switched on time 3 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6724 Min Switched on time 4 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6725 Min Switched on time 5 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6726 Min Switched on time 6 actual value 0 60 0 min integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 244 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6727 Min Switched on time 7 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6728 Min Switched on time 8 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6729 Min Switched on time 9 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6730 Min Switched on time 10 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6731 Min Switched on time 11 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6732 Min Switched on time 12 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6733 Min Switched on time 13 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6734 Min Switched on time 14 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6735 Min Switched on time 15 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6736 Min Switched on time 16 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6737 Min Switched on time 17 actual value 0 60
44. Input 2 boolean 3 E3 actual value deletable 0 Input 3 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 424 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 4 E4 actual value deletable 0 Input 4 boolean 5 V set point Vector text 6 m actual value 0 Status marker boolean 4 3 4 3 BO P Pin Function summary Das Pin Objekt steht f r eine I O Klemme Uber den Parameter der hinter Par_Config steht wird ein Subobjekt installiert Je nach Subobjekt werden genau die M glichkeiten eines analogen Einganges eines analogen Ausganges eines binaren Einganges oder eines binaren Ausganges angeboten Welche Funktionen m glich sind h ngt vom bergeordneten Modul Objekt ab das die M glichkeiten des betreuten Busmoduls oder der IO Karte kennt Es sorgt daf r dass die Auswahl M glichkeiten bez glich der Subobjekte eingeschr nkt werden Der Parameter hinter Par_Config bestimmt welches Subobjekt angeh ngt wird 0 kein Subobjekt keine Funktion 1 CDI Bin rer Eingang 2 CDO Bin rer Ausgang 3 CAl Analoger Eingang 4 CAO Analoger Ausgang The function of a PINS is stipulated by attaching a sub object e g CAI for analog input For this depending on the hardware of the PIN it is possible to select several sub objects For example a PIN can be an output that can then be read back
45. Q EA limitation boolean v10 2 Limitation actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 134 Calculating the gliding of the target limitation value glide start lt glide end BegrenzungsSollwert BegrenzungsSollwert Gleitbereich A Begrenzungswert Gleitbereich MIN MAX Sollwert verschi bung Sollwert verschi bung EFg gt 0 EFg lt 0 MIN MAX invertiert MIN MAX Begrenzungswert Gleitanfang lt Gleitende F hrungsgr e Gleitanfang lt Gleitende F hrungsgr e Pie ee ee ee F hrGr lt Gleitanfang BegrSoll BegrWert FuhrGr lt Gleitanfang BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitanfang EFg Gleitanfang F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitende F hrGr Gleitende F hrGr Gleitanfang EFg EFg Gleitende lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende lt Fuhrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende Gleitanfang EFg XW Begr BegrF hl BegrSoll glide end lt glide start BegrenzungsSollwert BegrenzungsSollwert Gleitbereich Gleitbereich Begrenzungswert MIN MAX Sollwert verschi bung Sollwert verschi EFg lt 0 EFg gt 0 MIN MAX Begrenzungswert ima Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e Version 05 06 kiebac
46. Software structure 4 3 313 Objects Priority Parameter Value Action Zlclosed Control cover closed Zlopen Control cover open AnfTest Self test lowest Auto Automatic operation Status command execution check operation malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic Forced is prioritized higher than Z Therefore this cover can be used as a butterfly valve e g with a smoke alarm Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 314 4 3 3 16 H503 Cover 3 point Function summary The 3 point cover function block controls a 3 point cover using an analog signal 0 0 100 The function block supports Idle zone Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control The 3 point cover function block controls a 3 point cover using an analog signal 0 00 100 If the value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN pulse is created If the Y signal is to be reduced a CLOSE pulse is created Independent of a set idle zone above 97 an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3 an ongoing CLOSE signal is issued The length of the OPEN and CLOSE pulses are calculated from the value of the change in the Y output and the motor operating times tMotAuf or tMotZu The hardware object can be used for 3 point actuators with and without position feedback signal If no position feedback signal
47. There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal valve input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position valve is used This may come from Target valve position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0 malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e ifthe malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 393 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Hardware Ansteuerung man U MI Hardware Ansteuerung
48. Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Example 1 A 0 10V signal should be converted to 0 350 m h depicted as 0 100 Start of range 0 0 0 End of range 350 0 100 unit m h Example 2 Any analog signal should be calculated in Fahrenheit Start of range 58 0 50 C End of range 302 0 150 C Wert Skalierung 4 3 450 Objects 0 20 40 60 80 P i i i i Leg 100 Q Skal F hler Wert Skalierung Wi o i i 50 100 150 Q Skal F hler Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 A set point infinity infinity 0 AX2 float 2 B set point infinity infinity 1 BX float 3 Cc set point infinity infinity 0 C float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 451 4 3 6 3 F003 Limitation Function summary This object has parameters that are used for limiting the target parameter The calculated new value is entered in the current value of the target parameter The limitation is used for analog values e g the customer should be able to set set point lt xs gt only between 19 23 C although the value range envisages a greater range of values for the parameter lt xs gt Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit OG GWO set point infinity infinity 0 Upper limit value float UG GWU set point
49. auf Wert aktivieren vergleich _Grenzwert berschritten Set auf Wert Grenzwert An important note How does malfunction blocked work The malfunction blocked parameter can be set to yes or no If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM Reset malfunction message Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message Here a link creates a function HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter LOn Control signal BMLu Operating message Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 323 HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message fan Target operating status Fan ON output Status command execution check If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names
50. berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I E Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter BrOn Control signal BMBr Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation Delay automatic start Command execution check 4 3 375 The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message burner Target operating status Burner on output Status command execution check If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Bsz Ruckme
51. deleted release malf self holding boolean 16 SF set point deletable deleted Chimneysweep function boolean 17 SFZeit set point 0 300 30 min Continuous chimneysweep function integer 18 SFaktiv actual value 0 Chimneysweep function is active boolean 19 SM actual value deletable deleted Burner malfunction boolean 20 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 21 VzBAK actual value 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 22 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 23 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 24 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 25 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 26 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK Burner boolean 27 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 28 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 358 pump and cover control during the vvarm up phase request for control If the burner is to be switched on the pump cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational message pump cover 1 if this input is wired Atthe same time as request pump cover the request control is set to 1 This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to pr
52. name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5123 XPY4 set point 0 5 9999 9 10 K XPY4 float 5125 D set point deletable 1 299 deleted s Vorhalt integer 5126 WI set point 0 255 48 Sequence integer 5127 NRegZust set point 0 selection list Not controlled condition selection list No text 0 for Y1 1 for Y2 2 for Y3 3 for Y4 5128 xwh set point 0 9999 9 0 K xwh float 5130 xdz12 set point 9999 9 9999 9 0 K Xdz 12 float 5131 xdz23 set point 9999 9 9999 9 0 K Xdz 23 float 5132 xdz34 set point 9999 9 9999 0 K Xdz 34 float 5138 QFern actual value 3 2 value text Q Remote control multistate 1 Source remote ON 0 Source remote OFF 9 Automatic 5140 Q RELEASE Regelung actual value deletable deleted boolean 5141 Y1min set point 0 100 0 Y1 min float 5142 Y2min set point 0 100 0 Y2 min float 5143 Y3min set point 0 100 0 Y3 min float 5144 Y4min set point 0 100 0 Y4 min float 5145 Y1max set point 0 100 100 Y1 max float 5146 Y2max set point 0 100 100 Y2 max float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 88 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5147 Y3max set point 0 100 100 Y3 max float 5148 Y4max set point 0 100 100 Y4 max float 5169 TAm actual value 50 150 0 C TA middle float 7801 hY1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted
53. request burner on is set to 1 by the control and operational message pump cover For operational message pump cover this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a pump or cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 374 Chimney svveep function The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the chimney sweep function time span if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the chimney sweep function time span even if the request automatic operation is set to 0 in this time Here the Y signal goes to 100 When the chimney sweep function is activated the chimney sweep function active parameter is set to 1 Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the burner can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output burner on is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet Anteuersignal
54. y 8318 Raumkorrektur wenn S300 Optimieren gesetzt dann nur bei 8318 Raumkorrektur Tag wirksam v 315 Sollwertkorrektur v S316 Sollwertferneinsteller vy 8313 Sollwertumschaltung 4 8313 Sollwertumschaltung 3 8313 Sollwertumschaltung 2 nn 8313 Sollwertumschaltung 1___________ vv TVsoll extern gt 5183 a gt Se Min Max Begrenzung Vorlauftemperatur gt TV max 5166 7 l Wenn S313 Sollwert ja umschaltung gesetzt oder gt gt TA nahe T Auslegung Tag nein Nacht TV abs negativ 5167 Nacht TA Reduzierung absenkung 5160 T Auslegung 5172 l gt TVsoll aktuell 5151 Y gt p Q Regelungsgr e XW 5102 5105 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure The controller Version 05 06 Objects Von Blatt 1 xw 5105 y Unempfindlichkeit gegen ber gt P es nderungen 9128 ah be S317 XP Umschaltung Dad EEN 5120 Vv 312 Begrenzung 2 312 Begrenzung 1 N gt Heizungsregelung TN 5106 gt Vorhalt 5125 I y 8312 Begrenzung 2 8312 Begrenzung 1 Y S301 Y Begrenzung vy gt Min Max Sa min Begrenzung gt Y Ausgang Y1 max 5145 Y TRsoll 20 C TRsoll undefiniert n gt TRsoll TRsoll 5180 ggf aus definiert S315 Sollwertkorrektur S316 Sollwertferneinsteller 318 Raumkorrektur Economy S300 Heizungsoptimierung Von Blatt 1 TVsoll aktuell 5151 Economy 5170 Pu
55. 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Repair switch boolean 14 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 15 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock malfunction catch boolean 16 SF set point deletable deleted Chimneysweep function boolean 17 SFZeit set point 0 300 30 min Continuous chimneysweep function integer 18 SFaktiv actual value 0 Cimneysweep function is active boolean 19 SM actual value deletable deleted Burner malfunction boolean 20 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 21 Tot set point 0 50 0 Signal change deadzone integer 22 VZBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 23 Y actual value 0 100 0 Burner setp setting float 24 YAuf actual value 0 OPEN Impulse boolean 25 Yzu actual value 0 CLOSED Impulse boolean 26 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Position display float 27 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Burner setting feedback float 28 Ysoll set point 0 100 0 Setp burner automatic float 29 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 373 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 30 Zw set point deletable deleted Forced control boolean 31 ZwSw set poi
56. 255 off 4 3 7 3 CAO analog output Function summary Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines analogen Ausgangs zur Verfugung Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations Parameter aktiviert werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit y y actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted y Input float Y Y set point 0 100 0 Y Output float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 465 4 3 7 4 CDI binary input Function summary Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines bin ren Eingangs zur Verf gung Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations Parameter aktiviert werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit k akt k actual value deletable deleted Value BE boolean 4 3 7 5 CDO binary output Function summary Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines bin ren Ausgangs zur Verf gung Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations Parameter aktiviert werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit k akt K actual value deletable deleted Actual value BA boolean K K set point 0 Binary output boolean
57. 5491 QR actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Source back 3 position float 5492 t Auf set point 1 2147483647 180 s tMot integer 5493 tZu set point 1 2147483647 180 s tMot_Zu integer 5494 Tot set point 0 50 0 Dead zone integer 5496 Auf actual value 0 Impulse OPEN boolean 5497 Zu actual value 0 Impulse SHUT boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 240 4 3 2 27 S343 E Max Function summary The DDC software menu is used to switch off electrical consumers in a targeted manner The aim is to keep the average electrical energy consumption of a building or technical plant under a stipulated limiting value The software menu parameters can be set flexibly and permit the best possible change for each specific problem and plants Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5427 Q alarm reset set point deletable deleted boolean 5430 Limiting value high rate actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5431 Limiting value low rate actual value 0 01 1000000 200 kW float 5432 Q Limiting value rate actual value deletable deleted reference 5433 Impulse input actual value deletable deleted reference 5435 Scaling actual value 0 1000 1 float 5436 Scaling exp actual value 4 4 1 integer 5437 Q reset actual value deletable
58. 6694 Consumers 14 set point 1 boolean 6695 Consumers 15 set point 1 boolean 6696 Consumers 16 set point 1 boolean 6697 Consumers 17 set point 1 boolean 6698 Consumers 18 set point 1 boolean 6699 Consumers 19 set point 1 boolean 6700 Consumers 20 set point 1 boolean 6841 EJP 1 actual value 1 boolean 6842 EJP 2 actual value 1 boolean 6843 EJP 3 actual value 1 boolean 6844 EJP 4 actual value 1 boolean 6845 EJP 5 actual value 1 boolean 6846 EJP 6 actual value 1 boolean 6847 EJP 7 actual value 1 boolean 6848 EJP 8 actual value 1 boolean 6849 EJP 9 actual value 1 boolean 6850 EJP 10 actual value 1 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 257 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6851 EJP 11 actual value 1 boolean 6852 EJP 12 actual value 1 boolean 6853 EJP 13 actual value 1 boolean 6854 EJP 14 actual value 1 boolean 6855 EJP 15 actual value 1 boolean 6856 EJP 16 actual value 1 boolean 6857 EJP 17 actual value 1 boolean 6858 EJP 18 actual value 1 boolean 6859 EJP 19
59. 6894 Back notify contact 14 actual value deletable deleted reference 6895 Back notify contact 15 actual value deletable deleted reference 6896 Back notify contact 16 actual value deletable deleted reference 6897 Back notify contact 17 actual value deletable deleted reference 6898 Back notify contact 18 actual value deletable deleted reference 6899 Back notify contact 19 actual value deletable deleted reference 6900 Back notify contact 20 actual value deletable deleted reference 6901 Min Switched on time 1 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6902 Min Switched on time 2 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6903 Min Switched on time 3 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6904 Min Switched on time 4 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6905 Min Switched on time 5 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6906 Min Switched on time 6 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6907 Min Switched on time 7 actual value 0 60 0 min integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 260 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6908 Min Switched on time 8 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6909 Min Switched on time 9 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6910 Min Switched on time 10 actual val
60. No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit CalD Calibration D set point 2147483648 2147483647 O integer CalE Calibration E set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 integer CalF Calibration F set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 integer CalS Calibration S set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 integer dbgO Internal set point text Hostnam Host name actual value DDC4000 01 text Logserv Logserver set point deletable deleted text Restart Warm start set point 0 boolean Temp Inside temperature actual value infinity infinity 0 C float Voltage Backup Voltage actual value 0 5 0 V float 4 3 5 4 SY_CAN CAN bus Function summary This object is used to configure the CAN busses Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects CAH Bus Auto Anm FF3000 SB3000 Baudr THFrame RAF rate Error Autoanmeldung 1 FB3000 Freigabe 0 SB3000 Freigabe 1 Baudrate TA Frames 1 RX Frames U Fehler Anzahl U 40 KBaud This defines whether a bus supports Field bus modules or BMD BMA 4 3 439 This object can be set tvvice Index 1 is responsible for the first bus Index 2 for the second Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit AutoAnm Auto logon set point 1 boolean Baudr Baud rate set point 3 0 value tex
61. Regelung Ein 1012 0 Fern Ein und Fern Aus 0 Z Ein undZ Aus 0 Ja Temperaturbedingungen f r Freie Nachtk hlung aktiv 1013 1 Freie Nachtk hlung erf llt und F rele SONS aus 1013 0 1013a 1 Anlage Ein 1011 1 The following is switched by free night cooling Free night cooling works on the Y outputs set in the PID basic program in parameter 5220 YL Choose FN These Y outputs are switched to 100 The free night cooling mode is indicated by internal contact 1013 Free night cooling kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 115 The internal contact of the PID basic program 1011 plant ON is switched to 1 This controls the ventilators Resetting the free night cooling The free night cooling stops if the values in parameters T1 5222 dT1 or 5223 dT2 are lower than the fixed switch back difference of 2K or one of the other conditions is no longer met Priorities Free night cooling is prioritized higher in night operation than the control function of the PID basic program In the PID basic program it is not switched to normal operation if the source 5140 Q release control in the PID basic program is set to 1 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5220 YL select FN set point 2 selection list selection list No text O for Y1 1 for Y2 2 for Y3 3 for Y4 5221 b actual value deletable infinity infinit
62. Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2165 Q_Input actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Store Source MMM float 2166 Max actual value infinity infinity O Max Value t float 2167 Min actual value infinity infinity O Min Value t float 2168 Mittel actual value infinity infinity O Average Value t float 2169 DATE actual value 0 0 0 integer 2195 Q_Sp actual value deletable deleted Store Q boolean 2196 Max_s actual value infinity infinity O Stored Max Value float 2197 Min_s actual value infinity infinity O Stored Min Value float 2198 Mittel_s actual value infinity infinity O Stored Average Value float 2199 Input_s actual value infinity infinity 0 Stored Input float 2200 TIME actual value 0 24 0 h integer Version 05 06 4 3 83 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 84 4 3 2 9 S238 Basic program PID ventilation Activation Basic program PID ventilation can be set 12x Function summary This basic program is a PID control with 4 sequences Using binary source parameters integration into the ventilation controls and regulations is possible without any problems Function extensions are made via DDC soft and hardware objects Function description The control variable sensor m
63. Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs Z Off Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 DOL Manual Off Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Zw Off Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Heater level 1 on 0 Heater level 2 on 0 Heater level 3 on 0 Manual Level 3 Zw Level 3 Heater level 1 on 1 Heater level 2 on Heater level 3 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Manual Level 2 Zw Level 2 Heater level 1 on 1 Heater level 2 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Manual Level 1 Zw Level 1 Heater level 1 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Z closed DOL Heater level 1 on 0 Heater level 2 on 0 Heater level 3 on 0 Version 05 06 Kleback neter 4 3 299 Softvvare structure Objects Priority Parameter Value Impact Z Level 3 Heater level 1 on 1 Heater level 2 on 1 Heater level 3 on depending on LSU and STB Z Level 2 Heater level 1 on 1 Heater level 2 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Z Level 1 Heater level 1 on 1 depending on LSU and STB lowest Auto Heater level 1 on 1 and or Heater level 2 on 1 and or Heater level 3 on depending on Ytarget LSU and STB Status command execution check operation Version
64. The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116 as per the bus addresses 1 to 16 The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 they occupy the technical addresses 201 to 216 Note The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under 000 00 00 SY CAN 01 SY_CAN 02 is responsible for the second CAN bus Clamp depiction Refer also to the description of the Pin object All logical terminal functions are handled from the corresponding Pin object The logical contact connections logical terminals 1 to 32 64 k1 to k32 64 or K1 to K32 64 match the Pin objects P 01 to P 32 64 The number of the physical contact connection screw terminal number does not match a Pin object e g screw terminal number 4 logical terminal 1 P 01 P xx Pin type selection determines which function objects sub objects are attached to the Pin object The module object depends on a CDI digital input function and a CDO digital output function Digital input P xx CDI 01 Digital output P xx CDO 01 Refer also to the description of the Pin object Each terminal is configurable to the digital input or digital output with acknowledgement kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 35 The digital input value is available from P xx CDI 01 k The output value is e
65. a new set point is calculated that is depicted as the current value on parameter 5151 TStarget current Minimum and maximum limits for the supply temperature are set in parameters 5165 TS min and 5166 TS max The basic heating program sets the control states day regulation and night rules set points for the start For night rules the supply temperature is lowered to a value set in parameter5167 TS abs TS target calculation TO vz lt 15 C TStarget day 20 KH EF TO vz 24 TO vz m 15 C TStarget day 20 KH EF 1 8 TO vz 36 TStarget night TStarget day TS abs For setting the heating control parameter 5120 XPY1 to set the P share 5106 TN to set the I share and 5125 rate to set the D share are used The control variance control variable TStarget current is displayed in parameter 5105 XW Parameter 5128 xwh sets a non sensitive zone i e within xw 0 xwh the Y output is not changed If xw exceeds this range the control is normal The basic heating program has a constant Y output The Y output calculated from the basic program can be overwritten through BMS influence manual intervention or through DDC sub menus e g S302 Y Set The current calculated value for the Y output is between 0 100 and is displayed on parameter 5173 YH1 The output of the Y output values occurs via source parameterizing in the basic programs of the DDC Central Units DDC4000 and the DDC modules DDC bus module BMA BMD
66. aus dem Objekt berwachungszeit Bsz Bst R ckmeldung Br von der Hardware x BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter BrOn Control signal from the object Bsz BMbr acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs a not malfunction blocked 0 b switches the outputs request pump cover request control and burner on off malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the outputs to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects nicht beschaltet gt anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Hardware Ansteuerung p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltun
67. deleted reference 5440 Measuring cycle actual value 10 180 60 s integer 5441 Switch scale factor actual value 1 4 2 integer 5442 Wait time actual value 0 5 3 integer 5443 Measuring interval actual value 10 60 15 min integer 5444 Source OFF E max actual value deletable deleted reference Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 241 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5447 E max status set point 3 0 value text multistate 0 No GW 1 GW 1 2 GW 2 5448 E max alarm set point 0 boolean 5450 max nr of consumers set point 0 20 0 integer 5451 act energy amount Z set point 0 10000000 0 kWh float 5452 act power Z set point 0 10000000 0 kW float 5453 Trend power set point 0 10000000 0 kW float 5455 P total set point 0 999999 875 10 RVV float 5456 P current set point 0 999999 875 10 RVV float 5457 P from set point 0 999999 875 10 RVV float 5487 P last measuring interval set point 0 10000000 0 kW float 6641 Max switched off time 1 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6642 Max switched off time 2 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6643 Max switched off time 3 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6644 Max switched off time 4 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6645 Max switched off time 5 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6
68. i Modem Hangup kath 7 Einwahl SMSC D1 pOw01 71252100 Arm Kunde Info LA Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects N237000 00 0078Y_Modcont o1 Modem Config L g Einwahl SMSC 0w01771167 10 Einwahl SMSC Owi 11 SMSProtokall DI TAPS 12 SMSProtokall D2 UCP51 13 SMSProtokall E TAPS 14 SMSProtokall A TAPS 15 IP_AdrSMTP Se 16 Absender Email Hier kann fur den jeweiligen SMS Provider das Protokoll eingestellt werden Z B Parameter 9 Einwahl SMSC E Hier wird die Einwahlnummer angegeben Z B Parameter 13 SMSProtokoll E Hier kann das benutzte Protokoll umgestellt werden Zur Zeit Version 1 1 sind 2 Protokolle implementiert 4 3 446 Au erhalb Deutschlands kann hier das Protokoll eingestellt werden und in den Einwahlnummern die orts bliche Nummer 4 3 5 14 SY_Network The network interfaces are configured in this object Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 447 IE 6 58 00 Netzwerk Konfig Gateway Gateway Adr bizz 2 0 1 Fort b DU projo Frojekt Mummer p 000 00 00000 projsub Frojek subhHetz 1 CEth 01 CEth CRS465 01 R5465 IF Konf T CRS232 01 RS232 IF Konf Gi Funde Below you can see the setting options for the J Y St Y network The 2 default setting for the sub network can be seen twork O1 CRSA85 01 18 59 55 23700 D ODFODES Me RS485 IP Konf amp 1 IF Substring b 192 166 Z Metz
69. i i i i 1 i i f CG I I l Zeitgh i 0 i i i I 999 0 Endwert 2 8 0 0 D N Startwert 999 0 Example Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5680 Steigt set point 0 999 1 Slope h float 5681 Steig set point 0 999 1 Slope h float 5682 Auf actual value deletable deleted Time gl boolean 5683 Ab actual value deletable deleted Time gl boolean 5684 Ausg actual value infinity infinity 0 Time slides float 5685 Start set point infinity infinity O Time slides float Version 05 06 4 3 216 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5686 Ende set point infinity infinity O End value float Version 05 06 4 3 217 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 218 4 3 2 17 S327 Pulse counting Function summary The DDC softvvare object S327 impulse counter has the function of counting operating cycles The counted pulses can for example be scaled for calculating the heat volume The pulses are recorded with the counting parameter 5695 count value in A The recording and counting takes place permanently and always with the 0 1 flank of the pulse occurring The heat volume and delta heat volume are calculated in a fixed interval of 1 minute The heat capacity is calculated in an interval as per parame
70. is used for internal diagnosis purposes Only DDC4000 Central Units can communicated with each other via the RS485 Z bus connection with JY St Y It is not possible to exchange data with a DDC3000 via this For the DDC4200 central unit a mini UPS is available this requires a longer starting time as the internal energy store has to be charged The mini UPS can bridge power breaks of maximum 5 seconds and ensures the system software is switched off properly Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 13 3 2 1 1 2 Technical data DDC control circuits a Within the DDC4200 are 12 control circuits available This matches the range of functions in the DDC3200 Bus connection Ethernet 99 DDC4000 Central Units can be administrated networked globally via active network components 10 100 Mbits s 2 CAN busses can be switched individually as a field or control cabinet bus Field Bus F Bus 63 FieldBusModule FBM in future there are plans for 99 FBMs 2000m 20kBaud CAN J Y St Y 2x2x0 8mm At the point furthest from the central unit a termination resistance of 180 Ohm must be attached between BUS and BUS Control Cabinet Bus SBM Bus 16 ControlCabinetBusModules SBM 200m 40kBaud CAN Interfaces serial RS232 Modem printer CompactFlash for CompactFlash card update data backup file recovery behind the front panel Inputs and outputs 32 b
71. nicht beschaltet beschaltet p anliegende St rung anliegende St rung fk weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Senate El Seal M mm gt Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Switching priorities Objects 4 3 352 The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 353 4 3 3 25 H614 Valve constant Function summary The valve constant function block controls a constant valve with target setting of 0 100 The function block supports a Valve blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control
72. not confirmed 3 Malfunction automatic active confirmed 4 Off manual influence available 5 On manual influence available 6 Malfunction manual influence available not confirmed 6 Malfunction manual influence available confirmed Highest priority Creating an incoming message If amessage monitoring was set up for any object s parameter and an incoming message was created the object status of the attached FO SelectionMessageOutput changes to the value of 3 not confirmed If the object does not already have a higher priority object status this object status is adopted as per the mechanism described above By transferring the object status to the superior object the object status is transferred up with the result that the operation during navigation by the plant tree indicates the constantly applicable plant status of the selected sub tree e g flashing warning triangle etc The generated incoming message is written in the message memory and also has object status 3 not confirmed Confirming a message Ifthe related message is confirmed in the message memory the object statuses of this message and the related message monitoring change to 3 confirmed Creating a normal message If the monitored parameter changes again to an uncritical value a normal message outgoing message is generated by the message monitoring and the generated message taking on the object status 2 ON automatic active The tim
73. outside temperature can be selected as a guidance signal The command value only results in a change to the set point within a glide range The glide range is stipulated by the parameters 8613 GLIDE START and 8614 GLIDE END The influence of the guidance signal on the limiting value change is determined with the parameter 8611 EF GVV If EF is negative this can force a reduction in the set point The current limiting value is indicated in the parameter 3 XS akt limiting value If no limiting value gliding is active COMMAND VALUE invalid or EF GW 0 the limiting value and XS akt limiting value are identical The function of the limiting value calculation can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 using a binary source 5748 Q EA limiting value If no binary source is selected the function is switched ON Based on the start and end of glide ing the following calculation arises for the set point gliding glide start lt glide end glide end lt glide start Comvalue lt glide start Delta_glide 0 Comvalue lt glide end Delta_glide EF glide start glide end glide start lt Comvalue lt Delta glide EF glide end lt Comvalue lt Delta_glide EF glide glide end Comvalue glide start glide start start Comvalue glide end lt Comvalue Delta_glide EF glide glide start lt Comvalue Delta glide 0 end glide start Set point XS current basic program Delta_glide
74. resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt an die Hardware Bsz Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK N d N HVVO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Br1On or Br2On Control signal from the object Bsz BMBr1 or BMBr2 acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 368 HVVO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC BriOn and Br2On Control signal to the hardware Bst StCEC1 or stCEC2 CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is vvired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM1 and SM2 or stCEC1 and stCEC2 may affect the output control a not malfunction blocked 0 b switches the outputs request pump cover request control and Burner 1 on and Burner 2 on malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the outputs to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wi
75. unlock malfunction catch is wired a malfunction that occurs in the command execution check is saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If Unlock malfunction catch is not connected any malfunctions that occur are not saved malfunction message soldered strut contact is not caught itself Malfunction is not handled An adjoining command execution check does not influence the control of the control cover output Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ti weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Som a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch stCEC Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Control cover The following input parameters influence the control of this output AnfZu Z closed open manual closed open Zw closed open Priority Parameter Value Action Highest Manual Closed Zw Closed Control cover closed Manual open Zw open Control cover open Version 05 06 Kleback neter
76. 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5465 Limiting value full load winter actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5466 Limiting value peak load winter actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5467 Limiting value EJP actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5468 act energy amount Z set point 0 10000000 0 kWh float 5469 act power Z set point 0 10000000 0 kW float 5470 Trend power set point 0 10000000 0 kW float 5471 QP actual value deletable deleted reference 5472 Q HC actual value deletable deleted reference 5473 Q EJP actual value deletable deleted reference 5474 Q EJP notification 30 min actual value deletable deleted reference 5475 Q EJP notification 24 h actual value deletable deleted reference 5476 Q even month actual value deletable deleted reference 5477 P total set point 0 999999 875 0 kW float 5478 P current set point 0 999999 875 0 kW float 5479 P from set point 0 999999 875 0 kW float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 254 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5480 P last measuring interval set point 0 10000000 0 RVV float 5481 Impuls input eff power actual value deletable deleted reference 5482 Scaling eff power actual value 0 1000 1 float 548
77. 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6773 Power consumption 12 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6774 Power consumption 14 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6775 Power consumption 15 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6776 Power consumption 16 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6777 Power consumption 17 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6778 Power consumption 18 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6779 Power consumption 19 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6780 Power consumption 20 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6781 Priority 1 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6782 Priority 2 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6783 Priority 3 actual value 1 3 1 integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 247 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6784 Priority 4 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6785 Priority 5 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6786 Priority 6 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6787 Priority 7 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6788 Priority 8 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6789 Priority 9 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6790 Priority 10 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6791 Priority 11 actual value 1 3 1 inte
78. 0 MANUAL OFF 9 AUTO s 01 s 01 set point 0 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 1 Manual OFF boolean 4 3 4 10 BO S_31 3 push buttons AUTO Manual off Manual on Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 3 Schaltern a Zustand Taste 1 AUTO m Zustand Taste 2 HAND AUS m Zustand Taste 3 HAND EIN Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 3 0 value text Switch Status multistate 9 AUTO 0 MANUAL OFF 1 MANUAL ON s 01 s 01 set point 1 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 MANUAL OFF boolean s 03 s 03 set point 0 MANUAL ON boolean 4 3 4 11 BO S_32 3 push buttons AUTO manual Level1 ON OFF Level 2 ON OFF Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 3 Schaltern Zustand Taste 1 AUTO HAND Zustand Taste 2 STUFE1 EIN AUS Version 05 06 4 3 429 Kleback neter Software structure Objects a Zustand Taste 3 STUFE2 EIN AUS Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 4 1 value text Switch Status multistate 9 AUTO MANUAL 0 OFF 1 MANUAL ON LEV 1 2 MANUAL ON LEV 2 s 01 s 01 actual value 0 AUTO MANUAL boolean s 02 s 02 actual value 0 MANUAL LEV 1 boolean s 03 s 03 actual value 0 MANUAL LEV 2 boolean 4 3 4 12 BO S_41 4 Push but
79. 0 Start 1 1 Success msg active 2 normal 3 Error msg active 4 Failure 5 Success msg active 4 3 6 13 FAIMO Sensor monitoring Function description settable 99 times The functional object FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput is used to monitor the sensor and generate sensor failure messages For this purpose it is to be attached to the b parameter of a CO Analoginput As such events as sensor breaking short circuit poling etc are detected from this object only the validity of the b value is monitored but not whether limiting values are exceeded or undershot No sensor failure message is generated if the value of b has become invalid due to a module failure or I O card failure Alternatively sensor failure messages only make sense for registered modules or I O cards If a general failure monitoring is desired for all sensors within the central unit each related Type CO_AnalogInput object should have a FO AnaloginputMessageOutput attached Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 MSet set point deletable deleted Selection MSet text 2 E A set point deletable deleted ON OFF boolean 101 u actual value 0 Signaling output boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 457 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 102 Status actual value 6
80. 0 min integer 6757 Min Switched off time 17 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6758 Min Switched off time 18 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6759 Min Switched off time 19 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6760 Min Switched off time 20 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6761 Power consumption 1 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6762 Power consumption 2 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6763 Power consumption 3 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6764 Power consumption 4 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 246 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6765 Power consumption 5 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6766 Power consumption 6 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6767 Power consumption 7 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6768 Power consumption 8 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6769 Power consumption 9 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6770 Power consumption 10 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6771 Power consumption 11 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6772 Power consumption 12 actual value deletable
81. 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 3 3 35 H905 Double pump Function summary Objects The double pump function block controls a switchable double pump and supports Switching delays Command execution check Pump blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control pump switching varies with operating hours per switching parameter or for malfunctions Operating hours limiting value Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deleted Begin Automatic operation deletable boolean 2 Bh2 set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs Pump 2 integer 3 Put actual value 0 Pump 1 ON boolean 4 Pu2 actual value 0 Pump 2 ON boolean 5 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 7 BM1 actual value deleted Operation msg pump 1 deletable boolean 8 SM1 actual value deleted Pump 1 fault deletable boolean 9 Rep1 actual value deleted Repair switch pump 1 deletable boolean 10 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Startup delay of the automatic integer 11 BM2 actual value deleted Operation msg pump 2 deletable boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 414 No nam
82. 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 168 4 3 2 10 3 S301 Y limitation Activation Sub function of each heating and ventilation basic program 10 can be set 4 x Can be switched on off via 5319 Q EA Y limitation if not linked ON Function summary The DDC software object S301 Y limitation influences the min or max limits of the Y outputs for the DDC control circuits basic program A difference is to be made betvveen tvvo influence options that can jointly affect the basic function of the DDC control circuits 1 Depending on a limitation factor the Y outputs Y min or Y max set in the basic program for the DDC control circuits are altered The influence on the Y min or Y max occurs after the limitation factor reaches a particular limiting value For the MAX limit the limiting value must have exceeded the limiting value for the MIN limit the limitation factor must be below the limiting value so as to influence the setting range of the Y outputs By inverting the Y limit YES NO the direction of influencing the Y setting range is stipulated 2 In addition to the functions stated in 1 the limiting value of the limitation factor can itself glide in a particular range l e depending on the outside temperature basic program the limiting value of the limitation factor is also changed Function description Re 1 The limitation factor is set in parameter 5311 source Y limitation Any
83. 13 t00 low 14 t00 high 15 too hot 16 too cold Txt_G Text going set point multistate value text 0 Controller OK 1 Summer 2 Auto 3 inactive 4 normal 5 Normal operation 6 OFF 7 OPEN Delay Delay set point deletable integer 3600 deleted S Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 478 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 9 uGw set point infinity infinity 0 Lower limit value float 10 Testw set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 Test value integer 101 u actual value 0 Signaling output boolean 102 Status actual value 6 0 value text internal Status multistate 0 Start 1 1 Success msg active 2 normal 3 Error msg active 4 Failure 5 Success msg active 4 4 2 1 6 Sensor failure message FAIMO Function description settable 99 times The functional object FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput is used to monitor the sensor and generate sensor failure messages For this purpose it is to be attached to the b parameter of a CO Analoginput As such events as sensor breaking short circuit poling etc are detected from this object only the validity of the b value is monitored but not whether limiting values are exceeded or undershot No sensor failure message is generated if the value of b has become invalid due to a module failure or I O card failure Alte
84. 2 0 FB AO BACnet AA 0 2 0 FB AV BACnet Analog Value 0 2 0 FB BI BACnet Binary Input 0 2 0 FB BO BACnet BA 0 2 0 FB BV BACnet BV 0 2 0 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 449 object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 FB IR BACnet message unreleased FB MI BACnet Multistate Input 0 2 0 FB MO BACnet MA 0 2 0 FB MV BACnet MVV 0 2 0 FB TR Trend unreleased FDest Destination 0 1 9 FMSG message 0 1 9 FSelMO Selection signal set 0 1 9 FSource Source 0 1 9 4 3 6 1 F001 Scaling Function summary This object has parameters that are used for scaling the target parameter The calculated nevv value is entered in the current value of the target parameter F001 Skalierung kann an einem Float Parameter installiert werden Mit dem Polynom y Ax Bx C wird der Parameter skaliert Bsp Eine F hlerkorrektur von 1 5 K h tte folgende Einstellung A 0 0 B 1 0 C 1 5 Bsp Ein 0 10 V Eingang auf den Bereich 20 bis 20 skaliert A 0 0 B 4 0 C 20 0 Function description The function object F001 Scaling assign a new value range to an analog signal The value range is defined by a start and an end value The scaling refers to the value range of the input magnitude The start scaling and End scaling parameters stipulate the value range The scaled value is provided directly to the object output of the relevant analogue value
85. 3 120 4 3 2 9 8 S308 Minimum room temperature Activation Sub function of Basic PID program can be set 1x Can be switched on off via 5364 Q EA minimum room temperature if not defined ON Function summary The purpose of the minimum room temperature DDC software object for ventilation plants is to prevent excessive cooling at night and when the ventilation plant is switched off Le the minimum room temperature works both in automatic mode out of usage time and when in off mode due to remote OFF or Z contact OFF Function description It can be switched off using the binary source Q_EA Minimum_Room temperature To monitor the room temperature a sensor must be set in source parameter Q Room sensor Min RT If the room temperatures fall below the set limiting value TRlimit the following is switched The minimum room temperature works on the Y output in the PID basic program set in parameter Y room This output is controlled as per the XS current from the PID basic program The minimum room temperature status is displayed with the internal contact Min TR 1 The internal contact of the PID basic program plant ON is switched to 1 This controls the ventilators With the return message from the ventilators via source parameter Q release control the internal contact Control ON is then switched to 1 The related control however remains OFF i e it only works on the Y output set in parameter Y room If the room
86. 5141 Yimin set point 0 100 0 Y1 min float 5145 Y1max set point 0 100 100 Y1 max float 5178 Q_EA actual value deletable deleted Source EA fixed value boolean 5250 Lead size SG actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5251 Slide start SG set point 100 300 22 float 5252 Slide end SG set point 100 300 32 float 5253 EF SG set point 10 10 0 5 float 5324 Yfix set point 0 100 100 Y fix float 5327 Q_fix actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean 5328 Manual influence Y1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted float 5329 analog BMS influence Y1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted float 5 Nr Beschreibung 1 5100 Sollwert 2 5102 Quelle Regelgr e 3 5106 Nachstellzeit 4 5107 alternativer Sollwert 5 15108 Umschalter f r den alternativen Sollwert XS 2 6 15110 Y Ausgang 7 5120 Proportionalbereich 8 15124 Heiz oder K hlsequenz 9 15129 Aktivierungschalter f r die Sequenzumkehr Version 05 06 Kleback neter 4 3 236 Software structure Objects Beschreibung 10 5141 YMin 11 5145 YMax 12 5178 Schalter Festwert ein aus 13 5250 F hrungsgr e der Sollwertgleitung 14 5251 Gleitanfang der Sollwertgleitung 15 5252 Gleitende der Sollwertgleitung 16 5253 Verst rkungsfaktor Sollwertgleitung 17 5324 vorgeb
87. 9 327 Impulse count 0 4 328 Operation hours 0 3 329 Amt heat calc 0 4 330 Amt heat DT 0 4 333 Ring counter 0 4 334 Table function 0 2 0 335 Sensor switchover 0 1 47 337 Fix value reg 0 1 9 338 Sliding unreleased 342 Impuls Output 0 3 343 E Max unreleased 344 Nr degree days 0 4 347 E Max france unreleased 901 Signal generator unreleased Version 05 06 4 3 76 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 77 4 3 2 3 S066 limiting value Activation Sub function of all basic programs 99 times can be set Can be switched on off via 5748 Q EA limiting value if not defined ON Function description Analog values measured or calculated values can be monitored for going above or below limiting values with the DDC software object S066 limiting value The value to be monitored is set in the 4839 Q limiting value parameter The stipulation of the min and max limiting value is made in the 8615 Selection Min Max infringement parameter If the value selected in the parameter 8610 limiting value is reached an internal contact parameter 2 g MENU OUTPUT limiting value is set The switch back takes place with a switch back difference in line with parameter 8612 Xsd The limiting value can glide depending on any analog command value parameter 4832 Q COMMAND VALUE This guidance signal lifts or lowers the limiting value set Any analog value in the DDC4000 system e g
88. DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE boolean 16 Zw actual value deletable deleted Forced control boolean 17 ZwSw set point 0 100 0 Setpt forced control float 18 Y actual value 0 100 0 Y float Version 05 06 4 3 276 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 277 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 19 Anf actual value 0 Beg boolean 20 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK boolean 21 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Generating the target operating state control during the movement phase handling the standby message If the AnfAuto input is deleted a request is detected by whether the Ytarget is above a limiting value GwYtarget The limiting value view of GwYtarget is marked with a fixed hysteresis Xsd of 3 The monitoring of the flow must be guaranteed by advance regulation or control The target operating status request steam moistening unit is formed from the view above and from advance Z DOL manual Zw and ZwSw Rep SM see below for priorities The following different movement methods are used for the steam moistening unit 1 Version 05 06 AnfAuto is deleted and GwYtarget equals 0 If a Ytarget gt 0 is stipulated request steam moistening unit is set to 1 and Y is set to Ytarget AnfAuto is deleted and GwYtarget is greater than O T
89. Each analog signal in the DDC4000 system can be scaled The scaling refers to the value range of the input magnitude 0 100 Parameters 5551 start scaling and 5552 End scaling set the value range The scaled value is provided in parameter 5554 scaling value Using parameter 5553 min output delta the analog signal can be calmed e g a sensor value If e g 0 0 is entered all changes are calculated and provided as a scaled value If e g 0 5 is entered all changes greater than 0 5 units are re calculated and provided as a scaled value Parameter 5555 attentuation works as a PT1 Glide If the input signal value changes 5550 Q Scal sensor in jumps a 63 change in value from the original input jump is achieved at the output 5554 Value Scaling after the attentuation time Please note The analog signal for measuring element KP10 sensor inputs that are set for KP10 can not be scaled If the input signal 5550 Q Scal sensor is deleted or invalid the output 5554 value scaling 0 0 If the input signal lt 0 the output signal takes the value of its lower limit 5551 start scaling or if gt 100 the value of its upper limit 5552 End scaling Scaling value End of scaling Start of scaling Scal sensor 100 start of scaling Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Example 1 A 0 10 V signal should be converted to 0 350 m h depicted as 0 100 Objects 4 3 211 F Start of rang
90. H611 Valve OPEN SHUT 0 1 9 H612 Valve BUS unreleased H613 3 point valve 0 1 9 H614 Valve cont 0 1 9 H701 One level burner 0 1 9 H702 Two level burner 0 1 9 H703 Burner modulat 3 point 0 1 9 H704 Burner cont modulating 0 1 9 H801 Volume current controller const 0 1 9 H802 Volume current controller cont 0 1 9 H901 One level pump 0 1 9 H903 Pump FU Bypass 0 1 9 H904 Pump BUS unreleased H905 Double pump 0 1 9 Version 05 06 4 3 269 kiebackepeter Software structure 4 3 3 3 Priorities and signals Objects 4 3 270 Priorities auto Z DOL manual forced and malfunction There are various options for influencing the setting signals Setting signals are changed in the various hardware objects be the following intervention variable Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM Described in the relevant trouble shooting section usually switch off outputs Rep Zw Off Manual Off Switch off outputs Manual open Zw open Switch on outputs Z closed DOL Switch off outputs Z On Switch on outputs lowest Auto Automatic operation SM Malfunction message from the field Rep Repair switch influences a block released on the device for repair work Zw Forced influence intervention through regulating or control events e g to integrate superordinate malfunction messages such as frost guards forced on forced off or forced values Manual Manual influence Interve
91. In the DDC4000 the IP address and sub network mask must be adapted in the following parameters xx central unit 000 Module Module 000 00 plant plant 0 00 group group 0 SY_Network 01 Object index EtIPAddr Parameter IP address EtMask Parameter Sub network mask EtActive Parameter switching the Ethernet to active in the DDC4000 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 24 SEE Zentrale L 000 DDC4200 L 002 Digital IO L 001 Analog IO L 102 BMD4064 L 101 BMA4024 L ULC L 01 000 DDC4200 ei 00 Anlage 0 L 01 Heizungsa L 02 L ftungsanl L 01 000 00 Anlage 0 La 00 Gruppe 0 L 01700000700 Gruppe 0 5Yy_Config 01 System Konfigur 5Y_Modul 01 System 5Y_Datsi 01 Datensicherung SY ModConf 01 5Y_Network 01 Netzwerk Konfi 01 000 00 00 5Y_Network 01 DV Hosts 01 Hosts Netzwerk Ronfig L DV Simu 01 Simulationwert EtActive Ethernet Aktiv 1 DV DSub 01 D SUB Konfig EtIP Addr Ethernet IP Adr EtMask Ethernet Maske EtBcast Broadcast Adr EtMac Ethernet MAC RsActive R5465 Aktiv RsIPAddr RS485 IP Adr RsMask R5465 Maske The sub network mask must be the same as in the laptop The IP address must not be the same as in the laptop but must match the sub network mask The Ethernet must still be switched on via the lt EtActive gt parameter Now it is possible to access the DD
92. MVA Megavolt amperes 11 VA Reac Volt amperes reactive 12 KA Reac Kilovolt amperes reactive 13 MVA Reac Megavolt ampere reactive 14 cos Q Degrees phase Phasenverschiebung 16 J Joule J 17 RJ Kilojoule KJ 18 Wh Watt Stunden Wh 19 kWh Kilowatt Stunden KWh 20 BTU BTUs 22 tonh Tonnen Stunden 23 J kg dry air Joule pro Kg tockener Luft 24 BTU pdry air btu per pound dry air 25 1 h Zyklen pro Stunde 26 1 min Zyklen pro Minute 27 Hz Hertz Hz 28 g H O kg Gramm Wasser pro Kilogramm trockener Luft 29 Relative Feuchte rF Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 67 No unit description 30 mm Millimeter mm 31 im Meter 32 in Inches 33 ft Feet 34 W ft Watts per square foot 35 W m Watt pro Quadratmeter 36 Im Lumen Lichtfluss 38 Foot Candels Microsoft Bookshelf American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language defines foot candle as a unit of measure of the intensity of light falling on a surface equal to one lumen per square foot 39 kg Kilogramm 40 Ibs Pounds mass 41 it Tonen 42 kg s Kilogramm pro Sekunde 43 kg min Kilogramm pro Minute 44 kg h Kilogramm pro Stunde 45 Ibs min Pounds mass per minute 46 Ibs h Pounds mass per hour 47 W Watt VV 48 kW Kilowatt KW 49 MW Megawatt MW 50 BTU h Btu per
93. Meter 178 Wb Weber 179 Cd Candela 180 Cd m Candela pro Quadratmeter 181 K h Kelvin pro Stunde 182 K min Kelvin pro Minute 183 Js Joule Sekunden 256 min K Minutes per Kelvin 257 g kg Gramm per Kilogramm Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 72 4 3 Objects 4 3 1 General Objects are consistently used in the DDC4000 This applies both for producing the firmware and for the plant structure and projecting The objects visible in the service interface are classified to aid the technician with a better clarification Software objects Are functions that regulate the DDC Central Unit These include for example the basic programs PID and heating and separate objects such as arithmetic The basic programs were summarized by function All software functions that are directly related to the GP PID are found under object number S238 This includes for example the cascade or Y limit The parameters that are part of such functions are collected in folders and are therefore offered in the service level Hardware objects are summarized functions that are used to control plant parts Basic objects Basic objects are for example timer marker switches and the terminals of modules the PINs system objects These are functions that are processed in the central unit In general they are not directly related to the plant The system objects include for example setting the date and tim
94. No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5291 Q actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Setpoint Correction float 5292 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Setpoint Correction boolean 5293 release SWK set point infinity infinity 5 K float 5294 Release SWK above set point infinity infinity 5 float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 190 4 3 2 10 8 S316 Set point remote control Activation Sub function of Heating and ventilation basic program 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined ON Function summary DDC software object set point remote control addresses an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read Function description Parameter 5260 actuating variable sets the value of a set point control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system whose value range was previously scaled to 0 100 The value range for the set point remote setting is set with parameter 5261 Start remote and parameter 5262 End remote The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being set The calculated set point is depicted on parameter 5265 XS remote control This analog value replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit The func
95. Q1 If 3 switch has the value 1 the value of 2 is switched to Q2 The result is depicted in parameter 4 output This value can be used as an analog source in the complete DDC4000 system in jedem DDC Regelkreis Mit Hilfe einer bin ren Quelle Ausgang werden die beiden F hler abwechselnd Quelle F hler 1 Quelle F hler 2 age I ordnet Eingang f r rr 0 Quelle 1 Umschaltung 1 Quelle 2 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Q1 actual value deletable infinity infinity 10 Q1 float 2 Q2 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q2 float 3 Umschalt actual value deletable deleted Q Switchover boolean 4 Ausgang actual value infinity infinity 0 Output float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 233 4 3 2 24 S337 Basic program fixed value Activation GP Fixed value can be installed up to 12 x A PID regulator can be replaced by 4 fixed value regulators Function summary The fixed value software object is a Pl control with a sequence The fixed value regulator program is a Pl regulator with a Y output Other parameters are for advanced functions e g P regulator Set point conversion Set point glide Y limitation Y set Function description The 5102 source control variable parameter can be assigned any
96. StzPBS set point 0 2147483647 720 min Start time blocking prot integer 29 VZBAK actual value 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 30 VzBAKFu set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAKFu delayed integer 31 Z set point 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 21 FU_ON 31 BY_ON 32 ZW set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 33 Zs set point 0 100 0 Pump Z influence setpoint integer 34 ZwSw set point 0 100 0 Setpoint forced control integer 35 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 36 pbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 37 stBAK actual value 0 Status pump command exe control boolean 38 stBAKFu actual value 0 Status FU command exe control boolean 39 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 40 tBAKFu set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAKFu integer 41 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 404 Function description Bypass The optional bypass branch secures pump operation if a frequency converter malfunction occurs the pump runs without control in this case The outputs Pump FC ON and Pump Bypass ON are never active atthe same time The bypass function is switched on or off using the ByAktiv parameter Switching delays It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic ope
97. TRtarget day operation or 5181 TRmin night operation parameters The 5382 ER correction parameter determines the influence of the normal variance from the target room value to the correction of the target starting temperature value Correction target starting value XW Room ER Corr Day TStarget current TStarget heating curve room temp TR target ER Night TStarget current TStarget heating line TS abs room temp TR min ER Example Heating curve with EF 2 If the room temperature is too low the KH is raised Therefore the target supply temperature is raised If the room temperature is too high the KH is lowered Therefore the target supply temperature is lowered If the room temperature falls faster than 2K h after the passing of a delay period 5383 delay RK the target supply temperature is corrected This suppresses short term set point corrections e g if a window was opened for a short period of time If this delay is not wanted the 5383 delay RK entry should be deleted with CE basic The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Q EA room correction If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure N L 120 BEIN Objects Au entemperatur TA T AA 20 10 Priorities 4 3 196 If the DDC software object S300 Optimize is set at the same time th
98. Version 05 06 Si parameterizing Meldung Lp Parameter Klartext und Adresse gt Text kommend Text gehend Meldeset Bestatigt kommend gehend Zeitstempel kommend gehend 4 4 472 SY_MsgOut Meldeset Mastermeldung Ggf Delay Meldeziele lokal Meldespeicher Anzeige etc Meldeziele global Meldespeicher Anzeige GLT etc Welche Email Welche SMS Welches FAX Welcher Kontakt Ersatzmeldeset Weiterleitung Nur interner Meldespeicher Drucker SY_EMail Email 1 Email 2 Email 3 Email 4 Email 5 Email 6 SY_SMS SMS 1 SMS 2 SMS 3 SMS 4 SMS 5 SMS 6 SY FAX Fax 1 Fax 2 Fax 3 Fax 4 Fax 5 Fax 6 SY SignalContacts Kontakt 1 Kontakt 2 Kontakt 3 Kontakt 4 Kontakt 5 Kontakt 6 SY MsgMan 01 Anlagenmeldespeicher h chstpriorisierte Meldung Adresse best tigt kommend Alle Quittieren Alle l schbaren l schen Maximale Anzahl von Meldungen Speicher voll Anzahl der vorliegenden Meldungen Meldung 1 Meldung 2 Meldung SY MsgManintern 01 Systemmeldespeicher Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 473 Plant messages Plant messages are used to monitor e g such malfunction statuses as malfunction messages or values exceeded e g for level monitoring The follovving
99. Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 22 In the properties window displayed click on the lt Internet protocol TCP IP gt element under lt General gt and click on properties 4 Eigenschaften von LAN Verbindung m kiebackepeter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 23 Eigenschaften von Internetprotokoll TCP IP el xil A properties window for the internet protocol TCP IP Allgemein opens Click on the Use following IP address option IP Einstellungen k nnen automatisch zugewiesen werden wenn das 9 H Netzwerk diese Funktion unterst tzt Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an den Netzwerkadministrator um die geeigneten IP Einstellungen zu beziehen C IP Adresse automatisch beziehen fe Folgende IP Adresse verwenden IP Adresse 132 168 O 30 Subnetzmaske 255 255 Dep 0 Standardgateway O DNSSER Eradresse automatisch beziehen Folgende DNS Serveradressen verwenden Bevorzugter DNS Server Alternativer DNS Server I Erweitert Abbrechen Enter the relevant IP address e g 192 168 0 30 and the appropriate sub network mask e g 255 255 255 0 For the example above the DDC4000 s IP address may only contain 192 168 0 xxx for communication to be established After changing a firmly assigned IP address the laptop must be restarted DDC4000 settings
100. Z influence manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfTest actual value deletable deleted Begin Self test boolean 2 AnfZu actual value deletable deleted Begin Flap CLOSED boolean 3 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 4 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Auto 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 5 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Entr malfunction catch boolean 6 SMlot actual value deletable deleted Malf msg solder contact boolean 7 Stell actual value 0 Setting O 0 C 1 boolean 8 Test actual value 3 2 value text Display self test multistate 24 Test running 1 Test error 0 Test ok 9 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s StBAK delayed integer 10 Y actual value 0 Anst Flap boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 310 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 11 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 12 Zu actual value deletable deleted to end position boolean 13 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 14 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK boolean 15 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 16 tMot set point 0 600 120 S
101. a BMS port BACO is used BACnet communication To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units and a PC with Internet Explorer only port 80 is used To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units ports 19280 and 19281 are used Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 17 3 2 3 2 Ethernet To use the Ethernet interface the socket on the back of the device is connected with a network cable type Cat 5 or Cat 6 Cat 7 A difference is made between 1 1 connection so called patch cables and cross over cables Cross over cables are for directly connecting two devices e g a DDC4000 and a service PC In all other cases a patch cable should be used for example in combination with a switch For communication each DDC4000 can use up to 3 IP addresses 1 for all services when using Ethernet cabling 2 if J Y St Y cabling is used and 3 for connecting via the modem PPP The IP addresses and sub network mask and any essential gateway address are provided by your system administrator If a closed network is to be set up that has no connection to the outside world the IP addresses can be assigned freely The recommendation in this case is to use the addresses 192 168 1 nnn for the Ethernet connection This address is set by default 3 2 3 2 1 Network settings Sy_Network In the service interface plant 00 and group 00 must be opened The system objects are found
102. actual value 1 boolean 6860 EJP 20 actual value 1 boolean 6861 Max switched off time 1 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6862 Max switched off time 2 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6863 Max switched off time 3 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6864 Max switched off time 4 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6865 Max switched off time 5 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6866 Max switched off time 6 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6867 Max switched off time 7 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6868 Max switched off time 8 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6869 Max switched off time 9 actual value 5 60 60 min integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 258 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6870 Max switched off time 10 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6871 Max switched off time 11 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6872 Max switched off time 12 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6873 Max switched off time 13 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6874 Max switched off time 14 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6875 Max switched off time 15 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6876 Max switched off time 16 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6877 Max switched off time 17 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6878 Max switched off time 18 actual value 5 60 6
103. also ends the request chain in non automatic The operating hours of the three stage electrical fan heater can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the corresponding input for the electrical heater operating message is not switched the output Heater Level 1 on Heater level 2 or Heater level 3 is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 296 Aneen ana Betriebsmeldung g BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I S Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3 Control signal BM1 or BM2 or BM3 Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status for the three
104. analog value in the DDC4000 system The control can be switched between two set points 5100 XS and 5107 XS2 The switch occurs via the 5108 Q XS XS2 parameter that can be assigned any binary value It also possible to glide the current set point according to any analog command value e g the outside temperature The analog value is connected with the 5250 command value SG parameter The set point gliding is calculated from the values for 5251 glide start SG 5252 glide end SG and 5253 EF SG as per the set point glide functions described for the PID sub menu The effect of the fixed value control can be set to either heating or cooling via the 5124 Sequence parameter A binary source in 5129 Q sequence converter can also switch the effect of the sequence The fixed value control works depending on the set reset time 5106 tN as a P or Pl control The proportional range is set in the 5120 XPY1 parameter The current Y value is indicated in the 5110 Y1 parameter The Y output can be limited via 5141 Y1 min and 5145 Y1 max The Y output value calculated by the control unit can be overwritten by enforced intervention This is possible on the one hand via the setting for the value in 5324 Yfix If the binary source in 5327 Q Y Fix 1 the Y output is set to the Yfix value Furthermore enforced setting is also possible via 5328 manual influence Y1 and 5329 analog BMS influence Y1 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Obj
105. browser Which services can be carried out with the operating and display unit in the variants promted above Variants 1 2 and 3 can be operated observed and parameterized Is bus wide access to other Modular automation stations possible yes Can an I O component be deleted from the component bracket without affecting other AS components yes even under voltage Is the deletion of an I O component from the AS detected and is this information available for further processing yes Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 16 3 2 2 Touch panel 3 2 2 1 DDC4001 3 2 2 1 1 Connection occupancy 3 2 2 1 2 Technical data The DDC4001 includes a PC with touch screen functions All depictions are made in full screen mode with Internet Explorer External size of DDC4001 Total dimensions W x H 300 x 217 5 mm Section in control cabinet W x H 280 x 197 5 mm Display cut out 171 x 128 mm Display diagonals 213 6 mm 8 4 3 2 3 Central communication Ethernet 3 2 3 1 General The communication between the DDC Central Units is designed for an Ethernet connection For this the DDC Central Units have a socket into which the Cat cable with the RJ45 plug is inserted daag aa PPRA fan us w et Ne N Ne u a en HAALT DEET e Ben ai e es er Ee aa LL ma TEL VEURS ASAS To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units and
106. can be stipulated in H004 This stipulation creates the parameters that belong to the connected counters etc Third party devices on the SBM51 are fond in Appendix b1 In this example H004 for Gruppe 5 counter H004 01 Ger t am M Bus HOA 3 Ger t am M Bus Ho04 03 Ger t am M Eus Ll Ho04 04 Ger t am M Eus mn Ho04 05 Ger t am M Bus a Ho04 06 Ger t am M Bus A Hoo04 07 Ger t am M Bus amp An kunde Ka System object SY_Module 01 is responsible for a module s general issues For details refer to the description of the SY_Module Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 38 technical bus address Module bus address on the SBM bus IIXXX The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116 as per the bus addresses 1 to 99 The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 they occupy the technical addresses 201 to 216 Note The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under 000 00 00 SY_CAN 01 SY_CAN 02 is responsible for the second CAN bus Selection of specific SBM51 IIxxx 00 00 SY_SBM51 01 Config Module SBM51 04 is selected Another device can be selected This should be done carefully as it is not possible to check for an appropriate SBM device The SBM device itself only supplies the information that it is a SBM51 but not
107. correction in the DDC3000 The value range for the set point correction is set with parameters upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being corrected SPC release SPC UL release SPC LL 100 Q SPC in 0 100 release SPC LL Parameter source target correction absolute value sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system The value range produced from this analog source is processed as a real value e g 5 5 K The imported value is kept in the upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC limits Higher lower values are cut off The source target correction absolute value has a higher priority than source target correction 0 100 The function of the DDC sub menu can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Q EA Target correction If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Priorities If in addition to the DDC software object set point correction a DDC software object set point switching and or set point remote control is active the following priorities apply Priority Function Highest Set point switch 1 313 1 Set point switch 2 S313 2 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 188 Priority Function Set point switch 3 S313 3 Set point
108. counter unreleased CD VVA01 VVater counter unreleased CD VVA02 Water counter unreleased CD_WM Heat counter 0 2 0 CD VVM01 Heat counter 0 2 0 CEth Ethernet 0 3 33 CLI088 SNVT Alarm unreleased CLI095 SNVT Switch unreleased CLI106 SNVT Setpoint unreleased CLI108 SNVT HVAC Mode unreleased CLI109 SNVT Occupancy unreleased CLI112 HVAC Status unreleased CLI117 SNVT Setting unreleased CLO088 SNVT Alarm unreleased CLO095 SNVT Switch unreleased CLO106 SNVT Setpoint unreleased CLO108 SNVT HVAC Mode unreleased CLO109 SNVT Occupancy unreleased CLO112 HVAC Status unreleased CLO117 SNVT Setting unreleased CModMO Module message 0 3 CPort Port 0 3 33 CRS232 RS485 IP conf 0 3 CRS485 RS485 IP conf 0 3 Version 05 06 4 3 463 Kleback neter Software structure Objects object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 CUser User 0 1 9 4 3 7 2 CAl analog input Function summary 4 3 464 Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines analogen Eingangs zur Verf gung Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations Parameter aktiviert werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit b b actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C b float SType FTyp set point 10 1 value text Sensor type multistate 0 0_10V 1 KP10 2 Pt100 3 Pt1000 4 Ni100 5 Ni1000 DIN 6 Ni1000 L amp G 7 KP250 8 ML2
109. decimal 7 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 60 If you are unfamiliar with this depiction of numbers the Windows calculator found under accessories may help as long as it is switched to scientific The default setting column Init 0 means that no status is selected String The string parameter type is always used when none of the other types offer adequate options So this is used for telephone numbers e g 49 30 60095 0 or IP addresses e g 192 168 0 1 Source Reference In a reference parameter type addresses that point to other parameters from where the value is to be obtained are entered 4 1 3 Object principles The following image presents the key objects with a potential type of connection and use Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure General background 4 1 61 Objekte in der DDC4000 Anlage m SVVO Softwareobjekt z B Heizungsregleung SVVO Softwareobjekt z B Grenzwert auf 5 von YH1 4832 FG 2g MO Modulobjaki Schaltschrankbus 05 101 00 00 P 01 PIN Objekt 00 P 01 FAO 01 DedHVVO FO Hardwareobjekt Funktionsobjekt z B Ventil 3 Ysoll 6Y 05 101 00 00 P 02 PIN Objekt 00 P O2 FAO 01 HVVO Hardwareobjekt z B Pumpe Funktionsobjekt FAO 1 AnfAuto 19 Pu On all inputs analog and binary sou
110. deletable deleted reference 6674 Source Manual 14 actual value deletable deleted reference 6675 Source Manual 15 actual value deletable deleted reference 6676 Source Manual 16 actual value deletable deleted reference 6677 Source Manual 17 actual value deletable deleted reference 6678 Source Manual 18 actual value deletable deleted reference 6679 Source Manual 19 actual value deletable deleted reference 6680 Source Manual 20 actual value deletable deleted reference 6681 Consumers 1 set point 1 boolean 6682 Consumers 2 set point 1 boolean 6683 Consumers 3 set point 1 boolean 6684 Consumers 4 set point 1 boolean 6685 Consumers 5 set point 1 boolean 6686 Consumers 6 set point 1 boolean 6687 Consumers 7 set point 1 boolean 6688 Consumers 8 set point 1 boolean 6689 Consumers 9 set point 1 boolean 6690 Consumers 10 set point 1 boolean 6691 Consumers 11 set point 1 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 256 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6692 Consumers 12 set point 1 boolean 6693 Consumers 13 set point 1 boolean
111. different ways 1 via the parameter number and 2 via the parameter name The parameter number is unique to only one object Each object can have for example a parameter with the number 12 and the text Rep For this addressing is possible in sources and links both via language unattached parameters and via parameter names The use of texts instead of numbers is advantageous for planning plant assignments and when reading sources However for the software objects the numbering of the DDC3000 menu was used A customer specific plain text can also be set for the relevant parameter Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure 4 3 2 2 All software objects List of all software objects Objects SVO belongs to S066 limiting value S083 Arithmetic 116 Calendar 126 MMM storage 238 GP_PID GP PID 300 Optimization Heating 301 Y limitation Heating and PID S302 Y set Heating and PID S303 Cascade PID S304 Start up switch draft PID S305 Optimize ventilation PID S306 FNK PID S307 stet_Frost PID S308 min_Roomtemp PID S309 Standstill PID S310 Energy selection PID S311 Sequence change PID 8312 Limitation Heating and PID S313 Set point switching Heating and PID S314 Set point glide PID 315 Set point correction Heating and PID 316 Set point remote control Heating and PID S317 XP switching Heating
112. displayed can be completed Anlage w hlen HA Station Sporthalle Be EE H rsaal Stra enseite Hofaeite You can use the second column to navigate within the service level If DDC4000 is activated you can then select the desired plant Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 496 b Si gaya 01 000 DDC4000 002 Digital IO 001 Analog IO 201 BMA 4024 UIs UT By selecting the central unit plant 0 and then group 0 you enter the system object level Here you can select the desired system object The current value is in the right column in the parameter level This field must be selected if you want to change the parameter value You move to a higher level by pressing ESC 4 5 1 2 User administration The user administration is not currently 2006 active As a base of 3 users were introduced that match the code levels Users are administrated on various levels Users with the same name on various DDC4000 devices and a connected BMS are seen as the same user Users can be assigned various rights code levels on various DDC4000 devices This assignment also applies to remotely controlled DDC Central Units no matter whether via a different DDC or browser Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 497 So for example it is possible to give a heating technician code
113. field bus module FBM control cabinet bus module SBM For the Y output it is possible to set amax and a min limit parameters 5141 Y1 min and 5145 Y1 max Through central unit influence remote control or usage time programs you can switch between different control statuses day regulation night rules OFF heat up auto in the basic heating program The resulting DDC control circuit statuses are shown via internal contacts I004 day regulation 1005 night rules 1007 heat up and 1009 control status OFF This and other internal contacts can be used for other links in the PLC Internal contact parameter I001 Pump switches on the pump of the heating circuit It is switched off with a hunting time as per parameter 5182 pump hunting Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 152 Internal contact parameter 1003 boiler request displays the boiler request In control operation and in combination with the DDC software object S300 Optimize heating it is set when heating and intermediate heating Priorities Basic heating program switch control statuses Priority Function Comment Highest 5175Source remote control Ifthe source remote control is not set or set to auto the basic heating program depends on any remote control by a BMS or the assigned usage time program Z Z contacts If the Z contacts are not influenced or the Auto state set the basic heating program depends on the assigned usage time p
114. handling disappears p Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt ResSM nicht beschaltet beschaltet SM gt gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung SEK weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung l St rungsselbsthaltung gt gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung Pu StSperr Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z on off DOL manual on off Zw on off Rep SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 400 Priority Parameter Value Impact Manual open Zw open Rep Pu 0 Manual open Zw open Pu 1 Z closed DOL Pu 0 Z On Pu 1 lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation Status command execution check operation Request regulation malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic If the pump not as a result of the pump blocking protection pbs is switched on PU 1 and the operating message whose proper function is shown the signal reg request regulation is set to 1 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 401 4 3 3 33 H903 P
115. hour 51 HP Pferdest en PS HP 52 t Tons refrigeration 53 Pa Pascal Pa 54 kPa Kilo Pascal kPa 55 bar Bar 56 Ibs in Pounds force per square inch 57 mm HO Zentimeter Wassers e 58 in H O Inches of Water 59 mm Hg Millimeter Quecksilbers e Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 68 No unit description 60 cmhHg Zentimeter Quecksilbers e 61 inHg Inches of mercury 62 C Grad Celsius 63 K Grad Kelvin 64 F Degrees Fahrenheit 65 DDC Gradtagzahl 66 DDF Degree days Fahrenheit 67 Y Jahre 68 M Monate 69 W Wochen 70 d Tage 71 h Stunden 72 min Minuten 73 s Sekunden 74 mis Meter pro Sekunde 75 km h Kilometer pro Stunde 76 fs feet per second 77 1 ft min Feet per minute 78 mph Miles per hour 79 P Cubic feet 80 m Kubikmeter 81 Imp gal Imperial Gallons equal to 4 quarts 4 546 liters 82 Liter 83 US gal United States Gallons equal to 4 quarts 3 785 liters 84 ft min Cubic feet per minute 85 m s Kubik Meter pro Sekunde 86 Imp gal min Imperial gallons per minute 87 Is Liter pro Sekunde 88 I min Liter pro Minute 89 US gal Min US Gallons per minute Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 69
116. influences intermediate heating pre lovvering preset the heating up time and the adaptions Basic PID program In the PID basic program for active set point switching the current set point XS current is overwritten If in addition to the basic program the DDC software object S314 set point glide also works this calculated XS current is overwritten Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 1 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 1 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 1 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 1 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 2 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5286 2 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 2 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 2 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 3 Q XS actual value deletable 50 150 deleted C Q Sondersollwe
117. is via the module address 001 03 001 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 55 Plant The analog card itself has no plants so plant O is selected access to the PINs always via plant 0 03 001 00 Group The analog card itself has no group so group 0 is selected access to the PINs always via group 0 03 00 1 00 00 Object Index Access to the PIN object and therefore to the logical contact connection 03 00 1 00 00 P 01 Sub object The PIN object contains a sub object This PIN is therefore defines as an analog input CAI 03 00 1 00 00 P 01 CAl Parameters Access to the b parameter where the analog value is located 03 00 1 00 00 P 01 CAl b Function object Index A function object is not required for access to the b parameter Parameter of the function object A function object parameter is not required for access to the b parameter Example 4 Access to the 101 parameter message output of the function object message set of a PIN on e g aBMD4032 Central unit For central unit 04 04 Module Access to the BMD 4032 that is installed on the 1st CAN bus and as the first module 04 101 Plant A BMD itself has no plant so plant 0 is selected access to the PINs always via plant 0 04 101 00 Group A BMD itself has no group so group 0 is selected access to the PINs always via group 0 04 101 00 00 Object Index Access to the PIN object an
118. level 3 on the heating DDC and only code level 1 on the fan DDC Later for protocolling in line with FDA CFR21 Part 11 it will be possible to log any changes by a user to a DDC4000 on the BMS 4 5 2 Import data backups software updates 4 5 2 1 Cold start warm start reset Cold start The process after removing the cover is as follows The button in the hole is pressed with a pen and held down refer to image lower button Then press and hold the pen button upper button Now release the button in the hole and hold the pen button for a further 3 seconds After finally releasing the pen the central unit will boot A long acoustic signal is generated This means that the cold start was successful Warm start The process after removing the cover is as follows Simply press the pen button refer to image upper button The warm start saves for example current set point changes or time program changes and reboots the DDC4000 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 498 Reset The process after removing the cover is as follows The button in the hole is simply pressed refer to image lower button 4 5 2 2 Import data PS4000 The PS400 planning tool is used to import a projection The BACnet file object is used for transfer Prerequisites Laptop with network card RJ45 connection Cross over network cable for a 1 to 1 connection fr
119. multistate 0 OFF 1 Receipt s 01 s 01 set point 0 Receipt boolean 4 3 4 7 BO S_21 2 push button MANUAL AUTO ON OFF Function summary Dieser Schalter hat die Funktion mit dem ersten Knopf Auto Hand und mit dem zweiten Knopf Ein Aus zu schalten Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 3 2 value text Switch Status multistate 9 AUTO 1 Manual ON 0 Manual OFF s 01 s 01 set point 0 AUTO Manual boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 OFF ON boolean 4 3 4 8 BO S_22 2 push buttons AUTO Manual On Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 2 Schaltern Zustand Taste 1 AUTO Zustand Taste 2 EIN Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 2 0 value text Switch Status multistate 9 AUTO 1 ON s 01 s 01 set point 1 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 MANUAL ON boolean 4 3 4 9 BO S_23 as 22 Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 2 Schaltern Zustand Taste 1 AUTO m Zustand Taste 2 AUS Version 05 06 4 3 428 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 2 0 value text Switch Status multistate
120. neter Software structure Objects 4 3 455 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit berw Monitoring open set point multistate value text 0 no monitoring 1 Switch to 0 2 Switch to 1 3 Exceeding 4 Falling below 5 Equality 6 Exceed or below 7 Invalid E A On Off set point deletable boolean deleted oGw Upper limit value set point float infinity infinity 95 Xdz Switchback diff set point float infinity Txt_K Text coming set point multistate 17 value text 0 Controller damaged 1 Winter 2 Manual 3 active 4 abnormal 5 Maintenance 6 Malfunction 7 Alarm 8 Danger 9 Initial 10 Optimization 11 ON 12 CLOSE 13 t00 low 14 t00 high 15 too hot 16 too cold Txt_G Text going set point multistate value text 0 Controller OK 1 Summer 2 Auto 3 inactive 4 normal 5 Normal operation 6 OFF 7 OPEN Delay Delay set point deletable integer 3600 deleted S Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 456 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 9 uGw set point infinity infinity 0 Lower limit value float 10 Testw set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 Test value integer 101 u actual value 0 Signaling output boolean 102 Status actual value 6 0 value text internal Status multistate
121. parameter 113 it is not related to SWO PID The configuration of the SWO free night cooling depending on the usage time of the SWO PID occurs using parameter 5227 observecoolingtime Observe cooling time Yes Free night cooling is only active if the remaining outstanding hours to the next plant start as per the set usage times is smaller than the value set in the cooling time parameter Observe cooling time No Stated time conditions are switched off for free night cooling The following status condition from the SWO PID must be met Control mode automatic OFF Info 4 111 plant ON 0 112 Control ON 0 Automatic operation Remote On 0 9 Remote Off 0 9 Z influence Z On 0 9 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 113 Z Off 0 9 If all these requests are met the SWO free night cooling works on the relevant SWO PID by switching on the plant via parameter 111 and the regulator sequences are moved in line with the setting of parameter YL Wahl FN The SWO PID does not go to normal operation Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 114 Function of free night cooling Nein Quelle Ein Aus Au enternperatur dt2 lt Raumtemperatur Raumtemperatur Raumsollwert dt1 Freie Nachtk hlung abh ngig von Nutzungszeit Anlage Stunden bis Analgen Start ber Nutzungszeit lt Stunden Par K hlzeit Ja Nein Par
122. parameters for the Ethernet TCP IP interface Function description The Ethernet IP Parameter contains the device s TCP IP address If the device ID for BACnet is not set separately in the Sy_Module system object BACnet Deviceld parameter the last number in the RCP IP address applies to the BACnetDevicelD Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 19 Example 192 168 0 42 as an IP address no separately assigned BACnetDevicelD then 42 is the BACnetDevicelD The network is switched on with the aid of the Ethernet active parameter This starts the TCP IP and BACnet drivers Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Gateway Gateway set point 192 168 1 100 Gateway Addr text MACAdr MACAdr actual value 00 0B 64 00 00 00 text Port Ul Server set point 0 65535 80 integer projNo PN set point 000 00 00000 Project Number text projSub PS set point 1 Project SubNetwork text 3 2 3 2 2 Other DDC Central Units in the network TCP IP addresses of the DDC central control units System object Sy_Host is used to set up the network The TCP IP addresses of the other DDC Central Units found in the central bus are entered in the parameters The PS4000 makes the entry Refer to objects gt system objects gt Sy_Host 3 2 3 2 3 Ethernet tests Communi
123. po a Aktiv u d IP dr kt 192 168 2 29 a MAC Adr 10 06 64 00 00 1 6 Broadcast 192 160 2 2599 H Mack b 259 203 209 0 The active IP address is visible in parameter 4 It is comprised of 1 the IP sub string the network 2 and the DDC Central Unit address If the network or network administrator stipulates another IP a special IP address can be stated in parameter 8 Anm If an IP changes the network switches itself off automatically Version 1 0 1 1 Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure 4 3 6 Attachment functions Function objects Objects 4 3 448 To expand influence parameters function objects F_ etc are used This should for example enable a parameter to be scaled without losing the reference to an output parameter object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 F001 Polynomial 0 1 43 F002 Operating hours 0 1 9 F003 Input limit 0 4 0 F004 Self holding 0 4 0 F005 Command execution check 0 4 0 F006 Damping 0 2 0 F007 Delay 0 2 0 F008 Limit value monitoring 0 1 9 F009 Blocking protection 0 2 0 F010 Block prot st 0 2 0 F011 Z contact unreleased F012 Scaling unreleased F013 Simulation 1 0 4 F014 Inverting 0 3 33 F015 Counter unreleased F016 Replace value unreleased F017 Object status 0 1 9 F019 Adjustment 0 4 0 FAIMO Sensor over 0 2 0 FB Al BACnet Analog Input 0
124. possible This control status is indicated by switching the internal contact V10 limitation and 1020 XP switching from 0 to 1 Limiting value glide can occur for both the min and max limiting values using command value source parameter 5275 command value limit The range in which the min and max limits should glide is stipulated by parameters 5277 glide start limit and 5278 glide end limit The influence of gliding is set by parameter 5276 EFg If 5276 EFg 0 glide does not occur If inverting is set winter compensation takes place i e the limiting value is raised if the command value falls below the value of 5278 glide end limit kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 131 If no inverting is set summer compensation takes place i e the limiting value is raised ifthe command value exceeds the value of 5277 glide start limit This means that inverting exchanges internally to calculating glide stat and end Please refer to the end of the document for all glide calculations BegrenzungsSollwert N MIN MAX EFg2 0 N MIN MAX invertiert Begrenzungswert Gleitanfang Gleitende F hrungsgr e When inverting the min limit Inv limit the effect of the limitation function is inverted works like a max limit When inverting the max limit Inv limit the effect of the limitation function is inverted works like a min limit Limitation Inverting XW cal
125. pulse is created Parameter 5496 Pulse OPEN Ifthe Y signal is to be reduced a CLOSE pulse is created Parameter 5497 Pulse CLOSED The length of the OPEN or CLOSED pulse is calculated from the change in value of the Y output the motor run times and whilst considering the idle zone For a 3 point control without feedback potentiometer in order to calculate the length of the impulse the change in the calculated Y signal source Y 3 point is viewed otherwise for control with feedback potentiometer the difference between the Y target position source Y 3 point and the current acknowledgement source return 3 point It is possible to set different motor run times that vary with the direction with 5492 tMot_Auf and 5493 tMot_Zu Independent of a set idle zone above 97 an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3 an ongoing CLOSE signal is issued Using source parameterizing the 3 point outputs Pulse OPEN and Pulse CLOSED are to be assigned contact outputs for the DDC4000 system Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects Berechnung ohne R ckf hrpoti tAuf Malduf Ar 100 dee Morey Ar 100 Berechnung mit R ckf hrpoti Celle Quelle Ruck y tidfoiduy N 4 3 239 Auf Impuls wenn 2 U Ae 100 CuelleRnek Leer Mot u Zu Imp uls wenn a eae Odes 100 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5490 IQ actual value 0 100 0 Source Y 3 position float
126. set once Can be switched on off via 5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined ON Function summary DDC software object set point remote control addresses an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read Function description Parameter 5260 actuating variable sets the value of a set point control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system whose value range was previously scaled to 0 100 The value range for the set point remote setting is set with parameter 5261 Start remote and parameter 5262 End remote The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being set The calculated set point is depicted on parameter 5265 XS remote control This analog value replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit The function of the sub menu can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Status 0 Q EA TargetRemote If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Grundprogramm DDC Regelkreis akt Sollwert Sollwertferneinsteller digitale Quelle Of 0 Q Stellgr e 0 100 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 146 Priorities If in addition to the DDC software object set point remote control a DDC software object set point switching and or set point correction is active the following prior
127. sources 21 28 Q EA sensor 1 8 there is also the opportunity to remove each individual analog source from the min max average calculation If the binary source is switched on or not source set the corresponding analog source is included as per its factor in the calculation The calculated values for the min max and average calculation are provided on parameters 31 Min selection 32 Max selection and 33 average It is possible to access these values using source setting from other software and hardware objects of tne DDC4000 system Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 B1 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 1 float 2 B2 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 2 float 3 B3 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 3 float 4 B4 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 4 float 5 B5 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 5 float 6 B6 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 6 float 7 B7 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 7 float 8 B8 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted MMM Sensor 8 float 11 F1 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 1 float 12 F2 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 2 float Version 05 06 Kle
128. stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter PuFu or PuBy Control signal from the object Bsz BM acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter reg Control signal from the object Bsz BMFu acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCECFu Monitoring time tCEC VzCECFu Alarm delay time VzCEC PuFu Control signal to the hardware Bst stCECFu CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 407 Malfunction messages that occur SM and SMFu or stCEC and stCECFu may affect the operation of the switching outputs a not at all malfunction blocked 0 b if the relevant outputs are switched off or changed malfunction blocked 1 If the parameter malfunction pump blocked is set a malfunction that occurs must switch off the outputs Pump FC ON and Pump Bypass ON If the parameter malfunction FC blocked is set the output Pump FC ON is switched off If the parameter malfunction FC requires bypass is set the output Pump bypass ON is activated when the automatic functions requir
129. stBAK delayed integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 301 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer 19 Zw set point deletable 0 100 deleted Forced control integer 21 Anf actual value 0 Anfo recv contin boolean 25 stBAK actual value 0 Malf BAK boolean 30 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Delay BAK integer 31 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Generating the operating release A request in automatic operation is recognized by the Ytarget being above a limiting value GWY target Basis 5 The limiting value view is marked with a fixed hysteresis Xsd of 3 In addition for a request the air flow monitoring even in Z forced or manual operation must provide a normal message The safety temperature limiter also ends the request chain in non automatic operation In Z forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked The target operating status request electrical fan heater constant is formed from the view above and from Z DOL manual Zw and ZwSw Rep SM see below for priorities Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Oper
130. supply air is e g 1 e 1K the rocker is moved by 1 K i e if 21 C L 94 C xw 0 the supply air is 1 Kelvin higher 1 D e ee than the room temperature constant 20 C r 20 C heat feed L The difference 5209 Diff supply air can be set both positive and negative The function of the DDC sub menu can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source 5210 Source EA Cascade If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON When switching between ON OFF and OFF ON a gliding transfer takes place in the control unit Priorities If the DDC sub software object set point glide is installed and activated for the PID basic program a set point gliding also results in glide ing the XS current in the PID basic program room set point as well as to glide ing the supply air Min limitation if Yes is set in parameter 5207 gliding cascade The maximum limit for the supply air has priority over the limitation of the temperature difference between supply air and room Example The function of the cascade control can be compared with a rocker The room or exhaust air temperature works on the right level of the rocker The left lever raises or lowers the supply air The length of the supply air lever can be compared with the influence exhaust air IR setting At IR 3 the supply air lever would be 3 times longer as the exhaust air lever at IR 5 it would be 5 times as long The functions are clarified via the following images The ro
131. switch 4 S313 4 Set point remote control S316 lowest Set point correction S315 Example DDC control circuit set Lower limit SPC release Upper limit SPC release valid range for a set point to be corrected point correction 20 C 4 6 16 C to 26 C 5mBar 0 2 5 mBar to 7 mBar Note Basic heating program The DDC submenu set point correction only works for day regulation The set point correction influences KH parallel movement of heating curve if the DDC sub menu 15318 room correction or 15300 optimization is not active TStarget new TStarget target correction If DDC room correction or optimize sub menus are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the set point correction This for example influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction TRtarget new TRtarget target correction Room correction TStarget new TStarget Roomtemp TRtarget new ER correction Optimization NO TStarget correction Basic PID program In this basic program the set point correction works on the current set point XS current XS current new XS current target correction Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5290 Q100 actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Q EA Setpoint Correction float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 189
132. temperature rises by 2K above TRlimit the plant switches off again Transfer from Min room temp to day regulation If the circuit is in the Min room temp mode and the usage time assigned to the control circuit and or the contact Remote ON is activated the PID control circuit only moves to complete control operation when the room temperature exceeds TRlimit by 2K Special Functions If in addition the DDC sub software object S304 start up is active the start up switching must first be worked through before the minimum room temperature is operational Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 121 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5361 Y room set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5362 b actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q room probe min RT float 5363 TR limit set point 5 50 10 C float 5364 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA min RT boolean i014 Min RT actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 122 4 3 2 9 9 S309 Standstill Activation Sub function of Basic program PID ventilation 3 times can be set Can be switched on off via 5376 Q EA Standstill control Function summary The role of the standstill DDC sub software object for ventilation plants is to prevent the heating
133. the vvarm up phase request for control Switching up and down the levels Operating hours limiting value for each level and for both levels together Switching delays Command execution check An important note How does malfunction blocked work Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control The malfunction blocked parameter can be set to yes or no If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM Reset malfunction message Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message Here a link creates a function Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 2 AnfAuto1 actual value deletable deleted Requ Auto St 1 boolean 3 AnfAuto2 actual value deletable deleted Requ Auto St 2 boolean 4 AnfKI actual value 0 Begin Flap boolean 5 AnlVerz set point 0 infinity 0 S Startup delay float 6 BM1 actual value deletable deleted Operating level 1 boolean 7 BM2 actual value deletable deleted Operating level 2 boolean 8 BMHIAuf actual value deletable deleted BM Flap boolean 9 Bh set point 0 infinity 0 h Bh ges float Version 05 06
134. to a bus are constantly inactive within a time frame this is interpreted as a bus failure Instead of individual module failure messages a single bus failure message is generated in this case As soon as a module registers on an ongoing manner on a bus a bus normal message is generated In this case a check is made as to whether all previously registered bus participants have logged in again Failure messages are generated for those modules that are still inactive Sensor messages Everything is viewed as a sensor that is connected to analog inputs In this case the relevant pin object has a sub object of type CO_AnalogInput with parameter b If this sensor is to be monitored a functional object of type FO AnaloginputMessageOutputmust be attached to parameter b If b takes on an invalid value on an ongoing basis after it was permanently valid previously a malfunction message is generated The normal message is then produced as appropriate Component messages not yet stipulated Plant message settings not yet stipulated 4 4 3 Creating the customer interface The user interface is created exclusively with the PS4000 parametering tool The first operating page is stipulated by structuring the plant Therefore there is a summary of the plants in the DDC4000 Central Unit and a quick start bar on the first page Kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure parameterizing 4 4 487 Depiction of opening page vvith summ
135. to be set first The Y output signal is set to O for this time If the input signal X wanders with an active function beyond the upper lower value pair X Y the most recently calculated value is retained as output signal Y Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Tab Ausgang Y Objects 4 3 230 X2 x3 x4 x5 ve X7 xB Tab F hrungsgr e XJ Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5791 Tab lead size X actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5792 Tab exit Y actual value infinity infinity O float 5801 Table X1 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5802 Table Y1 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5803 Table X2 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5804 Table Y2 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5805 Table X3 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5806 Table Y3 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 231 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5807 Table X4 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5808 Table Y4 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5
136. value deletable deleted Repare switch boolean 17 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 18 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock malfunction catch boolean 19 RzByFu set point 0 120 30 s Switch back time bypass FU integer 20 SM actual value deletable deleted Fan malf boolean 21 SMFu actual value deletable deleted Malfunction FU boolean 22 StFuBy set point 0 Malf FU requires bypass boolean 23 StFuSper set point 0 Malf FU blocked boolean 24 StSperr set point 0 Malf fan blocked boolean 25 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 26 VzBARFu set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAKFu delayed integer 27 Y actual value 0 100 0 FU Drive analog integer 28 Ysoll set point 0 100 0 Fan setpoint integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 336 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 29 Z set point 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 21 FU_ON 31 BY_ON 30 Zs set point 0 100 0 Setp fan Z influence integer 31 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 32 ZwSw set point 0 100 0 Setp forced control analog integer 33 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 34 reg actual value 0 Begi
137. whether it is a SBM51 04 or another device M bus counter bus address IIxxx b1 00 H004 yy 32 gateway objects type H004 are created as a SBM51 04 can process up to 32 M bus counters Each gateway object is responsible for one M bus counter The bus address is expressed in the gateway object index The SBM51 04 only supports the M bus counters with addresses from 1 to 32 although the M bus knows addresses from 1 to 250 Function description of object xxx 00 00 SY_SBM51 01 Special SBM51 parameter SY_SBM51 01 In SY_SBM51 01 all parameters are stored that are important for the SBM51 as a whole but are too special for the SY_Module Config Select the specific SBM51 for which the module object is responsible The selection is now on SMB51 04 Enable Bus release m Cycle Bus cycle time 0 24h 1 2min Compare description of the system objectSY_SBM51 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 39 Function description of the device objects xxx b1 00 H004 yy M bus counter with bus address yy xxx b1 00 H004 yy Each object is responsible for exactly one M bus counter Config Selection of consumption medium After selection a second Config parameter is visible from the following one Config EL Selection of an electricity counter from a list Parameter becomes visible if the medium electricity is selected with Config Config WM Selection of a h
138. wird ber den der Gerate Typ ausgew hlt wird Aufgrund beider Auswahlen wird ein passendes Subobjekt installiert ConfigYY steht f r ConfigEL ConfigWA oder ConfigWM Siehe dort Die Subobjekte CD WM und CD_WA stehen f r die Generischen Parameter der Ger te Klasse das sind die Parameter die wirklich jeder W remz hler bzw jeder Wasserz hler bieten sollte Alle anderen Subobjekte haben mehr Parameter als nur die generischen Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Active aktiv actual value 0 Device active boolean Anfrage Counter inquiry set point 0 boolean Config Medium set point 5 0 value text Counting medium multistate 0 none 1 Electricity counter 2 Heat counter 3 Water counter 4 DDC3000 Menu ConfigEL Elt Typ set point 2 0 value text Elt Counter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum ConfigWA H O Typ set point 3 0 value text Water counter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum 2 Allmeas ISWZ ConfigWM WMZ Typ set point 2 0 value text Heat counter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 471 4 4 parameterizing 4 4 1 Plant structuring The plant and group address components can be used for later reuse and structured approach 4 4 1 1 Plants Why plants All the functions of a technical building plant can be sum
139. 0 Active opr hours boolean 9 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 2000 h Oper hrs limit value integer 10 BrEin actual value 0 Burner ON boolean 11 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 12 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 380 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Repare switch boolean 14 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 15 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock Malfunction catch boolean 16 SF set point deletable deleted Chimneysweep function boolean 17 SFZeit set point 0 300 30 min Continuous chimneysweep function integer 18 SFaktiv actual value 0 Cimneysweep function is active boolean 19 SM actual value deletable deleted Burner malfunction boolean 20 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 21 VZBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 22 Y actual value 0 100 0 Burner setp setting float 23 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Position display float 24 vr set point deletable 0 100 deleted Burner setting feedback float 25 Ysoll set point 0 100 0 Set
140. 0 C room temperatu re night operation Parameter from the basic program described there 5151 TStarget current calculate x supply temperatu re Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 198 4 3 2 10 11 S319 Standby Activation Sub function of basic heating program 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5397 Q EA Standby if not defined ON Function summary The stand by DDC software object has the function of switching off the DDC control if a certain outside temperature is exceeded The DDC control is only re started if the outside temperature is lower than a stipulated value It is switched on and off depending on the selected standby type see below Function description For the standby function the outside temperature Source TO of the basic heating program applies when no source is entered in the 5392 Q StandBy parameter It is possible to parameterize another source e g an average outside temperature This source is then prioritized higher than the basic program Source TO If 5391 Standby type ZQD is selected the stand by function depends on the average temperature which is either formed by the outside temperatureSource TO or from Q StandBy In Standby type MRP the absolute temperatures are used as the criterion For standby type MRP the following applies If the outside temperature exceeds the limiting val
141. 0 deleted integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 208 4 3 2 13 S323 Binary valuation Function summary An analog output signal is formed with the DDC software object depending on the binary signals Each DDC software object calculates an analog output signal that is calculated from 8 binary input signals with a value that can be freely set The analogue output signals from several DDC software objects can for example be edited via the arithmetic object Note This DDC software object is used for example for controlling the fans depending on the air flow 19 15 50 20 The 8 binary input signals are set as source parameter binary valuation Q1 8 Each binary input can be assigned a value between O and 100 with the 8 parameters binary valuation W As soon as a binary input is switched to log 1 its valuation is switch in addition to parameter binary valuation Y Example Regelkreis digit Quellen 2 Men s Digestorien 1 Men Arithmetik Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5540 Y actual value 0 100 0 Binary values Y integer 5541 Binary values Q1 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5542 Binary values Q2 set point deletable deleted boolean 5543 Binary values Q
142. 0 min integer 6738 Min Switched on time 18 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6739 Min Switched on time 19 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6740 Min Switched on time 20 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6741 Min Switched off time 1 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6742 Min Switched off time 2 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6743 Min Switched off time 3 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6744 Min Switched off time A actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6745 Min Switched off time 5 actual value 0 60 0 min integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 245 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6746 Min Switched off time 6 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6747 Min Switched off time 7 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6748 Min Switched off time 8 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6749 Min Switched off time 9 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6750 Min Switched off time 10 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6751 Min Switched off time 11 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6752 Min Switched off time 12 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6753 Min Switched off time 13 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6754 Min Switched off time 14 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6755 Min Switched off time 15 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6756 Min Switched off time 16 actual value 0 60
143. 0 min integer 6879 Max switched off time 19 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6880 Max switched off time 20 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6881 Back notify contact 1 actual value deletable deleted reference 6882 Back notify contact 2 actual value deletable deleted reference 6883 Back notify contact 3 actual value deletable deleted reference 6884 Back notify contact 4 actual value deletable deleted reference 6885 Back notify contact 5 actual value deletable deleted reference 6886 Back notify contact 6 actual value deletable deleted reference 6887 Back notify contact 7 actual value deletable deleted reference 6888 Back notify contact 8 actual value deletable deleted reference Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 259 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6889 Back notify contact 9 actual value deletable deleted reference 6890 Back notify contact 10 actual value deletable deleted reference 6891 Back notify contact 11 actual value deletable deleted reference 6892 Back notify contact 12 actual value deletable deleted reference 6893 Back notify contact 13 actual value deletable deleted reference
144. 0 value text internal Status multistate 0 Start 1 1 Logon running 2 Logged on 3 Logoff running 4 Logged off 5 Feedback running 201 Delay set point 1 3600 600 s Delay integer 202 MTxt actual value 5 0 value text Message text multistate 0 OK 1 Malfunction 2 Short circuit 3 Sensor break 4 wrong poles 4 3 6 14 Set parameters 4 3 6 14 1 FSource Function summary This object has a source parameter type Entries can be made in this parameter as per the general conditions of the source parameter type The value of the source parameter is transferred to the value of the target parameter Hinweis Das Objekt kann auf analoge und digitale Parameter angewendet werden Es realisiert eine Verbindung zu systemweiten Datenpunkten innerhalb der DDC Zentralen Ausnahmen sind Ausgange von Soft und Hardware sowie Basisobjekten Unit If the target parameter has its own unit this is displayed If the unit is deleted ZERO the unit of the source parameter is displayed Parameter text If the target parameter has a set text not default this is displayed as the parameter text If this is not the case the source parameter text is displayed Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit s Q actual value Source address reference Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 458 4 3 6 14 3 F013 Simulation
145. 02 XPY3 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY3 New float 5303 XPY4 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY4 New float 5304 tN set point deletable 0 5 99 3 min Tn New float 5305 id set point deletable 1 99 deleted s Vorhalt integer 5306 Q actual value deletable deleted Q XP change overR boolean i020 XP Changeover actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 4 3 194 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 195 4 3 2 10 10 S318 Room correction Activation Sub function of basic heating program can be set once Can be switched on off via 5384 Q EA Room correction if not defined ON Function summary The basic heating program controls the supply temperature due to the weather The set point of the supply temperature is calculated as per the heating curve which in turn is stipulated by the KH parallel movement and EF steepness parameters The calculated start set point is corrected with the DC software object room correction if the temperature in the reference room varies from the target room temperature value set The correction occurs by the parallel movement of the heating curve Function description The determined target supply temperature 5151 TStarget current is corrected by the room correction DDC software object when the room temperature source parameter 5381 Q room sensor RK varies from the target room temperature value set in the 5180
146. 05 06 malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 300 4 3 3 13 H404 Electrical air heater constant Function summary The electrical fan heater constant function block controls a constant electrical fan heater and supports Generating the operating release Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 BM actual value deletable deleted About message boolean 4 GWYsoll set point 0 100 5 GWYset integer 6 Y actual value 0 100 1 Setp heater integer 8 STB actual value deletable deleted STB boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE boolean 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence integer 11 Ysoll actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Yset integer 12 LSU actual value deletable deleted Air stream monitoring boolean 13 Ren actual value deletable deleted Repair switch boolean 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted SelfRestore boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Clear malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocks boolean 17 VZBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s
147. 1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 2 Wert2 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 2 Q2 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 3 Ziel3 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 3 Wer set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 3 Q3 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 4 Ziel4 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 4 Wert4 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 4 Q4 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean Version 05 06 4 3 177 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 178 4 3 2 10 5 S312 Limitation Activation Sub function of basic heating and ventilation program 0 can be set 2 x Can be switched on off via 5279 Q EA limitation if not defined ON Function summary The DDC control function of the main control circuit is restricted using DDC software object limitation The limitation is required for example for keeping the supply air temperature in ventilation controls in comfortable limits to curb the supply temperature in heating controls before reaching technological limiting v
148. 1 if XPY1 changes Only changes TN New and or rate New I20 XP switch remains 0 120 XP switch can also be 1 as a result of a limit Priorities The DDC sub menus limitation menus 1 and 2 work before the XP switch Priority Function Highest Limitation 1 S312 1 Cascade only PID S303 Limitation 2 312 2 XP switching 317 lowest Structure delay start up 8304 Special Functions Depending on the reset time tN set in the basic program the XPY basic program is switched to the XPY XP switching gliding and vice versa Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5300 XPY1 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY1 New float 5301 XPY2 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY2 New float 5302 XPY3 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY3 New float 5303 XPY4 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY4 New float 5304 tN set point deletable 0 5 99 3 min Tn New float 5305 id set point deletable 1 99 deleted s Vorhalt integer 5306 Q actual value deletable deleted Q XP change overR boolean i020 XP Changeover actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 4 3 149 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 150 4 3 2 10 S239 Basic program heating Activation Basic program can be set 12 times Function summar
149. 1 float 27 ResBh1 set point deletable deleted ResBh1 boolean 28 ResBh2 set point deletable deleted ResBh2 boolean 29 VzBAk1 set point 0 infinity 0 S VzBAk1 float 30 VzBAk2 set point 0 infinity 0 S VzBAk2 float 31 tBAK1 set point deletable 0 infinity 30 S tBAK1 float 32 tBAK2 set point 0 infinity 30 S tBAK2 float 33 Zw actual value 4 0 value text Forced multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 34 Bh1 set point 0 infinity 0 h Bh Level 1 float 35 Bh2 set point 0 infinity 0 h Bh Level 2 float 36 gBh actual value 0 GW Bh boolean 37 gBh1 actual value 0 GW Bh1 boolean 38 gBh2 actual value 0 gBh2 boolean 39 stBAK1 actual value 0 BAK St 1 boolean 40 stBAK2 actual value deletable deleted BAK St 1 boolean 41 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 329 Function description cover control during the vvarm up phase request for control If the fan is to be switched on the cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational cover open 1 if this input is wired Then fan on level 1 is set to 1 and if connected the plant waits for fan operating message 1 Only then is request control set to 1 If fan level should start the process described takes place for level 2 Request control open is set to 1 when fan on level 1 or fan on leve
150. 23 K K GND GND GND 3 4 5 SBM51_04 52 51 24V 247 DC DC The module object MO_SBM51_04 is a special type of object MO_SBM51 It is produced when sub group 04 is assigned to object MO_SBM51 Special behavior for malfunctions If the module detects a malfunction itself sets SY_Module 01 malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code 1 to SY_Module 01 Err No If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module 01 Active is set to 0 Logical address structure Technical address Example Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 36 103 SBM51_04 00 plant 00group SY_SBM51 01 SY_SBM51 Parameter for bus release and cyclical reading SY_Module 01 SY_Module b1 plant 00group H004 01 H004 Parameters for counting medium device query H004 02 H004 Para H004 32 H004 Para Dialing SBM51 a ER 03 14 45 18 shmal 04 E DO Anlage SG bi Anlage Gi Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 37 Configuring the SBM51 Cal r29 103 00 00 5Y SBMS1 01 System SBM51 amp Enable Bus Freigabe F Cycle Auslesezyklus ku System object SY_SBM51 01 summarizes the special requests of the SBM51 family Bus release and cycle time are placed here Each H004 is responsible for precisely one of the maximum 32 M bus counters The counter type
151. 3 Scaling exp eff power actual value 4 4 1 integer 5484 Impuls input blind power actual value deletable deleted reference 5485 Scaling blind power actual value 0 1000 1 float 5486 Scaling exp blind power actual value 4 4 1 integer 6661 Source Manual 1 actual value deletable deleted reference 6662 Source Manual 2 actual value deletable deleted reference 6663 Source Manual 3 actual value deletable deleted reference 6664 Source Manual 4 actual value deletable deleted reference 6665 Source Manual 5 actual value deletable deleted reference 6666 Source Manual 6 actual value deletable deleted reference 6667 Source Manual 7 actual value deletable deleted reference 6668 Source Manual 8 actual value deletable deleted reference 6669 Source Manual 9 actual value deletable deleted reference 6670 Source Manual 10 actual value deletable deleted reference 6671 Source Manual 11 actual value deletable deleted reference 6672 Source Manual 12 actual value deletable deleted reference Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 255 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6673 Source Manual 13 actual value
152. 3 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5544 Binary values Q4 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5545 Binary values W1 set point 0 100 25 integer 5546 Binary values W2 set point 0 100 25 integer 5547 Binary values W3 set point 0 100 25 integer 5548 Binary values W4 set point 0 100 25 integer 5549 Binary values W5 set point 0 100 25 integer 5550 Binary values W6 set point 0 100 25 integer 5551 Binary values W7 set point 0 100 25 integer 5552 Binary values W8 set point 0 100 25 integer 5555 Binary values Q5 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5556 Binary values Q6 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5557 Binary values Q7 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5558 Binary values Q8 actual value deletable deleted boolean Version 05 06 4 3 209 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 210 4 3 2 14 S324 Scaling Function summary Mit dem DDC Softwareobjekt S324 Skalierung kann einem analogen Signal ein neuer Wertebereich zugeordnet werden Der Wertebereich wird durch einen Anfangs und einen Endwert definiert A new value range can be assigned to an analog signal with the DDC software object S324 scaling The value range is defined by a start and an end value In parameter 5550 Q Scal sensor the source of the analog signal to be scaled is set
153. 31 Consumers 11 set point 1 boolean 6832 Consumers 12 set point 1 boolean 6833 Consumers 13 set point 1 boolean 6834 Consumers 14 set point 1 boolean 6835 Consumers 15 set point 1 boolean 6836 Consumers 16 set point 1 boolean 6837 Consumers 17 set point 1 boolean 6838 Consumers 18 set point 1 boolean 6839 Consumers 19 set point 1 boolean 6840 Consumers 20 set point 1 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 250 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 251 4 3 2 28 S344 Degree daily figure Function summary The degree day figure represents a relationship between the outside temperature and energy consumption and therefore gives information on the heat consumption and heating costs for a heating period It is the product of the number of heating days and the difference between the usual room temperature of 20 C and the outside temperature Heating days are when it is colder than 5155 basic heating day 15 20 C At Kieback amp Peter a heating day is assumed when the average daily temperature is under 20 C The varies may differ for export The degree day number is calculated retroactively for the past day as follows TO average lt Basic heating day at 24 00 P GTZnew GTZold 20 TO average TO average gt
154. 355 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Hardware Ansteuerung man U MI Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 356 4 3 3 26 H701 Burner single stage Function summary The burner single stage function block controls a single stage burner and supports pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control Chimney sweep function Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status c
155. 38 or seen in a different way the comma is shifted 38 positions to the right As this size can not be achieved in practice the value infinity is given in the table if this value range is not restricted A typical example of the float type is outside temperature This is only recorded in C with 3 characters after the decimal point as for all floating numbers and is indicated with one character after the point varies with parameter Here a fictitious example Par No Parameter name Description Parameter type Min Max Init Unit 5103 TO Outside temperature Actual value 999 000 999 000 0 000 TO Floating comma number For general information on the states refer to integer above Binary value Boolean A binary value can only have the value 0 false or 1 true The corresponding meaning can be very different and must be taken from the documentation Multistate A multistate value can depict several statuses in a parameter So for example a controller can have the status ON OFF or AUTO Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 59 Par No Parameter name Description Parameter type Min Max Init Unit 5175 Source remote control Actual value 4 1 BACnet DDC_No Text Status value 4 0 OFF 2 1 day 1 9 Auto 3 35 night The information on the status value are more complex and so they are worth
156. 4 1 54 Central unit For central unit 02 02 Module Access to the basic heating program is by regulating controlling the DDC4000 and thus via Module 000 02 000 Plant Access to the basic heating program is via the selection of for example a heating plant 01 02 000 01 Group Access to the basic heating program is via the selection of for example a group control 01 02 000 01 01 Object Index Access to the basic heating program 02 000 01 01 5239 01 Sub object The source is located in the function object of the Q TO parameter in the basic heating program object Therefore no sub object is addressed Parameters Access to the Q TO parameter of object S239 01 Basic heating program 02 000 01 01 S239 01 5103 Function object Index A function object that extends or changes the properties or includes additional functions is attached to this Q TO parameter e g stipulating a source for the value in the Q TO parameter 02 000 01 01 S239 01 5103 FSource 01 Parameter of the function object You can stipulate the properties of the function object etc with these parameters In the example parameter s is access and this contains the source address of the analog value 02 000 01 01 S239 01 5103 FSource 01 s Example 3 Access to a b parameter in the PIN object as analog input from the DDC4000 analog card Central unit For central unit 03 03 Module Access to the analog card of the DDC4000
157. 4 3 4 14 BO S_51 5 Push buttons Auto off Manual Level 1 2 3 Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 5 Schaltern Zustand Taste 1 AUTO Zustand Taste 2 AUF Zustand Taste 3 TAG Zustand Taste 4 NACHT Zustand Taste 5 Aufheizen Version 05 06 4 3 431 Kleback neter 4 3 432 Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 5 0 value text Switch Status multistate 9 Z AUTO 0 Z OFF 1 2 DAY 35 Z NIGHT 36 Z Heating s 01 s 01 set point 1 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 OFF boolean s 03 s 03 set point 0 DAY boolean s 04 s 04 set point 0 NIGHT boolean s 05 s 05 set point 0 HEATING boolean 4 3 4 15 BO T Timer Function summary Die Timer k nnen von 1 Sekude bis 35999 Sekunden 99 59 59 jeweils Einschalt und oder Ausschaltverz gert eingestellt werden Die Startzeit wird in Parameter Tstart SZT angezeigt Timer k nnen w hrend ihrer Laufzeit durch eine erneute Triggerung auf 0 gesetzt und neu gestartet werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit e E actual value deletable 0 Input boolean f f set point 3 0 value text f multistate 0 Timer 1 Switch on impulse 2 On Off switch impulse reset ResT set point 0 Reset Timer boolean t t actual value 0 St
158. 4 Ring output 1 12 is stipulated It is possible to control 2 to 12 outputs Example Pump switching Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 227 Grundprogramm DDC4000 4entrale Softwaremen schaltet Ring Anzahl 4 nach einge qebener Zeit oder nach 0 1 Flanke einer bi Alten naren Quelle z B Fumpen ansteuerung DAZ Usable for automatic pump switching automatically changing the heat exchanger etc Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5759 Start timepoint actual value deletable deleted boolean 5760 Ring Nr of set point 2 12 4 integer 5761 Ring time span set point deletable 1 2147483647 10080 min integer 5762 Q Ring actual value deletable deleted boolean 5763 Ring exit 1 actual value 0 boolean 5764 Ring exit 2 actual value 0 boolean 5765 Ring exit 3 actual value 0 boolean 5766 Ring exit 4 actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 228 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5767 Ring exit 5 actual value 0 boolean 5768 Ring exit 6 actual value 0 boolean 5769 Ring exit 7 actual value 0 boolean 5770 Ring exit 8 actual value 0 boolean 5771 Ring exit 9 ac
159. 44444nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnenne nn 309 4 3 3 16 H503 Cover 3 point ccc cece cece cece cette eect ete ceeaaeaaaeaaaeaaaaeaaeaaaeaaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeens 314 4 3 3 17 H504 Cover constant GE 317 4 3 3 18 H601 Fan single stage EE 320 43 39 19 H602 Fan SUA nee a 326 4 3 3 21 H604 fan constant FCO bypass ua ae ee 334 4 3 3 22 H611 Valve Open CIOSed cidere sesia iae ee a a a AA ae EEEE AEE ARAE E EEEE REEERE 341 43 3 23 H612 Valve DUS avenue ea 346 4 3 3 24 H613 Valve E 349 4 3 3 25 H614 Valve constant ae ee 353 43 3 2060 H701 B rner lee EE e E 356 42 43 27 H702 B rner2 sage see ee 363 4 3 3 28 H703 Burner modulating 3 point ae ae ae atletes ideas 371 4 4 29 H704 Burner modulating zen een 379 4 3 3 30 H801 Volume flow regulator constant 2 u4242444400040R0Hnnnnann HH nn nn nnn Hann nnnnn nennen 387 4 3 3 31 H802 Volume flow regulator constant s 0 00444400R Rn 391 4 3 3 32 H901 Pump single stage ana mega 394 4 3 3 33 H903 Pump variable transformer ccccecceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaeaaecaeceaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 401 4 3 3 34 H904 Pump BUS san a een 409 4 3 3 35 H905 Double DUMP erisir ein 413 4 3 4 Basic objects flags timers AE AA BE BA 421 Ges BO L Lamp ie teers een 421 4 34 2 BO M Markers u een EE 422 4124 32 BO P PiN ee een 424 4 34 4 BO S SWC eS san ee ee 426 4 3 4 5 BO S_11 Switch single stage ON OFF a en a 426 4 3 4 6 B
160. 5 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 226 4 3 2 21 S333 Ring counter Function summary A maximum of 12 binary outputs are switched onwards cyclically wit the DDC software object S333 ring counter The switching on takes place automatically by stipulating a time span an d o r changing the status of a binary source After installing the software object the first output 5763 Ring output 1 is switched on Parameter 5759 starting time provides the opportunity to precisely determine the start of switching on by including a digital source for example from a time program The second switching on occurs after the end of the set time span or the first time the binary input Q Ring is switched The default starting time is deleted i e the calculation of the switching on starts immediately The following options are possible for switching the binary outputs 1 Switching on the binary output to the subsequent output takes place after the end of the time stipulated in parameter 5761 time span The time is entered in minutes m 1 minute and or 2 The switching on of the binary output to the following output is done via a binary source 5762 Q Ring This switching on occurs independently of the starting time If parameter value 5761 time span is deleted the ring counter stays at the current level It can only be switched on via a binary source With parameter 5760 Ring number the number of the outputs to be controlled 5763 577
161. 646 Max switched off time 6 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6647 Max switched off time 7 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6648 Max switched off time 8 actual value 5 60 60 min integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 242 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6649 Max switched off time 9 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6650 Max switched off time 10 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6651 Max switched off time 11 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6652 Max switched off time 12 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6653 Max switched off time 13 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6654 Max switched off time 14 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6655 Max switched off time 15 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6656 Max switched off time 16 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6657 Max switched off time 17 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6658 Max switched off time 18 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6659 Max switched off time 19 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6660 Max switched off time 20 actual value 5 60 60 min integer 6701 Back notify contact 1 actual value deletable deleted reference 6702 Back notify contact 2 actual value deletable deleted reference 6703 Back notify contact 3 actual value deletable deleted referenc
162. 809 Table X5 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5810 Table Y5 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5811 Table X6 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5812 Table Y6 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5813 Table X7 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5814 Table Y7 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5815 Table X8 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5816 Table Y8 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5817 Table X9 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5818 Table Y9 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5819 Table X10 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5820 Table Y10 set point deletable infinity infinity deleted float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 232 4 3 2 23 S335 Sensor switching Function summary The DDC software object S335 sensor switching is used to switch between any two analog values or sensors The two analog values to be switched are set in source parameters 1 Q1 and 2 Q2 The switching is undertaken with the binary source parameter 3 switch If 3 switch has the value 0 is invalid or has been deleted the value of 1 is switched to
163. 9 4 22 23 8339 Sensor SWIG UNIO san ee ee 232 4 3 2 24 S337 Basic program fixed value ana daer eee eet enges 233 4 22 29 S338 DUN esse aeg 237 4 3 2 26 S342 Pulse output an 238 4 3 2 2 1 9343 EMAX eats nsec ea eel a ayaa ces ele 240 4 3 2 28 8344 Degree daily figure sau ee 251 4 3 2 29 S347 E Max French seisen ssena ea ea iaaa a a NEAN a EEKAN Eea 252 4 3 2 30 S901 Signal E 264 4 3 3 Hardware Objects eta ee 266 4 3 3 1 What are hardware objects sense 266 4 3 3 2 All hardware Objects une ee 268 Version 05 06 kleback neter Software structure 4 44 4 3 3 3 Priorities and Smash needed 270 4 3 3 4 Command execution Check CEC uuuureessssnnnnnnnnnnassanaannnnnnnnnnanannnnnnen ran annnnnnnnnnnnannnnnenannn 271 4 3 3 5 Operating NOFS i en tasten tete inini ine 272 Ec Ds Malfunction CALCH irii missioita anna ee ae 273 4 3 3 7 Malfunction message ET 274 4 3 3 8 H301 Steam moistening unit constant een ea 275 4 3 3 10 H401 Electrical air heater single stage 2 eeeemamamanianamanyniamammmnamenamamannsmaam 281 4 3 3 11 H402 Electrical air heater 2 stage unseren ae 286 4 3 3 12 H403 Electrical air heater 3 stage anne Ee d geeSERAAE ENEE 293 4 3 3 13 H404 Electrical air heater constant iiss ccsccicicsiseccceseteisatintiaeneceetae ld bideeastbbisaneccnendeaba alenienanne 300 4 3 3 14 H501 Cover Open CloSed sms snnennennnannen 305 4 3 3 15 H502 Fire protection cover with drive 0022404444
164. Basic Heating day at 24 00 P GTZnew GTZold TO average is the arithmetic average of the outside temperature read each minute TOaverage a AT number of full operating minutes the previous day For the first calculation of the degree day number 5154 degree day number the software object must be active for two days The calculation is only made if the parameter for the outside temperature 5103 source TO had a valid value on the previous day for at least 18 hours The degree day number 5154 degree day number can be preset to a whole number gt At the end of the month or year the degree day number is not reset automatically If required this must be done e g via the control panel Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5103 Source TA actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C float 5154 Degree day nr set point 0 99999999 O integer 5155 Basic heating set point 15 20 20 C integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 252 4 3 2 29 S347 E Max French Function summary The DDC software menu is used to switch off electrical consumers in a targeted manner The aim is to keep the average electrical energy consumption of a building or technical plant under a stipulated limiting value The software menu parameters can be set flexibly and permit the best possible change for each specific problem and plants Not
165. C set point 0 100000000 0 kWh float 5713 Delta amount of heat C set point 0 100000000 0 kWh float 5714 Q Reset amount of heat C actual value deletable deleted boolean 5715 Scaling C set point 0 1 999 9 1 float 5716 Scaling C Exp set point 3 3 0 integer 5717 Q EA Wmber P actual value deletable deleted boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 223 4 3 2 20 S330 Heat volume DT Function summary The function of the DDC software object is to calculate the heat volume using the temperature difference and flow volume The flow volume is recorded via a pulse counter The temperatures are recorded by the source parameters WMNG sensor warm and WMNG sensor cold The flow volume is recorded with the counting parameter 5722 count value in B Each counting value change is firmly assigned a flow volume via parameter 5729 Scaling B and 5730 Scaling B Exp The heat volume is calculated from the temperature difference and flow volume The counting values are recorded continuously The calculated values are depicted by the minute in parameter 5725 heat volume B The water volume calculated from the pulse counter and scaling is depicted on parameter 5727 water volume with the unit m The volume flow calculated in the same way is depicted in parameter 5723 volume flow with the unit m h The units can be changed Durchfluss Wassermenge Z hlwert
166. C4000 from the laptop via Explorer To do so enter the DDC4000 s IP address in the address field in Explorer If it is not possible to access the DDC4000 this may be due to the Java 2 Runtime Environment software not being installed on the laptop This software must be installed and can be downloaded from the intranet from the following path Documents gt Technical gt DDC4000 system gt Network technology It can also be found on the Internet by entering the search term re The following link structure is used for opening 1 http Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 25 2 DDC TCP IP address Sample central unit address 192 168 0 60 In Internet Explorer window http 192 168 0 60 3 2 3 5 BMS connection A BMS is connected via Ethernet to the DDC4000 system As the BACnet communication is used for this ensure that Port BACO is switched freely throughout router Caution Version 1 0 and 1 1 do not contain BBMD BACnet broadcast management device This means that communication via a router is not possible without an external BBMD As a result of the native abilities of the DDC4000 it is also possible to switch to third party products BACnet IP is used Please refer to the Ethernet chapter for the details of the Ethernet cabling and setting up BACnet communication Please refer to the BMS documentation on installing and setting up the BMS A
167. DC Central Unit a java applet is loaded This means that the J2RE java runtime environment must be installed on the PC Is normally found on all Windows PCs but can also be loaded onto intranet Prerequisites Laptop with network card RJ45 connection Cross over network cable for a 1 to 1 connection from laptop to PC or patch network cable when connecting the DDC4000 e g via switches Pre selections The DDC4000 and laptop must be in the same network For this it is necessary to set the IP addresses of the DDC 4000 and the laptop to the same sub network Laptop settings using Windows XP as the example Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 21 In the Windows taskbar click on lt Network connections gt via the following path Start gt Settings gt gt Control panel gt Network connections ds Netzwerkverbindungen Select the corresponding e connection from network Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Erweitert 2 connections e g LAN e e connection and right click on ag z gt S wi A Suchen 7 Ordner m SC S Adresse Netzwerkverbindungen Name Typ DFO 3 GLT Callback DFU DDC4000 DFU LAN oder Hochgeschwindigkeitsinternet ADR Deaktivieren N oder Hochgeschwir el 1394 Verbir Status N oder Hochgeschwir Reparieren Verbindungen berbr cken Verkn pfung erstellen oschen Umbenennen Eigenschaften
168. DC control circuit control setting parameters are switched with the DDC sub menu XP switching Depending on a binary source the proportional ranges of the Y outputs the rate and regulating periods can be switched Function description The binary source is set in parameter source XP switching If the digital source Q XP switching is 1 or the controller setting parameters are replaced by the set setting values The working XP switching is displayed via internal contact 120 XP switching in the basic heating program or PID Note In the basic heating program 120 XP switching only becomes 1 if XPY1 changes Only changes TN New and or rate New I20 XP switch remains 0 120 XP switch can also be 1 as a result of a limit Priorities The DDC sub menus limitation menus 1 and 2 work before the XP switch Priority Function Highest Limitation 1 312 1 Cascade only PID S303 Limitation 2 312 2 XP switching 317 lowest Structure delay start up 304 Special Functions Depending on the reset time tN set in the basic program the XPY basic program is switched to the XPY XP switching gliding and vice versa kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5300 XPY1 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY1 New float 5301 XPY2 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY2 New float 53
169. DDC4000 system analog value can be set The Y limitation influences the Y output parameterized on parameter 5310 Y limit on The DDC sub menu Y limit can be installed and set repeatedly for a DDC control circuit If several Y limitation DDC sub menus work on the same Y output the min and max limits calculated for each DDC software object are added For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs For the basic heating program the Y limit always works on the heating control for a Y output Parameter 5312 YB limiting value sets the value from which the Y limit should act on the Y output setting range Parameter 5313 YB limitation stipulates whether a MAX limitation i e exceeding the limiting value image 3 image 4 or a MIN limitation i e going below the limiting value image 1 image 2 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 169 should affect the setting range of the Y output Parameter 5314 YB Inverting stipulates the direction of the influence direction of curve 5314 YB Inverting NO gt image 1 image 3 5314 YB Inverting YES gt image 2 image 4 Parameter 5315 XP Y limitation is the proportional range within which the Y min or Y max for the Y outputs can be moved depending on the limitation factor 5315 XP Y limitation 10 means for 10 units change in the limitation factor Y min or Y max on the Y output is moved by 100 5315 XP Y limit
170. Documentation DDC4000 Documentation DDC4000 Documentation to set up and maintain the DDC4000 Version released Released by Comment for DDC4000 0 10 v 14 10 2004 R test To use as part of the amp test 0 11 v 21 10 2004 Updating 0 12 v 13 12 2004 B Manual influence in DDC network settings for PPP 0 13 v 05 01 2005 B Directory structure reworked expression corrections initiated by VVIR FE 0 14 v 10 03 2006 Version 1 0 xx PAVV System objects reworked FAX EMAIL Config 0 15 v 21 3 2006 Version 1 0 xx PAW Software objects reworked additions on the basis of the specifications 0 16 v 04 04 2006 Version 1 1 xx PAW general revision system objects added 1 0 v 23 05 2006 Version 1 1 xx PAW first variant for export 1 Introduction 2 Operation 3 Plant components and bus systems 4 Software structure Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Introduction 1 Introduction 1 Introduction ENKEN KEREN ERAN 1 1 The idea behind the DDC 4000 1 2 Structure of the DDC 4000 system Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Introduction The idea behind the DDC 4000 1 1 3 1 1 The idea behind the DDC 4000 The DDC4000 Central Units and bus modules are extensions to the Kieback amp Peter product range providing a plant vvith nevv options The follovving objectives vvere aimed at and achieved vvith the development of the DDC4000 sy
171. ERELTEFEEEEFEEESSTEEESFFEUEFFOEREFEFLEHGEEEPUERPERRUFFRAEFTERERERFEER 62 ADN central Unit Adressen een een 62 4 2 2 Time administration nn aenneren eent 62 422 1 S118 SE TE 62 4 2 3 Behind the front Cover 64 DE DNS Seele ee een ee ae eine eier 66 he al E 72 4 3 1 EE 72 4 32 SoftWare ODJEC S ans EE EE 72 4 3 2 1 What are software OJD CIS Tatiana detecti sien tals 72 4 222 Al solware OD SOUS setem sea ente ee 74 4 32 DOO limiting Valle ss eek 77 4 3 24 S083 le 79 4 3 2 5 5126 MMM storage use estes 82 4 3 2 9 S238 Basic program PID ventilation nn 84 4 323 212 S301 Y Malen euere ie dE 90 4 3 2 9 2 S302 Y SCL igisa a a iaa a aaa aa aa a Na EE aa iaa FERRERRIEERERR 97 2 3233 8303 GaSCade EE 100 4 3 2 9 4 S304 start up switching WEE 105 4 3 2 9 5 S305 Optimization ventilation 2 0 2 2 ccc eee e cece eee eeeeee cette eae eeeeeeeaeeaseaeaaesaeeaaeeaeeeeeeees 109 4 3 2 9 6 S306 Free night cooling E 112 4 3 2 9 7 S307 Constant frost Protection ccccccccc cece cee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeaaeaaaeaaecaeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 117 4 3 2 9 8 S308 Minimum room temperature ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeaaaeaaaeaaecaeceecceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 120 4 3 2 9 9 S309 EE UE 122 4 3 2 9 10 S310 Energy selection u aan regen 125 4 3 2 9 11 8311 Sequence change en energie 129 4 32 9122 SITZ e E 130 AE t3 S313 SP SC NG E 136 4 3 2 9 14 S314 Set point ei e TEE 139 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software s
172. F The function of the Ongoing frost protections constantly works on Y output set in parameter 5351 Y const Frost protection When the return temperature is lower than the 5353 Start to open value the Y output set in parameter Y const Frost protection is controlled The connected heating valve start to open If the return temperature falls below the 5354 End opening value the Y output heating valve is opened to the full Both parameters Start opening and End opening therefore stipulate the proportional range for the heating valve for ongoing frost protection The Y limits in the basic program Y min Y max and sub menu Y limit continue to be operational If the return temperature reaches a value above Start opening the control switches back to Y min Y stet Frostschutz 100 Y max 80 60 40 20 Y min Ende ffnen Q R ckf hler SF Beginn ffnen DeltaGleit Beginn ffnen kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 118 In parameter 5355 deltaglide start opening you can enter a source e g from summer gliding in order to start the opening earlier depending on the outside temperature For a lovver outside temperature the heating register valve is then opened e g from just 18 C for deltaglide start opening 6 K Start opening 12 C deltaglide Start opening represent an offset by which Start opening is moved This enables you to avoid addressing the frost pro
173. F is exceeded Then the internal contact 1011 Plant ON 1 is switched on The heating valve remains in the last position until the internal contact I012 Control ON switches on the PID control If the control is not switched on via 1012 Control ON the movement process is aborted The heating valve closes again However the movement switch remains active 1022 Movement 1 After the internal contact 1012 control ON 1 has been switched on the transfer from advance opening of the heating valve reaching the return temperature to regular operation occurs without impacts The impact free switching occurs with the aid of a period stated in 5337 Structure delay In this period the PID controller is operated as the P controller with a normal variance limited to maximum 1 K and double proportional range XWStructure delay MAX XWGP 1 K XPStructure delay all Y 2 XPGP Movement Y The movement status i e the ventilation plant should become operational and the movement switching works is indicated throughout the whole time by internal contact 1022 Movement 1 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects gt Ein Aus 5438 Q EA Anfahren wenn undef 1 Anfahrschaltung gt Abbruch Anfahren Hand Einflu oder Zentralen Einflu Ende Anfahrschaltung Raumtemperatur ggf wirkt S308 Minimale y Aufheizung bei entsprechenden ggf wirkt S305 O
174. G2 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 1 MMBegr1 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 1 Inv1 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 1 XP1 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 1 EF1 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 1 Anfl set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 1 End1 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 172 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5319 1 EA1 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 1 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 1 active boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 2 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4Y3 8 Y4 5311 2 Q2 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 2 G2 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 2 MMBegr2 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 2 Inv2 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 2 XP2 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 2 EF2 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 2 Anf2 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 2 End2 set point infinity inf
175. K h The TAUup Adaption occurs at the end of the heating period time of transfer from heating to day regulation preset or a return to lowering as a result of exceeding the TRtarget Recalculating the TAUup only occurs if the actual heating time is larger than 40 and the temperature increase in the room is at least 0 5 K 40 of the newly calculated TAUup value flows into the calculation TAUup 0 6 TAUupOLD 0 4 TAUupNEW Heating time TRtarget Room temperature TAUup idle time TAUupNEW Room temperature heating Room temperature heating start heating end heating start When starting up a different basic time setting can be set The TAUup Adaption can be permitted or prohibited with the 5564 TAUup Adapt parameter TAUdown Adaption The parameter 5561 TAUdown describes the temperature decrease in K per hour when cooling the Kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 164 building TAUdown is a relatively long term average value for the building physics facts building constants and is stated in the basic setting at 0 300 K h The TAUdown Adaption takes place within 6 hr from starting to lower the temperature if in this time the building could cool down freely i e no intermediate heating manual intervention etc The calculation takes place if the room has cooled by 0 3 K within the period of 2 h to 6 hr after lowering starts 40 of the newly calculated TAUdown value fl
176. Lasep 5 0K Begr ef ES pp 18 H Raum Abluft Priorities Priority Function Highest Limit 1 S312 1 Cascade only PID S303 Limit 28312 1 XP conversion S317 lowest Structure delay start up S304 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5200 b actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted cascade probe float 5201 ER set point 0 1 50 3 ER float 5202 tN set point deletable 0 99 deleted min tN cascade integer 5203 supply air min limit set point 9999 9999 18 float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5204 supply air max limit set point 9999 9999 65 float 5205 XS Zul actual value 9999 9 9999 9 0 XS feed cascade float 5206 XP Beg set point deletable 0 5 999 deleted XP Lim Casc float 5207 Slide Casc set point 0 boolean 5208 Max diff set point deletable 9999 9999 deleted integer 5209 Diff supply air room set point 9999 9 9999 9 0 float 5210 EA actual value deletable deleted Source EA cascade boolean 5211 xw actual value 9999 9 9999 9 0 Xw cascade float i021 begr actual value 0 Limitation cascade boolean Version 05 06 4 3 104 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 105 4 3 2 9 4 S304 start up switching Act
177. O S_12 Confirmation switch sn nn nn 427 4 3 4 7 BOS 21 2 push button MANUAL AUTO ON OFF uunuessssnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnn nennen 427 Version 05 06 kleback neter Software structure 4 45 4 3 4 8 BO S_22 2 push buttons AUTO Manual On 428 4 34 93 BOS 23 aS EE 428 4 3 4 10 BO S_31 3 push buttons AUTO Manual off Manual on ssoan0nannannnnnoenaonnnnnnnnnennnenesenn 429 4 3 4 11 BO S_32 3 push buttons AUTO manual Level1 ON OFF Level 2 ON OFF 429 4 3 4 12 BO S_41 4 Push buttons AUTO OFF Manual Level 1 Level 2 22e 430 4 3 4 13 BO S_42 4 Push buttons AUTO DAY NIGHT OFF AAA 431 4 3 4 14 BO S_51 5 Push buttons Auto off Manual Level 1 33 431 Got BC T EE 432 4 3 5 SEO DIEC EE 433 220 nn ee ee Eee een een 433 4 3 5 2 SY_Module Module settings general 2 sus4 s4 44444040440nnn 000 0Rnenn nennen anna 435 4 3 5 3 SY_Config plant configuration yasni ea een 436 4 3 34 SY CAN e RTE 438 da E 440 4 3 5 8 SY FAX EE 441 A OE EE 442 4 3 5 10 E EE 442 43 BAT SY ICO CIE e oa it AE E Mime e E EE 443 E SY Soldaten 444 4 3 5 13 SY Mod CONT EE 445 4 3 5 14 SY NetWork E 446 4 3 6 Attachment functions 2 2 Hk IR ikea 448 4 2 9 1 FOOT SCAN EE 449 438 3 F003 Limitation ann ee 451 4 364 F004 each E 451 4 3 6 5 F005 Command execution check nen 451 e E 006 Dampiig ea ee ae eier 452 E TR 453 4 2 0 3 F017 Object status na eine e
178. P Y limitation float 5316 1 EF1 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 1 Anfl set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 1 End1 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 94 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5319 1 EA1 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 1 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 1 active boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 2 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4Y3 8 Y4 5311 2 Q2 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 2 G2 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 2 MMBegr2 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 2 Inv2 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 2 XP2 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 2 EF2 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 2 Anf2 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 2 End2 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 2 EA2 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 2 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 2 active boolean No name of parameter parameter ty
179. SHUT boolean 3 Ysoll actual value 0 100 0 Setp valve automatic float 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Sevo feedback valve float 5 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Position display float 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp setting of valve float 7 Yrinv set point deletable deleted Inverted servo feedback boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence integer 12 Ren set point deletable deleted Rep switch boolean 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock malfunction catch boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Valve malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 347 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer 19 Zw set point deletable deleted Forced control boolean 20 ZwSw set point 0 100 100 Setpoint forced control integer 21 StzVBS actual value 0 1440 720 min VBS Start time integer 22 LZVBS set point 0 1440 5 min VBS run time integer 23 YVBS set point 0 100 0 Setp valve blocking prot integer 24 vbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 25 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolea
180. TStarget target correction If DDC room correction or optimize sub menus are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the set point correction This for example influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction TRtarget new TRtarget target correction Room correction TStarget new TStarget Roomtemp TRtarget new ER correction Optimization NO TStarget correction Basic PID program In this basic program the set point correction works on the current set point XS current XS current new XS current target correction Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5290 Q100 actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Q EA Setpoint Correction float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 144 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5291 Q actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Setpoint Correction float 5292 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Setpoint Correction boolean 5293 release SWK set point infinity infinity 5 K float 5294 Release SWK above set point infinity infinity 5 float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 145 4 3 2 9 16 S316 Set point remote control Activation Sub function of Heating and ventilation basic program 10 can be
181. Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 78 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2 g actual value 0 Menu output limit boolean 3 xsakt actual value infinity infinity O Xs current Limit float 4832 FG actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q GUIDE SIZE float 4839 QG actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted SOURCE LIMIT float 5748 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Limiting value boolean 8610 Wert set point infinity infinity 95 Limit float 8611 EF GW set point 10 10 0 EF GW float 8612 xsd set point 0 999 1 Xsd float 8613 Anf set point infinity infinity 22 Slide begin float 8614 End set point infinity infinity 32 Slide end float 8615 Select set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 Minimum 1 Maximum Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 2 4 5083 Arithmetic Activation 4 3 79 Sub function of basic heating program and PID 20 times can be set Can be switched on off via 2153 Q EA Arithmetic If no binary source is set the calculation is constant Function summary The DDC software object arithmetic carries out mathematic calculations Up to 4 analog values or also 4 digital values from the DDC4000 system and any constants can be int
182. Y MsgMan This system object is to be used for setting up the message memory With the aid of the possible settings here the size of the memory can be stipulated and the messages deleted Cy 29 000 00 00 S _MsgMan 01 Meldespeicher L 101 neue Meldung U 102 Mos quittieren 103 akt Anz Meld 0 104 Ms loschen 105 max Anz Meld Bd 106 speicher voll U 107 kommende Meld Funde Via Quit MS you can confirm messages that have accumulated Entry must be set briefly to 1 Via Delete MS you can delete all message pairs malfunction and normal messages Entry must be set briefly to 1 A small trick for deleting tne memory set memory size to 1 then the memory only holds 1 message Mark this with a normal message and delete A new value message can be connected via new message 4 3 5 10 SY_EMAIL As in SY_FAX you can stipulate addresses for the output here Under name there should be a user name for simpler identification Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 443 ITS Email L Email dr 1 123 intranet de Email dr 2 EmailAdr 3 EmailAdr 4 Email dr 5 EmailAdr 6 Name 1 Willi Mame 2 1 a J El I 1 A a fe SOU OS Mod ont UI Modem Config La g Einwahl SMSC 0w0D1771167 10 Einwahl SMSC Ow 11 SMSProtokoll DI TAPE 12 SMSProtokoll DE UCPS1 15 SIMSFrototoll E TAPE 14 SMSProtokoll 41 TAPE 15 IF
183. _AdrSMTP Se 16 Absender Email Up to version 1 2 there will only be the option of sending a mail within an intranet The Internet dialing procedure and the required authentification algorithms have not been implemented yet 4 3 5 11 Sy_Clock In Sy_Clock plant time you can enter the time zone and current time By entering the time zone you define whether the clock is altered for summer winter time vn kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 444 Uhrzeit Datum Hilfe 20 47 17 Uhrzeit neu H el el 20 Zeitzone 1 2 3 Europa Berlin SES 7 fal Uhrzeit Datum Hilfe 15 03 46 Monat M rz Jan 4 2006 H Mo Di Mi Do Fr sa 30 2 3 4 5 El S 8 g 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 4 3 5 12 SY_Serial SY_Serial Modem operation Go to ser interf In the mode parameter enter a 3 for RS232 modem 1 means inactive Or from Version 1 1 X select RS232 modem Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 445 ITE Di ser Schnittst CH 1 Modus RRS 2Z32 Moder Z Baudrate 115200 A chnittstelle dewiilyse 4 Handshake Sofware handst J Modem Status offline 4 3 5 13 Sy_ModConf The modem access is configures in the SY_ModConf system object Ay 2a000 00 00 S Mogdcongn 1644 48 Modem Config E 1 Absender b 49 30 60095 C 1 Initstring WATI A Initstring batzl 4 3 Initstring b att J Modem Escape
184. a BACnet ID and a BACnet type To assign the BACnet types there are the following function objects FB_AV BACnet Analog Value FB Al BACnet Analog Input FB_AO BACnet Analog Output FB_BV BACnet Binary Value FB BI BACnet Binary Input Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 459 FB_BO BACnet Binary Output FB_MV BACnet Multistate Value FB_MI BACnet Multistate Input FB_MO BACnet Multistate Output The appropriate function object must be selected in line with the value to be transferred Within the function object a unique BACnet object ID must be assigned Alarms for BACnet such as are described in Start up ppt DDC3550 BACnet COV Function summary BACnet Analog Input Object f r das Anh ngen an Parameter Signaleing nge an Ger ten Inputs die stetige Werte liefern werden in BACnet als Analog Input Objekte abgebildet Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 10 integer 4 3 6 15 2 FB_AO analog output Function summary BACnet Analog Output Object f r das Anh ngen an Parameter Es wurde f r Werte entworfen die ein Ansteuersignal eines Aktuators darstellen Im DDC4000 System werden diese Objekte benutzt um Parameter f r die GLT analoge Sollwerte darzustellen Dies ist ein Anhangsobjekt dass hei t dass der Wert des Parameters an dem dieses Objekt angehangen worden i
185. able deleted Q EA Adaptive HKL boolean H01 GLTY1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence Y1 float 4 3 202 The 5180 TR set point and 5381 Q Room sensor parameters are to be taken from the basic program Basis of calculation on request Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 203 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 204 4 3 2 11 S321 Enthalpy Function summary The calculation of enthalpy or the water content occurs with the measured temperature and humidity values The assignment of the humidity sensor and temperature sensor to calculate enthalpy can be freely selected This occurs using the source temperature and source rF parameters Special function lt is also possible to calculate the enthalpy values from a dry and a wet thermometer psychometric principle For this the source of the wet thermometer is entered in parameter 5502 Source temp humid The calculated value of the absolute humidity is set in the absolute humidity parameter The calculated value of the enthalpy result is set in the enthalpy parameter The calculated value for the dewpoint is set in the dewpoint parameter The calculated value of the relative humidity is set in the 5507 relative humidity parameter Note The calculation of the enthalpy values with 5502 source temp Humidity has priority over the calculation with 5501 so
186. acity C This results in calculating the heat volume that is depicted on parameter 5712 heat volume C The heat capacity and heat volume are calculated in a fixed interval of 10 seconds Q W rmeleistung in kA 3 75 kWh 200 150 100 50 0 10 20 30 tins H rmeleistung C 300 KM BOOK 450 KW W rmemenege C 0 B33 kWh 1667 kWh 125 kWh Example e g Scaling C 3 and scaling C EXP 2 means the maximum value at 100 heat capacity corresponds to 3x 10 2 300 kW Via a 0 1 flank of the binary source parameter 5714 Q Reset heat volume A the 5713 Delta heat volume C counted to date is reset to 0 The 1 0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5713 Delta heat volume counting again We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset The calculated volumes of 5712 heat volume A and 5713 Delta heat volume C can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 222 The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Status 0 5717 Q EA Wmber_P If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5710 Q heat power actual value deletable 0 infinity deleted kW float 5711 Heat power C actual value 0 100000000 0 kW float 5712 Amount of heat
187. ack neter Software structure Objects 4 3 166 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5150 Aufh max set point deletable 0 300 deleted min Maximum heating up time integer 5180 TRsoll set point infinity infinity 20 C TR set float 5181 TRmin set point infinity infinity 17 C TR min float 5380 EA Opti actual value deletable deleted Q EA optimizing boolean 5381 QRt actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q room probe float 5384 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Room correction boolean 5560 t auf set point 0 10 0 42 K h Dew up HO float 5561 tab set point 0 10 0 3 K h Dew down HO float 5562 K set point 0 1 5 0 K Factor HO float 5563 tab erl set point 1 Dew up adapt HO boolean 5564 tauf erl set point 1 Dew down adapt HO boolean 5565 Vorabs set point 1 Initial HO boolean 5566 UVorl_HO set point 0 60 0 min U Feed HO integer 5567 KVorl_HO set point 0 30 0 min K Feed HO integer 5568 Totz HO set point 0 120 0 min Dead time HO integer 5316 4 EF4 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float i001 Pu actual value 0 Pump boolean i003 Kessel actual value 0 Boiler requirements boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 167 what is missing good process diagrams times Version
188. ackOffice 1 EG gt 4 4 4 Integrating touch screen switches The touch screen switches can be integrated in two ways 1 a function object switch can be attached to a multistate input The output and input should match in terms of the values transferred 2 switches can be set for basic object This basic object can receive additional functions with other links Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 489 Link switch S 42 with the PID basic program fan Handschalter f r Quelle Fern Multistate Link with additional outside influence in automatic operation Handschalter am h chsten priorisiert ist Schalter Auto gelten die Schalterquellen 5 01 5 0 Quelle an Multistate If the manual svvitch on the display is set to Auto the inputs are queried Thus day vvas passed on to the control circuit If the Night switch has been pressed the switch would have a higher priority and the night command vvould be sent to the control circuit Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 490 How is the manual switch superposed Quelle am 5175 ist h her priorisiert als Schalter S O1 Q Auto 9 se s 02 Aus 0 uclic an Se S 03 gt Tag 1 ag 5 04 Nacht 2 Multistate By attaching a source function object to in input of the control circuit the switch content can be overloaded So for example the co
189. actual value deletable deleted reference 6812 Source Manual 12 actual value deletable deleted reference 6813 Source Manual 13 actual value deletable deleted reference 6814 Source Manual 14 actual value deletable deleted reference 6815 Source Manual 15 actual value deletable deleted reference 6816 Source Manual 16 actual value deletable deleted reference 6817 Source Manual 17 actual value deletable deleted reference 6818 Source Manual 18 actual value deletable deleted reference 6819 Source Manual 19 actual value deletable deleted reference 6820 Source Manual 20 actual value deletable deleted reference 6821 Consumers 1 set point 1 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 249 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6822 Consumers 2 set point 1 boolean 6823 Consumers 3 set point 1 boolean 6824 Consumers 4 set point 1 boolean 6825 Consumers 5 set point 1 boolean 6826 Consumers 6 set point 1 boolean 6827 Consumers 7 set point 1 boolean 6828 Consumers 8 set point 1 boolean 6829 Consumers 9 set point 1 boolean 6830 Consumers 10 set point 1 boolean 68
190. address There are various value ranges for this element and their meaning is shown in the following table Each module has a unique number within its central device Value Notes 000 Address the central unit module DDC4000 itself controls regulators plant information 001 099 internal modules e g I O card 1 001 101 199 Module addresses for the 1st CAN bus 101 116 for S Bus 101 163 future plans 101 199 for F Bus 201 299 Module addresses for the 2nd CAN bus 201 0 216 for S Bus 201 0 263 future plans 201 0 299 for F Bus Address element lt plant gt The plant is the third element in the technical address It can have a value in the range between 0 and 99 Value Notes 00 Used to transfer to the DDC4000 s plant information or to achieve lower hierarchy addresses 01 99 Stating the plants within the module Address element lt Group gt The group address is an organizational criterion within one module It can be used in any way Values between 0 and 99 are permitted here The number of a group is unique within a module Each module has as standard the group with number 00 Values Notes 00 99 Free order unit containers It contains one or more objects Address element lt Object Index gt The unique address of an object is combined out of the address of the object type and the object index The address element object descri
191. al man I TI Hardware Ansteuerung 4 3 384 beschaltet HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked AnfPK Hardware control signal reg BrOn Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and SwZw SM Parameter Value Impact Highest priority SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Rep Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner on 0 Zw Request pump cover 1 Request regulation if nec Burner on Y SwZw Manual Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 if nec Burner on Y Manual Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 385 Parameter Value Impact DOL Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner on Z Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 If nec Burner on Y Z Chimney sweep function Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 Burner on Y 100 Auto Automatic operation request pump cover AnfAuto Lowest priority Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic o
192. alle anderen 0 Schematic depiction of conversion Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 492 D Schlosshotel Fniedrichsruhe DDC4000 03 Fu bodenheizung 001 68 000 Projekt Funktion Datenaustausch Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe Beaibeiten Ansicht Einf gen Format Extas Shape Hite l8j xj PS 4000 DDC4000 02 statische Heizung 001 68 000 DDC4000 03 Fu bodenheizung 0017687000 DA 3 38 P OG AXIS 9 0 BR LAG ei Schlosshotel Fiedrichsnhe 30 001 DDC4000 Anschluss EQ 68 000 DDC4000 DDC4000 El L DI Foyer Le 02 statische Heizung 03 Fu bodenheizung zs H 01 Regelung H 02 Prim igumpe FD S_31 01 AUTOAEINA HU LO Betrieb St rung El 239 01 GP HEIZUN F L 03 Roppelrelais Aute F H301 01 Pumpe Einst El El El m m Arial HH e E EHS A a A 2 E Fu bodenheizung Regelung GP HEIZUNG Pumpe 68 000103 01 5239 01 4001 d MO1 STW d M 01 Storung H P 02 Voreg FBH pin 4 P 03 Voreg FBH pin d P 01 Vorreg FBH pin 03 Sekundspumpe El ap 04 Bar sl Le 5 Lounge Fu bodenheizung Regelung STW STW 68 D0003 0 1 4 01 6 Orte DDC j Anlagen TAB 3000 Tap 4000 Wertumwandlung wird Zielwert gleich aus 0 SI Neu ndern Bewertung Normal ee Definition von Bin r auf MultistateT DCS Eigenschaften DDC3000Parameteruchs DDC4000 Eigenschaften Depiction
193. alue text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 1 Z OPEN 0 Z SHUT Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 388 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 19 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Forced Auto 1 Forced OPEN 0 Forced SHUT 21 reg actual value 0 es Release Reg VVS boolean 25 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK boolean 26 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 S TimeBAK integer 27 tMot set point 0 600 120 Ss Motor runtime integer 30 Stell actual value 3 1 value text Setting multistate 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 24 Running Function description A new output reg that visualizes the request for the volume flow regulator AnfAuto was added Final position replication The final position open final position closed and position feedback signal valve inputs can be wired if required If the position feedback signal valve is wired but not the final position open and final position closed both final position are determined via the position feedback signal valve If position feedback signal valve lt 3 a closed final position is assumed if position feedback signal valve gt 97 an open final position is assumed otherwise running If the plant in addition to position feedback signal valve is also wired for final position open or final position open these inp
194. alues A max or min limit is possible in line with the requests The max or min limits may glide in line with a command value E g if for ventilation controls beside lifting the room s set point depending on the outside temperature concurrently min limit of the supply air is lifted Function description In the DDC software object limitation the selected limitation sensor in the source parameter 5270 Q limitation sensor is set The limitation value is set with parameter 5271 limitation value Parameter 5272 limitation sets whether this is a max or a min limiting value The limitation works in the following 2 phases a The value of the limitation sensor nears the max or min limitation value b The value of the limitation sensor is higher or lower than the max or min limitation value Re a the limitation function is adopted gliding The variance of the limitation sensor to the limitation value is compared with the main control variance of the basic program Depending on the relevant control variance control is still made with the main control circuit XP Re b if the set Max limitation value is exceeded or the number falls below the min limitation value all XPs on the control circuit are replaced by 5273 XPlimitation in order control the limitation value infringement as quickly as possible This control status is indicated by switching the internal contact V10 limitation and 1020 XP switching from 0 to 1 Limiting value glide can o
195. always the local computer DDC 4000 10 x x x 172 16 x x 172 31 x x 192 168 0 x 192 168 255 x private addresses that cannot make direct connect with the Internet In corporate networks addresses are normally selected from this range These addresses require a gateway networked computer with Internet connection to be able to communicate with the Internet Details on network mask This depends on the customer s corporate network and must be provided by him Gateway details The DDC4000 contacts the Internet or other networks via this computer or if this is not required the entry remains empty Use of routers BACnet IP works with so called UDP telegrams These are not fed through by routers and firewalls Thus no direct connection between BACnet clients in different network sections that are connected via routers or firewalls is possible The use of a BBMD BACnet Broadcast Management Device can resolve this problem A BBMD packages broadcast messages in IP packages and sends these to a distance BBMD Then a local broadcast is transmitted The same procedure applies as appropriate for the response telegram here the remote BBMD sends an IP package to the local BBMD Only one BBMD may be used for each network section Caution No BBMD is contained in version 1 0 x and 1 1 x Access to an external device is necessary for this BACnet settings BACnet network number e g 1 Device name e g DDC4000 server Device name client
196. an 5315 4 XP4 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 4 EF4 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 96 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5317 4 Anf4 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 4 End4 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 4 EA4 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 4 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 4 active boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 97 4 3 2 9 2 S302 Y set Activation Sub function of basic heating and ventilation program 0 can be set 4 x Can be switched on off via 5327 Q Y SET if not defined ON Function summary With the Y set DDC submenu the Y outputs of the DDC control circuits are stipulated by binary signals on certain parameterizable Y values If the binary signal 1 the stipulated Y value works on the Y output Function description The Y set DDC software object can be installed and set up to four times for one DDC control circuit For this Y set can work repeatedly on the same Y output The address of the binary source is entered in parameter 5327 Q Y SET If the binary source 1 the analog value set in parameter 5326 Y SET value 0 100
197. an be selected as a guidance signal The command value only results in a change to the set point within a glide range The glide range is stipulated by the parameters 5251 glide start SG and 5252 glide end SG The influence of the guidance signal on the limiting value change is determined with the parameter 5253 INF If Inf is negative this can force a reduction in the set point Parameter 5255 Delta SP gliding is an actual value and shows the difference of the current set point that results from the DDC sub menu set point gliding The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Status 0 5254 Q EA Gliding If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Based on the start and end of glide ing the following calculation arises for the set point gliding glide start lt glide end comvalue lt glide start Delta_glide 0 glide start lt comvalue lt glide end Delta_glide EF comvalue glide start glide end lt comvalue Delta_glide EF glide end glide start glide end lt glide start comvalue lt glide end Delta_glide EF glide start glide end glide end lt comvalue lt glide start Delta_glide EF glide start comvalue glide start lt comvalue Delta_glide 0 Set point XS current basic program Delta_glide command value lt glide start Set point XS basic program glide start lt command value lt glide end Set poi
198. and PID S318 Room correction Heating S321 Enthalpy 322 Sequence menu Heating and PID 323 Binary valuation 324 Scaling Version 05 06 4 3 74 Kleback neter Software structure Objects SVO belongs to S325 Min Max average MMM S326 Time gliding S327 Pulse counting S328 Operation hours S329 Heat volumeP S330 Heat volumeDT S333 Ring counter S334 Spreadsheet function S337 GP_Fixed value GP Fixed value S338 Gliding S342 Pulse output S343 E Max S344 Degree daily figure S347 E Max French S348 Adaptive heating curve Heating S901 Signal generator for test purposes object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 S066 Boundry value 0 1 9 083 Arithmetic 0 2 0 116 Calendar unreleased 118 Scheduler 0 3 1 126 Store MMM 0 4 0 193 BP FBR01 02 unreleased 194 BP FBRO3 unreleased 195 BP FBR04 unreleased 238 GP PID 0 1 9 239 BP heating 0 1 9 309 Standstill unreleased 321 Enthalpy 0 3 1 Version 05 06 4 3 75 Kleback neter Software structure Objects object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 S322 Sequence menu 0 1 39 S323 Binary value 0 3 1 324 Scaling unreleased 325 Min Max Middle 0 1 47 326 Time sliding 0 1
199. ants the set point of the DDC control circuit Grundprogramm DDC Regelkreis aktueller Sollwert Sollwertumschaltung digitale Quelle Quelle EA Sondersoll 0 Sondersollwert Quelle Sondersollwert It is possible to delay switching between the values Parameter 5287 slope special set point is used for this The number of K min by which the set point may change at most can be entered here Switching to the special set point can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5288 Q O special target If parameter 5287 slope special set point has a valid value entered changes to the set point in the basic program e g day night set point in basic heating program is always accompanies by a time delay for an active Menu SPSW The slope with the highest priority is operational object index 1 before 2 before 3 before 4 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 137 Priorities Object index 1 has the highest priority menu index 4 has the lovvest priority 1 Set point svvitching 1 15313 1 2 Set point svvitching 2 15313 2 3 Set point svvitching 3 15313 3 4 Set point svvitching 4 15313 4 5 Set point remote control 15316 6 Set point correction 15315 Note Basic heating program In the basic heating program the set point svvitching replaces the calculate TStarget current from the basic program or the target room value TR target for the set DDC sub menu 15318 room correction and or 15300 optim
200. anual open Zw open Heater level 1 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Z closed DOL Heater level 1 on 0 Z On Heater level 1 on 1 depending on LSU and STB lowest Auto Heater level 1 on depending on Ytarget LSU and STB Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 11 H402 Electrical air heater 2 stage Function summary 4 3 286 The electrical fan heater two stage function block controls a two stage electrical fan heater and supports Generating the operating release Operating hours limiting value Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 BM1 actual value deletable deleted Plant message St1 boolean 2 BM2 actual value deletable deleted Plant message St2 boolean 4 GW1Ein set point 0 100 40 GVV1ON integer 5 GVV1Aus set point 0 100 20 GVV1OFF integer 6 GVV2Ein set point 0 100 70 GW2ON integer 7 GW2Aus set point 0 100 55 GW2OFF integer 8 STB actual value deletable deleted STB boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE boolean 10 Hand set point 4 0 value text Manual influe
201. are Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 344 No input Valve malfunction SM An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the control valve output a not Fault blocked 0 b the output Control valve switched to closed malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output control valve to closed this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m gt anliegende St rung E anliegende St rung IL E 7 im 7 weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich sional E man U MI Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch stCEC Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The functi
202. arification You can change the previous value for multistate parameters without having to change the subsequent value Example Fan is to be switched from level 1 to level 2 But two statuses may not be active at the same time The following statuses are possible O OFF 1 Level1 2 Level2 1st step Parameter status 1 active change to the control 2nd step Parameter status 1 passive a time delay Step 3 Parameter status 2 passive Step 4 Parameter status 2 active Hinweis Die Verz gerungen werden in Sekunden parametriert Die Basiswerte fur die Schaltzeiten sind Null Sekunden womit eine zeitliche Verz gerung nicht wirksam ist Typischer Anwendungsfall Merker f r Lichtsteuerung Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit tnOff tnAus set point 0 3600 0 Ss Switch off delay integer tnOn tnEin set point 0 3600 0 Ss Switch on delay integer 4 3 6 9 F017 Object status Object status defines what the LEDs in the superordinate groups and plants should display auch im Anlagen Schnellzugriff der Kundenansicht Function summary Wird ein Objektstatus gesetzt so gilt fur den Objektstatus aktiv bzw nicht aktiv jeweils ein Zustand Ein Objektstatus besitzt somit immer ein Zustandspaar 1 Zustandspaar Auto Hand setzbar durch F017 Status Hand 2 Zustandspaar Ein Aus setzbar durch F017 Status Anlage Ein bzw Anlage Aus Der unter Status ge
203. arly as the plans it should be ascertained who stipulates the required network and BACnet settings These should be queried and documented using the following list Devices IP address Mask Gateway BACnet network number 1 DDC4200 2 DDC4200 BMS Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 29 3 4 control cabinet bus 3 4 1 General 3 4 1 1 Installation One peculiarity must be observed during installation For the BMD and BMA bus modules the electricity supply and the CAN bus can be looped through the modules using a cascade plug 3 4 1 3 Power supply Performance data DDC4000 Device AC DC BMD4032 90 mA 100 mA BMD4064 90 mA 130 mA BMA4024 280 mA 24 V DC inverse polarity protection for all existing 3 4 2 BMA4024 Function summary All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type Below the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub issues in the bus module The module is usually created via planning This may also take place by logging on such a module to the control cabinet or field bus After creating a BMA4024 other objects are installed automatically This results in the following object structure 01 lt central unit gt 101 lt Module gt BMA4024 00 lt plant gt always 00 00 lt group gt always 00 P 01 lt Object Index gt Pin o
204. ary of all plants and the Anlagen w hlen f r weitere Informationen quick start bar Heizung b Luftung b K lte RLT K che EZR BackOffice 1 EG Anmelden Groups may be located within the plants The switch page is given the title that the group has in the DDC Central Unit All binary information that have a tick under the visualization in DDC command is found under this title e g supply air fan Switch groups or LEDs are inserted correspondingly Messe b 2004 Luftung Anlagen schalten fuluftyentilator C2 Stufe 1 BM The formation of the values page is similar Here all the parameters that are displayed behind each other must also receive a command visualizing in DDC As the depiction is set in the DDC Central Unit a change to the visualization regulations can only be made via the tool The page settings are generated here and stored as a data backup in the DDC Central Unit It is not possible to generate these pages in the DDC Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 488 Relationship betvveen address structure and operation Zentr Module Anlage Gruppe Objekt Index Para Bezeichnungen werden bernommen bersicht Anlagen Messe b 2004 Messe lb 2004 L ftung Anlagen w hlen f r weitere Informationen Anlagen schalten Heizung gt Zuluftventilator L ftung gt Auto Stufe 1 BM K lte gt Stufe 2BM RLT K che gt EZA B
205. ating message electrical fan heater Target operating status request electrical fan heater constant output Status Command execution check If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Ansteuersignal an die Hardware Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Bsz Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK x HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Anf Control signal from the object Bsz BM acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Anf Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling 4 3 302 If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the request electrical fan heater constant output 1 not malfunction blocked 0 2 switches off the request electrical fan heater output malfunction bl
206. ation 100 means only for 100 units change in the limitation factor is Y min or Y max on the Y output moved by 100 Re 2 Depending on a command value outside temperature source parameter 5103 source TO in the basic program of the DDC control circuit the limitation value stipulated in parameter 5312 YB limitation value can glide The glide range is set in parameters 5317 glide start YLim and 5318 glide end YLim The influence of limiting value glide is set in parameter 5316 EF Ylimitation 5316 EF Ylimitation 1 means When changing the command value outside temperature by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB limiting value parameter is moved by 1 unit 5316 EF Ylimitation 10 means When changing the command value outside temperature by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB limiting value parameter is moved by 10 units YB Grenzwert Gleitende YBegr T Gleitanfang YBegr Au entemperatur Priorities The y limitations 1 4 also work on the basic program s Ymin Ymax Priority Function Highest Y limitations of the basic program kieback neler Software structure Priority Function 5141 Y1min 5145 Y1max 5144 Y4min 5148 Y4max lowest DDC software sub objects Y limitation Figure 1 Y limitation as 5313 YB limitation MIN 5314 YB Inverting NO Figure 2 Y limitation as 5313 YB limitation MIN 5314 YB Inverting YES Fig
207. atus Command execution check fan Target operational status FC operating message Target operational status Request FC control Output Status FC command execution check If the actual operating statuses are not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCECorstCECFu Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Ansteuersignal an die Hardvvare berwachungszeit Bsz Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverzogerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter LuFu and LuBy Control signal from the object Bsz BM Acknowledgement from hardware CEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 339 HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC LuFu and LuBy Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch Malfunction messages that occurSM and SMFu or stCEC and stCECFu may affect the operation of the switching outputs 1 not at all malfunction blocked 0 2 if the relevant outputs are switched off or changed malfunction bloc
208. atus Timer boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 433 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Toff VzA set point 0 359999 0 Ss Switch off delay integer Ton VzE set point 0 359999 0 S Switch on delay integer Tstart SzT actual value deletable 0 2147483647 deleted s Start time integer 4 3 5 System objects 4 3 5 1 System objects The system objects are located in plant 0 of the DDC Central Unit and are used for general settings Network structures are stipulated here and the peripherals are also administrated fax modem printer object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 SY_BACnet External BACnet 0 4 0 SY BA Ext BACnet AE 0 4 0 SY B AO Ext BACnet AA 0 4 0 SY B AV Ext BACnet AVV 0 4 0 SY B BI Ext BACnet DE 0 4 0 SY B BO Ext BACnet DA 0 4 0 SY B BV Ext BACnet DVV 0 4 0 SY CAN CAN Bus 0 1 9 SY Central Central 0 1 9 SY Cloch System time 0 1 9 SY Config System configuration 0 1 9 SY_D4DML Def data unreleased SY_D4PML Planning 0 1 9 SY_Datsi save data unreleased SY_DDC110 SY_DDC110 unreleased SY_DDC3000 DDC3000 operating unreleased SY_DSub D SUB config unreleased SY_Email Email 0 3 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects
209. back neter Software structure Objects 4 3 214 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 13 F3 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 3 float 14 F4 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 4 float 15 ER set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 5 float 16 F6 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 6 float 17 EY set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 7 float 18 F8 set point 0 10 1 MMM Factor 8 float 21 QEA1 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 1 boolean 22 QEA2 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 2 boolean 23 QEA3 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 3 boolean 24 QEA4 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 4 boolean 25 QEA5 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 5 boolean 26 QEA6 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 6 boolean 27 QEA7 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 7 boolean 28 QEA8 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Sensor 8 boolean 31 min actual value infinity infinity 0 Min select float 32 max actual value infinity infinity 0 Max select float 33 mittel actual value infinity infinity O Middle value float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 215 4 3 2 16 S326 Time gliding Activation Sub function of 10 times can be set Function summary T
210. backepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 421 4 3 4 Basic objects flags timers AE AA BE BA Basic objects are e g markers timers and switches Following short descriptions and parameters object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 L Lamp 0 1 9 M Marker 0 1 9 P Pin 0 1 9 S Switch 0 1 9 S_11 ON OFF switch 0 1 9 S 12 ON OFF switch 0 1 9 S 21 AUTO MAN ON OFF 0 1 9 S 22 AUTO ON 0 1 9 S 23 MANUAL OFF 0 1 9 S_31 AUTO ON OFF 0 1 9 S 32 AUTO MANUAL 1 2EA 10 1 9 S 41 AUTO 0 1 2 0 1 9 S 42 AUTO 0 D N 0 1 9 S_51 AUTO 0 T N Heatg 0 1 9 T Timer 0 1 9 4 3 4 1 BO L Lamp To control an LED on a module Function summary Dieses Objekt repr sentiert eine LED auf der Frontblende eines Moduls Wobei die Frontblende als Darstellungselement von physikalischen als auch logischen Blenden zu sehen ist SBM21 oder ein Bildschirm der Oberfl che im Bereich Kunden des Ger tes Die Funktionalit t einer Lampe wurde aus dem DDC3000 System bernommen und f r die logische Darstellung erweitert Es werden ung ltige und gel schte Werte ber die Lampen in der entsprechenden Darstellungsform ausgegeben Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 422 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 I actual value 0 State boolean 2 QD actual value deletable 0 Permanent light boolea
211. barer fester Y Wert 18 5327 Schalter f r vorgebbaren festen Y Wert 19 5328 Handeinflu 20 5329 analoger GLT Einflu Y1 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 237 4 3 2 25 S338 Gliding Function summary The function of the DDC software menu S338 gliding is to allow the set point to glide with a command value The glide range is set by the parameters GLEIT START and GLEIT END Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5421 Anf set point 10 30 22 IC Slide begin float 5422 End set point 15 40 32 IC Slide end float 5423 EF set point 0 5 0 5 EF slide float 5424 DELTA slide actual value 0 150 0 K float 5425 Q Setpoint sliding set point infinity infinity O m float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 238 4 3 2 26 S342 Pulse output Function summary The DDC software object pulse output implements any analog signal O 100 as a 3 point signal It is designed to convert the Y outputs calculated in the PID basic program heating or fixed value The analog signal is set in source parameter 5490 source Y 3 point The hardware object can be used for 3 point actuators with and without feedback potentiometer The feedback potentiometer signal is set in 5491 source return 3point Ifthe value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN
212. bes the object type The object type can be available repeatediy in one group The uniqueness of the object within the group is guaranteed by the object kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure General background 4 1 52 index Index The object index always follows the object separated by a point A difference is made between basic objects hardware objects software objects and system objects The differentiation is made by the first letter of the object type Value Notes L M P S T Basic objects lamp marker pins switches timers Further characters may follow after the relevant starting letter In any case the term ends with a period followed by a two digit index number 01 99 Hxxx yy Hardware object H code followed by a three digit number x and subsequent index code y SXXX yy Software object S code followed by a three digit number x and subsequent index code y SY_ system object Other characters my follow after the SY_ code In any case the term ends with a period followed by a two digit index number 01 99 Address element lt Sub object gt This address element is only provided for certain objects It is integrated under the object The sub object is used to specify objects and is available only once in an object It contains no index An example for an object that provides a sub object is the basic object PIN This object implements access
213. bject for contact 1 P 02 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 2 P 24 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 24 SY_Module 01 lt Object Index gt general information on the module Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 30 For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined For example this switches a contact input to a contact output Function description Module address The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its object Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central control unit occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116 according to the bus addresses 1 to 99 The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 they occupy the technical addresses 201 to 216 Please note The issues of the 1st CAN bus are handled by the system object under 000 00 00 SY CAN 01 SY CAN 02 is responsible for the 2nd CAN bus Clamp depiction Refer also to the description of the Pin object All functions of a logical terminal are handled from the corresponding Pin object The logical contact connections logical terminals 1 to 24 b1 to b24 or Y1 to Y24 match the Pin objects P 01 to P 24 The number of the physical contact connection screw terminal number does not match a Pin object e g screw terminal number 55 logical terminal 1 P 01 P xx Pin type selection determines which function objects are attached to the Pin object
214. c operation Delay automatic start The transfer from bypass to FC operation can be equipped with a delay RzByFu this delay only works in automatic operation Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the fan can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the fan operating message is not switched the fan output is used for counting Operating hours are counted in bypass and FC operation Anteuersignal Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 es Betriebsstundenz hler Betriebs stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich _Grenzwert uberschritten Set auf Wert Grenzwert Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 338 HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter LuFu or LuBy Control signal BM Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Command execution check Command execution checks refer to command execution check section for description and parameters exist for Target operational status Fan operating message Target operational status Fan FC ON Fan Bypass ON Output St
215. cation test In order to for example check the connection between a laptop and a DDC4000 Central Unit you enter the following at the MS DOS entry request Start gt Run gt cmd exe ping 172 20 11 75 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 20 The address of the DDC4000 to be addressed has to be used in the above example 172 20 11 75 A positive answer may look like this Ping was carried out for 172 20 11 75 with 32 Bytes data Response from 172 20 11 75 Bytes 32 time lt Ims TTL 127 Response from 172 20 11 75 Bytes 32 time lms TTL 127 Response from 172 20 11 75 Bytes 32 time lms TTL 127 Response from 172 20 11 75 Bytes 32 time lt Ims TTL 127 Ping statistics for 172 20 11 75 Packages Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 loss Approx time in milliseconds gt Minimum Oms Maximum 1ms Average Oms Other helpful commands in the MS DOS entry request ipconfig ipconfig all Ipconfig is a Windows program to read network data indicates IP address sub network mask standard gateway Ipconfig all displays additional information 3 2 3 3 PC operation with a browser The DDC Central Units can be operated remotely with the aid of a browser e g Internet Explorer For this the Ethernet must be connected to the PC Only port 80 can be used for operation As a result no extra ports need to be released After selecting the D
216. ccur for both the min and max limiting values using command value source parameter 5275 command value limit The range in which the min and max limits should glide is stipulated by parameters 5277 glide start limit and 5278 glide end limit The influence of gliding is set by parameter 5276 EFg If 5276 EFg 0 glide does not occur If inverting is set winter compensation takes place i e the limiting value is raised if the command kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 179 value falls belovv the value of 5278 glide end limit If no inverting is set summer compensation takes place i e the limiting value is raised if the command value exceeds the value of 5277 glide start limit This means that inverting exchanges internally to calculating glide stat and end Please refer to the end of the document for all glide calculations BegrenzungsSollwert N MIN MAX EFg gt 0 N N MIN MAX invertiert Begrenzungswert Gleitanfang Gleitende F hrungsgr e When inverting the min limit Inv limit the effect of the limitation function is inverted works like a max limit When inverting the max limit Inv limit the effect of the limitation function is inverted works like a min limit Limitation Inverting XW calculation Minimum No MIN XWgp XVVbegr Minimum Yes MAX XVVgp XVVbegr Maximum No MAX XWgp XW begr Maximum Yes MIN XVVgp XWbegr Pr
217. ch that at the start of the usage time the desired room temperature is reached and can fall directly atthe end of the usage time For this the parameters that represent the temperature behavior of the building are set temperatures measured and calculations undertaken These calculations include the responses of the previous control and management processes i e it is adapted Times are calculated for switching the heating on in order to achieve the desired room temperature at the start of the usage time or to lower the heating Function description With the DDC software object the minimum heating time to achieve the target room value at the start of use is calculated In the heating up operation the building is heated with the maximum supply temperature If the room temperature reaches the target room value of 5180 TRtarget operation is switched from warm up to day regulation Using 5560 TAUup the correct heating start time is calculated The 5560 TAUup and 5561 TAUdown parameters are adapted as per the local environment The operation of the sub menu can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5380 Q EA Optimization Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 162 berblicks Prinzipdarstellung S300 Optimierung Heizung Details und Erg nzungen siehe Text Tag Nutzzeit Nacht TRsoll TRmin YH1 Stati A A Zwische Vorab Rege Zwisch Regain Ta Ele tauk errechnet a Auskih
218. chaltung digitale Quelle Quelle EA Sondersoll 0 Sondersollwert Quelle Sondersollwert It is possible to delay switching between the values Parameter 5287 slope special set point is used for this The number of K min by which the set point may change at most can be entered here Switching to the special set point can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5288 Q O special target If parameter 5287 slope special set point has a valid value entered changes to the set point in the basic program e g day night set point in basic heating program is always Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 185 accompanies by a time delay for an active Menu SPSW The slope with the highest priority is operational object index 1 before 2 before 3 before 4 Priorities Object index 1 has the highest priority menu index 4 has the lowest priority 1 Set point switching 1 15313 1 2 Set point switching 2 15313 2 3 Set point switching 3 15313 3 4 Set point switching 4 15313 4 5 Set point remote control 15316 6 Set point correction 15315 Note Basic heating program In the basic heating program the set point switching replaces the calculate TStarget current from the basic program or the target room value TR target for the set DDC sub menu 15318 room correction and or 15300 optimize Switching to a firm TS target TR target excludes night falls If the optimize sub menu is active the new TR target
219. ck controls a steam moistening unit with target setting of 0 100 The function block supports Generating an operating target state control during the movement phase Handling the standby message Advance switch off for fighting legionella Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Beg Automatic boolean 2 Ysoll set point 0 100 50 Setpoint Autom float 3 GwYsoll set point 0 100 3 Limitval Yset float 4 Vorab actual value deletable deleted Advance switch off boolean 5 BM actual value deletable deleted Operation boolean 6 Bereit actual value deletable deleted Ready boolean 7 tBAK set point 0 infinity 30 S tBAK float 8 VzBAK set point 0 infinity 20 S VzBAK float 9 SM actual value deletable deleted SM boolean 10 ResSM actual value deletable deleted ResSM boolean 11 StSperr set point 0 SM blocked boolean 12 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence float 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Rep switch boolean 14 Hand actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Manual float 15
220. cluded Formula up to 50 characters in length Operands a b c and d only small letters up to 8 different numerical constants Constants in decimal depiction decimal point leading zero for figures under zero up to 7 nested brackets incl invisible brackets for organizing the order of calculations Spaces are possible a b or a b Parameter 2152 result depicts the result of the arithmetic calculation This result can be set as the analog source for other arithmetic calculations or a true value 0 or 1 floating value The result is invalid if a source that is not available is set as an operand for division by zero if the calculation overruns if the formula is entered in another wrong way Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 81 Function description In parameter 2146 2149 Arithmetic sources the maximum 4 analog sources are set Upto 4 analog sources are set as operands a b c and d in the mathematic formula Parameter 2151 Formula sets the mathematic formula The mathematical formula may be up to 50 characters long It contains operands operators constants and brackets The following settings apply Formula up to 50 characters in length Operands a b c and d only small letters up to 8 different numerical constants Constants in decimal depiction decimal point leading zero for figures under zero up to 7 nested brackets incl invisible bracket
221. command value outside temperature source parameter 5103 source TO in the basic program of the DDC control circuit the limitation value stipulated in parameter 5312 YB limitation value can glide The glide range is set in parameters 5317 glide start YLim and 5318 glide end YLim The influence of limiting value glide is set in parameter 5316 EF Ylimitation 5316 EF Ylimitation 1 means When changing the command value outside temperature by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB limiting value parameter is moved by 1 unit 5316 EF Ylimitation 10 means When changing the command value outside temperature by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB limiting value parameter is moved by 10 units YB Grenzwert Gleitende YBegr T Gleitanfang YBegr Au entemperatur Priorities The y limitations 1 4 also work on the basic program s Ymin Ymax Priority Function Highest Y limitations of the basic program 5141 Y1min 5145 Y1max kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 92 Priority Function 5144 Y4min 5148 Y4max lowest DDC software sub objects Y limitation Figure 1 A Stellung abh ngig von Y limitation as Begrenzungsgr e 5313 YB limitation MIN 100 T 5314 YB Inverting NO Y max Grundprogram Y min Grundprogramm program 5 Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert Figure 2 A Y limitation as o L 5313 YB limitati
222. components It represents logical and physical units and their dependencies The functions in the DDC central unit are strictly classified by plants This may for example be a heating plant with 2 heating circuits stat heating circuit WWB Within one plant parts may be grouped according to logically related functions One such group for example is a heating circuit with the pump valve and temperature sensors The function of such a plant element within the group is described by objects An object usually comprises input parameters function and output parameters A technical address in the DDC4000 system usually has the following structure Address components marked in blue are not available for parameters Zentrale Modul Anlage Gruppe Objekt Index Sub Objekt Parameter Funktionsobjekt Index Parameter The slash is always used as a separator in the address Version 05 06 kiebackepeter 4 1 49 General background Software structure Zentrale Modul Anlage 02 000 Gruppe Objekt Index Sub Objekt Parameter Funktionsobjekt Index Parameter Regelungen Steuerungen System 02 000 00 Anlage 0 02 000 00 00 Gruppe 0 02 000 00 00 SY_Datsi 01 Datensicherung 02 000 00 00 SY_Datsi 01 Command Wert in Command Anlaae 1 02 000 01 02 000 01 01 S239 01 GP Heizung 02 000 00 00 S239 01 5103 Weitere Anlagen Q TA 5103 02 000 00 00 S239 01 5103 FSo
223. ct and output distant information The amount of transportable information is lower than at the control cabinet bus It can be used for distances up to 2000 meters The field bus modules FBM are typical for the field bus Management Ebene Visualisierung DDC4000 Zentralen Bedienung Feldebene Version 05 06 Kleback neter Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1 2 6 DDC400 central units model variants DDC4200 Color 5 7 TFT touch screen DDC4100 Black and white screen with single button operation DDC4400 Black box DDC4000 Central Unit without operating elements Displaced displays DDC4001 touch screen to operate the complete DDC network Structure of planning and user guidance The functions in the DDC Central Unit are strictly classified by plant This may for example be a heating plant with 3 heating circuits Within one plant parts may be grouped according to logically related functions One such group for example is a heating circuit with the pump valve and temperature sensor elements The function of a plant component within a group and group control functions themselves are described by objects An object usually comprises input parameters function and output parameters Sample plant in preparing the planning with a number of aggregate Structure of information points for later planning Version 05 06 Kleback neter Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1 2
224. culation Minimum No MIN XVVgp XWbegr Minimum Yes MAX XVVgp XVVbegr Maximum No MAX XWop XW begr Maximum Yes MIN XVVgp XVVbegr Priorities The limit vvith the object index 10 is prioritized higher than the one vvith object index 02 The limitation function of the DDC sub menu limit has a higher priority than that of the DDC sub menu XP switching But the following functions are differentiated XP change and XW change Priorities of the limitation function a change to the current control variance kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 132 Priority Function Highest S312 1 Limitation 1 S303 Cascade only PID lowest S312 2 Limitation 2 The current control variance is determined as follows 1 XWcurrent Limitation 2 XWbasic program XWlimitation2 2 XWcurrent cascade XWcurrent XWcascade only PID 3 XWcurrent Limitation 1 XWcurrent XWlimitation1 Priorities of the limitation function b change to the XP range Priority Function Highest 312 1 Limitation 1 312 2 Limitation 2 lowest 317 XP conversion Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5270 1 IQ actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q limitation sensor float 5271 1 Limitation value set point infinity infinity 150 float 5272 1 Limitation set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 Min
225. curs SM may influence the control of the outputs Heater level 1 Heater level 2 and Heater level 3 not malfunction blocked 0 switches off the Heater level 1 on Heater level 2 on and Heater level 3 on outputs malfunction blocked 1 a malfunction caused by the command execution check stCEC1 stCEC2 or stCEC3 switches off the relevant output Heater level 1 on Heater level 2 on or Heater level 3 on If the malfunction switches off the outputs Heater level 1 on heater level 2 on and Heater level 3 on this can only be reset by activating the release malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 298 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Som a Hardware Ansteuerung anliegende St rung weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked Erh1 and Erh2 and Erh3 Hardware control signal
226. d FU operation deletable boolean 12 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs presetting integer 13 BhAktiv set point 0 Oper hrs cnt activation boolean 14 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 15 ByAktiv actual value 0 Bypass activation boolean 16 DBE actual value deleted Direct operating level active deletable boolean 17 Hand set point 4 0 value text Manual switch Autom OFF FU ON Bpass multistate 9 Auto ON 0 OFF 21 FU_ON 31 BY_ON 18 LzPBS set point 0 2147483647 0 min Run time blocking prot integer 19 PuNach set point 0 120 0 min Pump coasting integer 20 RMAna actual value 0 100 deleted Servo feedback from the FU deletable integer 21 ResBh actual value deleted Reset oper hours deletable boolean 22 ResSM actual value deleted Unlock malfunction catch deletable boolean 23 RzByFu actual value O 120 30 s Switch back time bypass FU integer 24 SMFu actual value deleted Malfunction FU deletable boolean 25 StFuBy set point 0 Malf FU requires bypass boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 403 No name of parameter parameter min max init unit typ 26 StFuSper set point 0 Malf FU blocked boolean 27 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 28
227. d on off via 5639 Q EA Adapt HKL if not defined ON Function summary The basic heating program controls the supply temperature due to the weather The set point of the supply temperature is calculated as per the heating curve which in turn is stipulated by the RH parallel movement and EF steepness parameters Function description It is possible to set the progress of the heating curve with the DDC software object S348 adaptive heating curve For this the parameters 5630 TS 20 to 5638 TS 20 at fixed outside temperature values parameterize the desired temperatures for the start When installing the DDC software menu EF and KH from the basic program are used as the basis for calculating the supply temperature values This heating curve is moved by comparing the set point for the room temperature parameter 5180 TR set point with the actual room temperature source parameter 5381 Q Room sensor xw room parallel to the relevant outside temperature value The5184 Adaption permitted parameter can permit or prohibit this adaption of the heating curve set via a binary source If no source is set or is invalid it is also adapted The adaption occurs at the end of the utilization time if the utilization time is longer than 3 hours otherwise after 24 hours of usage time by the usage time program remote day Z influence day No adaption takes place for a difference less than 0 5 K from xw period Via a binary source
228. d therefore to the logical contact connection e g pin 1 04 101 00 00 P 01 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 56 Sub object The pin object contains a sub object This pin is therefore defined as a digital input CAI 04 101 00 00 P 01 CDI Parameters Access to the parameter k in which the digital logical contact status is displayed 04 101 00 00 P 01 CDI k Function object Index A function object is attached to this k parameter that extends or changes the properties or contains additional function e g outputs a message in the DDC4000 if the binary value changes from 0 to 1 04 101 00 00 P 01 CDI k FSelMO 01 Parameter of the function object You can stipulate for example the properties of the function object with these parameters In the example parameter 101 is accessed and this contains the source address of the analog value 04 101 00 00 P 01 CDI k FSelMO 01 101 4 1 2 Parameter types For parameterizing each object has a certain number of parameters These parameters are shown in tabular form The types used are described in greater detail here Can the parameters be deleted In many cases a function is switched to inactive in this way Source or not A source can be linked to each parameter in the DDC4000 The value of the source then replaces the parameter value In line with the importance some typical parameters always require source parameterizing T
229. deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer 15 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 16 Zw set point deletable deleted Forced control boolean 17 ZwSw set point 0 100 100 Setp flap forced control integer 18 tMotAuf set point 0 2147483647 120 S Motor runtime OPEN integer 19 tMotZu set point 0 2147483647 120 Ss Motor runtime CLOSED integer 20 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Position display There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal cover input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position cover is used This may come from Target cover position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Idle zone If the position feedback signal cover is not switched on the idle zone only works on control signal changes if the control signal Ytarget changes by a higher amount than the idle zone set If position feedback signal cover is switched the idle zone works on the difference between the control signal and the position feedback signal Yr l e if the difference reaches a higher amount than the idle zone set signal changes are issued Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 316 Malfunction catch
230. der to transfer the source value to parameter 5103 Address element lt parameter gt of the function object The parameter is a property of the function object A function object is comprised of one or more parameters whose value influence the behavior of the function object For this the parameter must be unique in its function object The parameter is an alphanumeric chain of characters e g s 4 1 1 1 Addressing examples Example 1 access to parameter command e g for backing up data Central unit For central unit 01 01 Module Access to data backup is provided in the DDC4000 system information 01 000 Plant Access to the data backup is through plant 00 01 000 00 Group Access to data backup is through group 00 01 000 00 00 Object Index Access to data backup is guaranteed by object SY Datsi 01 000 00 00 SY_Datsi 01 Sub object No sub object is required for access to the command parameter Therefore no sub object is used Parameters Access to the command parameter 01 000 00 00 SY_Datsi 01 Command Function object Index A function object is not required for access to the command parameter Parameter of the function object A function object parameter is not required for access to the command parameter Example 2 Access to the s parameter as the source address for a Q TO parameter in basic heating program Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background
231. double address malfunction The module notifies a malfunction If the module detects a malfunction itself sets SY_Module 01 malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module 01 Err No ErrNo malfunction code Warnings and malfunction messages are coded here The importance can only be queried in the R amp S Terminal occupancy 22 23 24 25 26 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 50 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 10Y 0 109 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Z GND Bry Bry Bry BY BX BY BY BX BY Bry Bry Bry Bry BX BY BX BY BY BX EX Bry Bry EX BY 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Bl B2 B3 B4 ER B B7 B8 ES BIO Ell B12 B13 B14 BIS Bl Bl Els B19 B20 B21 522 B23 B24 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 32 3 4 3 BMD4032 Function summary All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type Belovv the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub issues in the bus module The module is usually created via planning This may also take plac
232. e 6704 Back notify contact 4 actual value deletable deleted reference 6705 Back notify contact 5 actual value deletable deleted reference 6706 Back notify contact 6 actual value deletable deleted reference 6707 Back notify contact 7 actual value deletable deleted reference Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 243 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6708 Back notify contact 8 actual value deletable deleted reference 6709 Back notify contact 9 actual value deletable deleted reference 6710 Back notify contact 10 actual value deletable deleted reference 6711 Back notify contact 11 actual value deletable deleted reference 6712 Back notify contact 12 actual value deletable deleted reference 6713 Back notify contact 13 actual value deletable deleted reference 6714 Back notify contact 14 actual value deletable deleted reference 6715 Back notify contact 15 actual value deletable deleted reference 6716 Back notify contact 16 actual value deletable deleted reference 6717 Back notify contact 17 actual value deletable deleted reference 6718 Back notify contact 18 actual value deletable deleted reference 6719
233. e software object S347 is especially set up to meet the requests of the French power industry Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5429 Limiting value tanphi actual value 0 1 0 4 float 5434 Q res actual value deletable deleted Q reset reference 5438 Measuring cycle actual value 10 180 60 S integer 5439 Switch scale factor actual value 1 4 2 integer 5445 Measuring interval actual value 10 30 10 min integer 5446 E max status set point 8 0 value text multistate 0 No GW 1 GW 1 2 GW 2 3 GW 3 4 GW 4 5 GW 5 6 GW 6 7 GW 7 5449 E max alarm tanphi set point 0 boolean 5454 Wait time actual value 0 5 3 integer 5458 Q Aus actual value deletable deleted Source OFF E max reference 5459 E max alarm set point 0 boolean 5460 Max nr of consumers set point 0 20 0 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 253 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5461 Limiting value partial load summer actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5462 Limiting value full load summer actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5463 Limiting value partial load winter actual value 0 01 1000000 300 kW float 5464 Limiting value normal load winter actual value
234. e 0 0 End of range Unit m h Example 2 An analog signal 0 100 should be converted into Fahrenheit 0 96 350 0 100 Week dkaligenng H a 200 100 Wert Skalierung 40 60 SD 100 GO dkal Fuhlsr Start of range 58 0 O 9 End of range 302 0 100 9 Unit F Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5550 Q B actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q scal sensor float 5551 Anf set point infinity infinity 0 Begin scaling float 5552 Ende set point infinity infinity 0 End scaling float 5553 Delta set point 0 10 0 min output delta float 5554 Wert actual value infinity infinity 0 Value scaling float 5555 PT1 set point deletable 1 3600 deleted s Dampening integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 212 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 213 4 3 2 15 S325 MinMaxAverage Function summary Using the DDC software object S325 min max average the smallest largest and average value can be calculated from up to 8 analog signals Each of the 8 analog signals can be occupied with a weighting factor The 8 analog signals are recorded via source parameterizing 1 8 MMM sensor 1 8 The factors for weighting the individual analog signals are to be set in 11 18 MMM Factor 1 8 In addition via the binary
235. e 453 4 3 6 12 FSelMO Selection message set cis cs coendkccertdstascccosecnvddnnatouel sequins Vecnmocksndtadatoncetmmmeueddannteees 454 4 3 6 13 FAIMO Sensor monitoring ea nl 456 4 3 6 14 Set parameters nn sn snnennesnnnnnennnnnnnnnnen 457 4 3 6 14 12 FSOUfCE ia ala 457 4 3 6 14 3 F013 Simulation value nn nsnennennennnennnnnnnn 457 4 3 6 14 4 F014 Test value nn nnnennnnnannennnonnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnen 458 4 3 6 15 BACnet function objects ea ale eren eiiaier 458 4 3 6 15 1 FB Al analog input ss EE aa 458 4 3 6 15 2 FB AO analog output nn 459 4 3 6 15 3 FB AV analog parameters nommen nn nnennnennennnnnnnnnnn 459 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 46 4 3 6 15 4 FB BI binary input sn ns neannannen 460 4 3 6 15 5 FB BO binary out 460 4 3 6 15 6 FB BV binary parameters nen 460 4 3 6 15 7 FB MI multistate input ccc cece cece cece cece eeeeee eee eaaaeaaaeaaaeaaeeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeties 461 4 3 6 15 8 FB MO multistate output ccc eee c cee ee cece eee eee ee eee eaaeeaaaaaaaeaaeeaaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 461 4 3 6 15 9 FB MV multistate parameters nen 462 4 3 T iat chorea acerca eaten ected einen oralen 462 4 3 T DE 462 4 3 7 2 CAI analog input E 464 4 3 7 3 CAO analog output EE 464 4 3 7 4 CDI binary input ee elegante 465 4 3 7 5 CDO binary output zueinander eines ke 465 EO GCMOQMO EE 465 4 3 8 Deyice OD CO IE giier iiis Eee eer er Peet an aiaa ete a aE a aa
236. e DDC software object 318 room correction is only effective in Day regulation Ifthe software object 316 set point remote control is active the 5180 TR parameter in the Day regulation is replaced by 5265 XS remote control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5180 TRsoll set point infinity infinity 20 C TR set float 5181 TRmin set point infinity infinity 17 C TR min float 5381 QRt actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q room probe float 5382 ER set point 0 10 3 ER correction float 5383 Verz set point deletable 10 60 deleted min Delay RK float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 197 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5384 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Room correction boolean Par No Parameter name plain Descripti Input Ed lower limit upper limit specification Unit text on Activation parameter 5384 Q EA room correction Activate x 0 1 deactivate function Parameters 5381 Q room sensor measured x C room temperatu re 5382 ER correction Influence x 0 0 10 0 3 0 on TStarget 5383 Delay RK Delay x 10 60 min time for room correction 5180 TR target Target x 20 0 C room temperatu re day operation 5181 TR min Target x 17
237. e burner is standing by to produce heat If then the signa cover 1 the burner 1 is switched on burner level 1 on 1 For operational message pump cover this does not include a command execution check as Version 05 06 request burner level 1 on is set to 1 by the control and operational message pump kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 366 request pump cover should always be linked to a pump or cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Chimney sweep function The chimney sweep function switches on burner level 1 and 2 for the chimney sweep function time span when the burner is automatic mode If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the chimney sweep function time span even if the request automatic operation is set to 0 in this time When the chimney sweep function is activated the chimney sweep function active parameter is set to 1 Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of burner level 1 can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output burner 1 on is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section
238. e by logging on such a module to the control cabinet or field bus After creating a BMD other objects are installed automatically This results in the following object structure 01 lt central unit gt 101 lt Module gt BMD 00 lt plant gt always 00 00 lt group gt always 00 P 01 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 1 P 02 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 2 P 30 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 30 SY_Module 01 lt Object Index gt general information on the module For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined For example this switches a contact input to a contact output Function description Module address The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116 as per the bus addresses 1 to 16 The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 they occupy the technical addresses 201 to 216 Note The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under 000 00 00 SY CAN 01 SY_CAN 02 is responsible for the second CAN bus Clamp depiction Refer also to the description of the Pin object All logical terminal functions are handled from the corresponding Pin object The logical contact connections logical terminals 1 to 32 64 k1 to k32 64 or K1 to K32 64 match the Pin objects P 01 to P 32 64 The number of the physical contact connecti
239. e customer interface cccccceedseeecneetteessceconsenenteescseceeesenensacccenssnenescecconsneneene 486 4 4 4 Integrating touch screen switches EE 488 EE E 490 4 4 6 Converting multistate to binary eiecooi meitat amtlestisnnmoStentsenyoDmdeit ents mts tsmteeafm i 491 4 4 7 Network retum 0ssussssnsennennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenonnnnenneenneennnnnnsnnnennesnesnnessn sn nn snnennennnnnnen 493 4 5 Service level data restore backup updates uussunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 495 4 5 1 SEeWICE OVE RE 495 4 5 1 1 Service level access to parameterizing cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeaeeaeaasaeaaaeaaeeaeeeaeeees 495 4 5 1 2 User administration iiri a NE Ea ar r EEEE E A EE EE AERE EEEE 496 4 5 2 Import data backups software updates nn nn 497 4 5 2 1 Cold start warm start reese 497 4 5 2 2 Import data PS4000 nn EE ENE PE ENEA Ee 498 4 8 2 9 Data restore backup CF Card an ne iii om act mi nica nis 504 4 5 2 4 Data en 507 4 5 2 5 Plant software update nn RE P E EEEE E EREE REE EE 507 ge E Eelere ele le EE 508 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure General background 4 1 48 4 1 General background 4 1 1 Addressing Address structure In the DDC4000 system a technical address is used to structure and administrate data This is based on the structure for administrating technical plants heating cooling and control units and their individual
240. e g DDC4000 client Vendor name Kieback amp Peter fixed entry Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 27 Vendor ID 39 fixed entry Device ID e g 1 Device ID Client e g 2 Model name DDC4200 Communication o UDP P o Ethernet Operating mode o Server o Client o Both UDP port OxBAC 0 Details on BACnet network number The BACnet network number is assigned by the plant administrator and is in the range 1 65535 The BACnet network number is used to logically differentiate between various BACnet networks As 6 different data link layers are supported the BACnet network number is used to differentiate for example a BACnet IP network from a network based on RS485 So called routing takes place between the various networks in order to transport information via various layers Device name Name of the BACnet server to be integrated in the DDC must be unique Device ID must be unique Operating mode The DDC4000 Central Unit is currently working as a server Managementstation BACnet Client Netzwerk 1 z B 10 BASE T Router Gateway SERGE Netzwerk 2 z B MS TP Hersteller spezifisches Protokoll Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 28 GLT z B Netzwerk 1 Server z B Netzwerk 2 Client und Server z B Netzwerk 37 Summary As e
241. e internal contact 1011 plant on is switched to 1 When the subsequent control is started and there is a return message via 5140 Q Release control the control is quitted with the internal contact I012 control on set to 1 These and other internal contacts switch as per the status of the control circuit and can be used for other PLC links Priorities Switch basic ventilation program to normal operation 1 Highest priority For releasing the control a binary source is entered in parameter 5140 Q Release control e g the return message from the ventilation protection If parameter 5140 Q release control is not set the basic program is constantly in normal operation 1012 Control ON 1 2 The multistate input 5138 Source remote ON with its potential modesAutomatic source remote on source remote off is used to switch the plant on and off This means remote control and or operating the plant independently on the usage time program set is possible If the source remote ON is not set or set to automatic mode the PID basic program depends on any remote control by a BMS or the assigned usage time program kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 86 3 A Z contact in the PID basic program enables the central building control plant to influence the status of ventilation control The multistate parameter Z Z contacts can take on the Automatic Z1 day Z4 off modes If the Z contact is not influenc
242. e of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 3 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 3 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 3 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 3 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 4 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 4 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 4 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 4 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean Version 05 06 4 3 138 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 139 4 3 2 9 14 S314 Set point glide Activation Sub function of Basic PID program canbeset 1x Can be switched on off via 5254 Q EA Gliding if not defined ON Function summary The function of the DDC sub software function set point glide is to allow the set point to glide with a command value Atthe same time a range in which the glide is permitted can be set Function description A guidance signal parameter 5250 command value SG the current set point 5101 XS current in the PID basic program is raised or lovvered Any analog value in the DDC4000 system e g outside temperature c
243. e of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 12 Bh1 set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs Pump 1 integer 13 BhAktiv set point 0 Oper hrs cnt activation boolean 14 BhGw1 set point 0 2147483647 168 h Oper hrs limit value pump 1 integer 15 PuUm actual value deleted Pump switching deletable boolean 16 DBE actual value deleted Dir oper level active deletable boolean 17 Hand set point 4 0 value text Hand switch AUTO multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 Pump1_ON 2 Pump2_ON 18 LzPBS set point 0 2147483647 0 min Pump blocking prot run time integer 19 PuNach set point 0 120 0 min Pump coasting integer 20 BhGw2 set point 0 2147483647 168 h Oper hrs limit value Pump 2 integer 21 ResBh1 actual value deleted Reset oper hrs pump 1 deletable boolean 22 ResSM actual value deleted Unlock Malfunction catch deletable boolean 23 BhGwU set point 1 2147483647 72 h Pump switch over limit value integer 24 Rep2 actual value deleted Repair switch pump 2 deletable boolean 25 ResBh2 actual value deleted Reset oper hrs Pump 2 deletable boolean 27 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 415 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 28 StzPBS set point 0 2147483647 0 m
244. e or IP configuration Other objects exist within the object structure Attachment functions also called function objects It is possible to attach functions to each parameter on the plant that change these parameters e g scaling or expand their function e g source BACnet object Therefore the attachment functions are found below or on the parameters Sub objects These objects are used to more precisely describe an object Akey example a PIN Each clamp in the plant is represented by a PIN This PIN can be stipulated by a sub object on an input or output digital or analog You also find sub objects within the SBM51 4 3 2 Software objects 4 3 2 1 What are software objects Software objects are summaries of control functions in a block with input and output values The DDC4000 Central Units software objects mainly match the menus of the DDC3000 system The functions are summarized in unchangeable and tested blocks Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 73 SWO Einstellungen f r Funktionen The basic programs were summarized by function All software functions that are directly related to the GP PID are found under object number S238 This includes for example the cascade or Y limit The parameters that are part of such functions are collected in folders and are therefore offered in the service level Parameters names and classification Parameters can be addressed in two
245. e reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If a malfunction occurs for malfunction locking 1 the fan is switched off completely A malfunction that occurs SM1 or SM2 or stCEC1 or stCEC2 may influence the control of the outputs Fan 1 ON level 1 and Fan ON level 2 as follows 1 not malfunction blocked 0 2 switches the outputs request cover fan on level 1 fan on level 2 and request control off immediately and completely malfunction blocked 1 If the malfunction switches off the outputs Fan ON level 1 and Fan ON level 2 this can only be reset by activating the release malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 332 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ti weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Sol a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM1 and SM2 Malfunction s occurring stCEC1 and stCEC2 StLock Malfunction blocked LOn1 and LOn2 Hardware control
246. e set point 0 boolean 16 sin actual value infinity infinity O sine float 17 rampe actual value infinity infinity 0 ramp float 18 Impuls actual value infinity infinity 0 pulse float 19 tcyc actual value 0 01 3600 1 s Cycle time float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 266 4 3 3 Hardware objects 4 3 3 1 What are hardware objects Hardware objects are summaries of control functions in a block with input and output factors The markers and timers are summarized to unchangeable and tested blocks HWO Einstellungen f r Funktionen Hardware objects are comprised of the specific function to controlling a machine and repeated functions The repeated functions include for example Operating hours counter with limiting value Command execution check CEC malfunction catch For this these functions must not be used Functions requested by the customer are however integrated in a HVVO The hardware objects are structured such that they are very similar in terms of options for influencing the setting signals priorities and function groups The hardware objects receive their input signals from the control from hardware inputs or the DDC control markers timer With the aid of the DDC market and time missing functions on these HWOs can be set For example fire protection covers can be collected in order for them to be l
247. e stamp and message text of the normal event are inserted in the message Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 486 The hardware components module sensor component are monitored using plant messages Each hardware component to be monitored has parameters that describe the operating status These parameters are controlled by a monitoring object for plant messages The object has a delay function so that changing the value of these parameters releases a plant message after a delay Message monitoring object The sub object CO ModulMessageOutput acts as a plant message monitoring object for all bus modules It is attached as a child object to the SY_Module object of the module to be monitored If the value of one of the malfunction parameters stated above is changed the attached child object CO_ModulMessageOutput is calculated and a message is generated if necessary after a delay Each group of plant messages requires specific solutions due to special requests and structures Module messages All bus modules have such parameters as Active malfunction ErrNo and DubAdr Each of these parameters is analyzed by the plant message monitoring If an ongoing Active 0 malfunction 1 ErrNo 0 or DubAdr 1 is detected after all three have previously had the inverted status a malfunction message is generated The normal message is then produces as appropriate Bus messages If all the modules connected
248. e subsequently switched by DDC software menus work All other Y outputs are controlled as per the current control parameter xw Ymin Ymax Energy comparison outside recirculating air TR gt XS and TO lt TR outside air share 100 TR gt XS and TO gt TR outside air share 0 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects TR lt XS and TO gt TR outside air share 100 TR lt XS and TO lt TR outside air share 0 with TR room temperature TO outside temperature Special Functions 4 3 110 If in addition DDC sub menu 15304 start up is active the start up switching must be processed first before Optimize heating works Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5341 b_Rt actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Room sensor opt heating up float 5342 Y outside air vent set point deletable 4 deleted value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4Y3 8 Y4 5343 Max time set point 10 600 30 min integer 5345 Fact Heat set point 0 120 1 min K integer 5346 Fact cool set point 0 120 1 min K integer 5348 EA actual value deletable deleted Source EA opt heating up boolean i026 Optimizing ventilation actual value 0 boolean Additional information A fixed switching difference of 1 K prevents the cover from being switched over continuously However this hysteresis only
249. e the pump In manual operation there is no automatic malfunction switch to bypass mode If a malfunction sets the output Pump FC ON to off or bypass operation is activated this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet P anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ii vveiterverarbeitetes Signal vveiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e BEE p Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter SM SMFu Release malfunction catch stCEC stCECFu SM Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked PuFu PuBy Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z off Fu on bypass on and Zs DOL Rep Manual off Fu on bypass on Zw off on and ZwSw Rep SM and SMFu Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest Manual open Zw open Rep PuFu 0 PuBy 0 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 408 Priority Param
250. eat volume counter from a list Parameter becomes visible if the medium heat is selected with Config Config WA Selection of a water counter from a list Parameter becomes visible if the medium water is selected with Config Compare description of gateway object H004 Function summary Jedes installierte Objekt ist f r genau ein Ger t am M Bus zust ndig Der Objekt Index der technischen Adresse ist mit der Busadresse am M Bus identisch ber den Parameter Config wird die Ger te Klasse des konkreten M Bus Z hlers ausgew hlt woraufhin ein zweiter Config Parameter ConfigYY installiert wird ber den der Ger te Typ ausgew hlt wird Aufgrund beider Auswahlen wird ein passendes Subobjekt installiert ConfigYY steht f r ConfigEL ConfigWA oder ConfigWM Siehe dort Die Subobjekte CD WM und CD_WA stehen f r die Generischen Parameter der Ger te Klasse das sind die Parameter die wirklich jeder W remz hler bzw jeder Wasserz hler bieten sollte Alle anderen Subobjekte haben mehr Parameter als nur die generischen Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Active aktiv actual value 0 Device active boolean Anfrage Counter inquiry set point 0 boolean Config Medium set point 5 0 value text Counting medium multistate 0 none 1 Electricity counter 2 Heat counter 3 Water counter 4 DDC3000 Menu ConfigEL Elt Typ set point 2 0 value text Elt Coun
251. ecting the planning system PS4000 provides all kinds of support A flexible database structure ensures that the new DDC4000 functions can be used immediately in the planning system Kleback neter Introduction The idea behind the DDC 4000 1 1 4 high computing power Through the use of modern processors new memory components and the use of the future oriented and apparently virus free Linux operating system very powerful DDC Central Units are created kieback neler Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1 2 5 1 2 Structure of the DDC 4000 system The DDC4000 system is designed hierarchically The DDC Central Units are as processing units connected with each other via the central bus The plant was designed for Ethernet operation with 10 100MBit If existing cable has to be used it is also possible to communicate via J Y St Y Superior but in the same bus system Ethernet are the BMS and PCs with visualization via Internet Explorer The bus modules and field bus controllers are located under the DDC Central Units Modules on two different bus systems are used to input and output information The control cabinet bus can accept and transfer data at very high speeds It is used to input a lot of information in the control cabinet and can be used for distances up to 200 meters Typical modules in the control cabinet bus are BMD4064 and SBM42 The field bus can transfer data at very high speeds It is used to colle
252. ects 4 3 234 The function of the fixed value regulator can be switched ON or OFF via a binary source in 5178 Source EA fixed value Priorities The Y signal is controlled with the following priority Priority Function Highest Manual influence Y1 analog BMS influence Y1 Yfix lowest Control Note The enforced control of the Y output via 5328 manual influence Y1 or 5329 analog BMS influence Y1 also works when the fixed value control has been switched OFF via 5178 source EA fixed value Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5100 XS set point infinity infinity 20 XS float 5102 QReg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source controlled variable float 5106 tN set point deletable 1 infinity 3 min tN float 5107 XS2 set point infinity infinity 17 XS 2 float 5108 Q XS XS2 actual value deletable deleted boolean 5110 Y actual value 0 100 0 YL1 float 5120 XPY1 set point 0 5 999 9 10 XPY1 float 5124 Sequence set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 16 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 235 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5129 Q Sequence inversion actual value deletable deleted boolean
253. ects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2211 Energie actual value infinity infinity 0 kWh energy float 2212 Betr std actual value 2147483648 2147483647 0 h Operation time integer 2222 StorZahl actual value 0 Malfunction message boolean 2251 Ser nr actual value Serial number text 2253 Volstrom actual value infinity infinity 0 m h Volume current float 2254 Leistung actual value infinity infinity 0 RVV Power float 2255 Vorl actual value infinity infinity 0 C Feed temp float 2256 Ruck actual value infinity infinity 0 C Return flow temp float 2258 Volumen actual value infinity infinity 0 m volumes float 4 3 8 4 SBMs 4 3 8 4 1 SBM51 4 3 8 4 1 1 SY_SBM51 SBM51 control unit Function summary Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Cycle Cycle set point 0 Readout cycle boolean Enable Enable set point 0 Bus release boolean Version 05 06 4 3 469 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 470 4 3 8 4 1 2 H004 SBM51 04 Function summary Jedes installierte Objekt ist f r genau ein Ger t am M Bus zust ndig Der Objekt Index der technischen Adresse ist mit der Busadresse am M Bus identisch ber den Parameter Config wird die Ger te Klasse des konkreten M Bus Z hlers ausgew hlt woraufhin ein zweiter Config Parameter ConfigYY installiert
254. ecution check Ifa Pump operating message is switched up the operating message status is checked for a switching command after the time tCEC In cases of malfunction the Status command execution check parameter is set The malfunction is caught by itself Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Target operational status Pump operating message Target operational status Pump ON Output Status command execution check Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 399 Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal Pu aus dem Objekt Uberwachungszeit an die Hardware Pu Bsz Pia Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit a von der Hardware VzBAKy BAK Status BAK 7 stBAK stBAK Reset ResSM ResBAK X tBAK gt VzBAK Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the Pump ON output a not malfunction blocked 0 b the output Pump ON switches to closed malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Pump ON to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction
255. ed 201 intMS set point 0 Goal Msp intern boolean 4 4 2 1 5 Selection message set FSelMO Function summary for each 99x can be set to any scalable parameters This object activates the message monitoring of a scalar parameter The object described below SY_MsgMan 07 is used as a message memory If the monitored parameter is a BoolPar 0 or 1 can be defined as a ok If an integer or float is monitored the limiting value and switch back difference is stated for releasing a normal message Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit MSet Selection MSet set point deletable text Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 477 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit berw Monitoring open set point multistate value text 0 no monitoring 1 Switch to 0 2 Switch to 1 3 Exceeding 4 Falling below 5 Equality 6 Exceed or below 7 Invalid E A On Off set point deletable boolean deleted oGw Upper limit value set point float infinity infinity 95 Xdz Switchback diff set point float infinity Txt_K Text coming set point multistate 17 value text 0 Controller damaged 1 Winter 2 Manual 3 active 4 abnormal 5 Maintenance 6 Malfunction 7 Alarm 8 Danger 9 Initial 10 Optimization 11 ON 12 CLOSE
256. ed or the Automatic state set the PID basic program depends on the assigned usage time program 4 Lowest priority Parameter Q_N assigns the weekly usage time and or special holiday bank holiday or special usage times to a schedule object S118 If no time program is assigned to the PID basic program the plant is always ON 1011 plant ON 1 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5100 XS set point 9999 9 9999 9 20 C XS float 5101 Xs akt actual value 9999 9 9999 9 10 C XS current float 5102 Qreg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Source controlled variable float 5103 TA actual value deletable 999 999 deleted C Source TA float 5105 xw actual value 9999 9 9999 9 10 K XW float 5106 tN set point deletable 1 99 3 min tN integer 5110 Y1 actual value 0 100 0 YL1 float 5111 Y2 actual value 0 100 0 YL2 float 5112 Y3 actual value 0 100 0 YL3 float 5113 Y4 actual value 0 100 0 YL4 float 5115 Q_N actual value deletable deleted State N text 5120 XPY1 set point 0 5 9999 9 10 K XPY1 float 5121 XPY2 set point 0 5 9999 9 10 K XPY2 float 5122 XPY3 set point 0 5 9999 9 10 K XPY3 float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 87 No
257. egelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich sional E man U MI Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked AnfPK Hardware control signal reg BrOn Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and SwZw SM Parameter Value Impact Highest priority SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 377 Parameter Value Impact Rep Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner on 0 Zw Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 if nec Burner on Y SwZw Manual Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 if nec Burner on Y Manual DOL Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner on 0 Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 If nec Burner on Y Z Chimney sweep function Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 Burner on 1 Y 100 Auto Automatic operation request pump cover AnfAuto Lowest priority Status com
258. egende St rung anliegende St rung Ii vveiterverarbeitetes Signal vveiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e gt Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked LOn Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z on off DOL manual on off Zw on off SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep AnfKI 0 LOn 0 reg 0 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 325 Priority Parameter Value Impact Manual open Zw open AnfkKl 1 Z closed DOL AnfKI 0 LOn 0 reg 0 Z On Anfkl 1 lowest Auto Automatic operation request valve AnfAuto Status command execution check operation Version 05 06 malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 326 4 3 3 19 H602 Fan 2 stage Function summary The fan 2 stage function block controls a two stage fan or motor and supports cover control during
259. egrated into the calculations The following can be used as mathematic operators Basic types of calculation with sample Addition atb subtraction a b multiplication a b division a b A Power ab mathematical functions sqrt square root sart a log Logarithm on the basis of e natural logarithm In a log10 Logarithm on the basis of 10 decimal logarithm log a exp Exponent on the basis of e exp c sin sine sin 3 141 1 asin arcsine asin 1 2 sinh Hyberbolic sine sinh a cos Cosine cos 3 141 1 acos Arc cosine acos 0 2 cosh Hyberbolic cosine cosh b tan tangent tan 3 141 2 1 atan Arc tangent atan 1 2 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 80 tanh Hyberbolic tangent tanh c abs absolute number abs 3 1 Use with radian 2 Result in radian Logical Boolean expressions same l not equal amp and or lt smaller lt smaller than or equal gt greater gt greater than or equal Exponentials of a figure based on 10 are implemented with the aid of e or E e g 1E2 or 1e2 provides the value 100 The expression exp is used to calculate the exponents based on e The calculation of bracketed expressions is possible The following settings must be in
260. ein Q Eausw 1 Q Eausw 2 Q Eausw 1 gt Eausw Differenz Eausw 2 Q Eausw 1 lt Xsd Eausw Differenz Energieauswahl Schaltfunktionan Schaltfunktionen Keine werden zur ck werden durchgef hrt durchgef hrt Schaltkankalonen Entsprechend Inv Eauswahl werden die Y Ausg nge Y1 Y4 des Grundprogramms in ihrer Sequenz umgedreht Y Ausg nge Y1 Y4 des Grundprogramms Umkehr wird aufgehoben 1023 Energiewahl 1 1023 Energiewahl 0 Funktion deaktiviert Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 127 Summary Activate switching 1023 1 Source ESelection 2 Source ESelection 1 gt ESelect Difference No switching switch back 1023 0 Source ESelection 2 Source ESelection 1 gt ESelect Difference Xsd energy selection Using the binary source in the Q_EA Energy selection parameter the object s function can be switched on off If no binary source is set the function can always operate 1 1123 Energie Auswahl i DN la EE I o ad Erergigausvahl EAusw Differenz _ EAuswahl 1 Q EAuswahl 2 a eg Zeil Priorities Ifthe Y outputs in the PID basic program are analyzed in other DDC software objects e g S322 sequence menu the inverting also works on the following DDC software objects If atthe same time the DDC sub menu S311 Sequence converter is installed and active the function of the DDC sub menu S311 Sequence converter has a higher priority
261. eizung 001 68 000 P L Bas ant BSE Nen ED 2 389 614 0 6 X 4 9220 AE LA 8 el Schlosshotel Frieckichstuhe Arial 8t FKU A Lo E ee 001 DDC4000 Anschluss 68 000 DDC4000 DDC4000 El Le DI Foyer gt 02 statische Heizung f f 03 Fu bodenheizung s H 01 Regelung H 02 Prim ipumpe M e 31 01 AUTOFEINA BU 1 02 Betrieb St rung FH 5233 01 GP HEZUN EU L03 Koppelrelais Aute FT H801 01 Pumpe Einst M 01 STW EI M 01 St rung P 02 Vorreg FBH pin P 03 Vorreg FBH prin P 01 Voreg FBH prin H 03 Sekundsipumpe DCRCR RR a ER TEST NITS ITE Fu bodenheizung Regelung GP HEIZUNG Pumpe 68 000103 01 5239 01 001 Hang Ein Hand Aus Hand Ein 4 Fu bodenheizung Regelung STW STW SECOND MAMMA RC se TE Us Ui BE EE Jr E 4 AER A FBH Primarpumpe 14 j x FALSE 0 Auto 9 TRUE 1 Aus 0 e n Bewertung homa o O O Bsp bin r 0 entspricht Auto 9 a atengedenstelingseeen Bin r 1 entspricht Ein DOGI000 Eigenechaten_ ees S Page TT Conclusion When using binary switching of Zw always observe the value conversion If the forced control should not act one of the binary statuses should retain the value Auto 4 4 7 Network return Network return in the DDC4000 system A timer 92 is located in the DDC Central Unit It is found in plant 0 Group 0 This timer is set automatically and starts up whe
262. elay BAK integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 295 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 31 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 32 BhAktiv set point 0 Active opr hours boolean 33 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Total opr hours integer 34 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 35 GVV3Ein set point 0 100 90 GVV3ON integer 36 GVV3Aus set point 0 100 70 GVV3OFF integer 37 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Generating the operating release forced or manual operation must provide a normal message A Level 1 release is recognized by the Ytarget being above a limiting value GVV1On Basis 30 It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value GW1Off Basis 10 For the release of level 2 the GW2On Basis 60 and GW2Off Basis 40 limiting values apply For the release of level 3 the GVV3On Basis 90 and GW3Off Basis 70 limiting values apply In addition for a request the air flow monitoring even in Z The outputs Heater level 1 on and Heater Level 2 on and Heater level 3 on are not locked against each other operation In Z forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked Operating hours limiting value The safety temperature limiter
263. eletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 Ysoll set point 0 100 0 Yset float 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Servo back fan float 5 Yist actual value 0 100 10 Setting no float 6 Y actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Setp valve float 7 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE Status boolean 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence float 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Enter malf msg boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Valve malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 StLock boolean 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 392 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 19 Zw actual value deletable deleted Forced control boolean 20 SwZw set point 0 100 100 Setpoint forced control integer 21 reg actual value 0 Release Reg VVS boolean 22 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Parameter AnfAuto was added in which for example the release control for a PID control can be set The corresponding output regVVS therefore produces a release for the VVS control If a malfunction occurs this release is set to zero Position display
264. ements section Command execution check The function block contains command execution checks for both levels refer to command execution check chapter for description and parameters for the Actual operational statuses operating message fan level 1 or 2 Target operational statuses fan ON level 1 or 2 Outputs Status command execution check level 1 or 2 If the actual operating statuses are not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC level 1 or 2 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 331 Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt an die Hardvvare Bez Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK N K HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter LOn1 or LOn2 Control signal from the object Bsz BM1 or BM2 Acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC1 or tCEC2 Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC1 or VzCEC2 Alarm delay time VZCEC LOn1 or LOn2 Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC1 or stCEC2 CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can b
265. ence creation 20 xdz and the remaining 40 on the second target sequence VS Via FAR Ge KE Gaar Far VSERd VS Bec Seq 3 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 206 D 20 40 so 100 N Zequ Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5520 Q Sequ actual value deletable 2147483648 2147483647 deleted integer 5521 YS1 Beg set point 0 100 0 integer 5522 YS1 End set point 0 100 50 integer 5524 YS1 Min set point 0 100 0 integer 5526 YS1 Max set point 0 100 100 integer 5527 YS2 Beg set point 0 100 50 integer 5528 YS2 End set point 0 100 100 integer 5530 YS2 Min set point 0 100 0 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 207 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5532 YS2 Max set point 0 100 100 integer 5535 Not reg sequ set point 0 selection list selection list No text 0 Y1 1 Y2 5536 Q EA Not reg Sequ actual value deletable deleted boolean 5537 YS1 actual value 0 100 0 integer 5538 YS2 set point 0 100 0 integer 7855 Hand Y1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted integer 7856 Hand Y2 set point deletable 0 100 deleted integer 7857 BMS vi set point deletable 0 100 deleted integer 7858 BMS Y2 actual value deletable 0 10
266. enu Y limit can be installed and set repeatedly for a DDC control circuit If several Y limitation DDC sub menus work on the same Y output the min and max limits calculated for each DDC software object are added For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs For the basic heating program the Y limit always works on the heating control for a Y output Parameter 5312 YB limiting value sets the value from which the Y limit should act on the Y output setting range Parameter 5313 YB limitation stipulates whether a MAX limitation i e exceeding the limiting value image 3 image 4 or a MIN limitation i e going below the limiting value image 1 image 2 should affect the setting range of the Y output Version 05 06 kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 91 Parameter 5314 YB Inverting stipulates the direction of the influence direction of curve 5314 YB Inverting NO gt image 1 image 3 5314 YB Inverting YES gt image 2 image 4 Parameter 5315 XP Y limitation is the proportional range within which the Y min or Y max for the Y outputs can be moved depending on the limitation factor 5315 XP Y limitation 10 means for 10 units change in the limitation factor Y min or Y max on the Y output is moved by 100 5315 XP Y limitation 100 means only for 100 units change in the limitation factor is Y min or Y max on the Y output moved by 100 Re 2 Depending on a
267. equence various sequences can be set for the individual Y outputs The output of the Y output values occurs via source parameterizing in the basic programs of the DDC Central Units DDC4000 and the DDC modules DDC bus module BMA field bus module FBM control cabinet bus module SBM The parameters 5130 5132 Xdz can stipulate idle zones between the individual Y output sequences The situation of the relevant set point can be seen from the figure Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 85 These idle zones also work when the control circuit has an integral share parameter 5106 tN i e the I share is switched off on the edge of XpY If the actual value in the Xp range of the next sequence occurs the I share is stocked up again This results in the idle zone range not being run through as a result of the effect of the I share and a real energy saving effect is achieved In parameter 5128 xwh an insensitivity zone is set i e within xw xwh the Y outputs are not changed Ifxw exceeds this range the control is normal Example Sollwerttemperaturen und Standardsequenzen Set point point for 4 or 3 sequences Heizung K hlung oder Heizung K hlung Xs xdz23 Using the central influence remote control and usage time program the internal contact 1011 plant on is controlled in the basic ventilation program If the fan is to be started as a result of the conditions stated above first th
268. er Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 509 Reset Die DDC Zentrale wird unkontrolliert herunter gefahren Achtung Daten k nnen verloren gehen
269. er gt 97 an open final position is assumed otherwise running If the plant in addition to position feedback signal cover is also wired for final position open or final position open these inputs have higher priority If only one of the final position open or final position closed is switched but not position feedback signal cover the final position that is not switched is determined via the motor operating time If e g only final position closed is switched after an open control the Setting output is first set to running and after the end of the Motor operating time set to open If both final position open and final position closed are not switched the final position replication occurs in the same way for both final positions but a command execution check is not however effective Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters for the actual operating status Setting that is formed as described above The target operating status is control cover the output is Status command execution check Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 307 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Anste
270. er Er zeigt die Anzahl gesendeter Frames an 4 3 5 7 SY_Host In SY_Host all possible 99 DDC Central Units are saved with their related IP addresses Only when a DDC Central Unit is saved here can it be reached via a remote control and through superordinate parameterizing For the entries to become valid the Ethernet should be switched off and on again after a change as of Version 1 10 19 zentrale 01 172 22 201 29 zentrale DZ zentrale 03 Zentrale 04 Zentrale 05 zentrale Up zentrale OF zentrale 05 1 A A J Bi T D Version 05 06 Kleback neter 4 3 441 Software structure 4 3 5 8 SY_FAX Objects The fax system object is used to stipulate the fax numbers that are to be dialed via a message EIS FAX 1 a J T J 1 d 4 FAs Nummer 1 FAxs Mummer FA amp Nurimer 3 Fas Mummer 4 FA amp Nurmer 5 FA s MNummer 6 Teiln Mame 1 Teiln Name 2 OS0600395165 Fr Dunkel The corresponding fax number is used via the output definition SY_MsgOut relating to the message Ausgahedefinitionen 4 Auswahl Email J Auswahl SMS h Auswahl FAX 7 Auswahl Drucker D Ersatz Miel g Weiterleitung BACnet Objld 230 00 00 00 5 _MsgOut D1 D 1 D keine Weiterleite 321 For this please observe a special binary coding Refer to SY_MsgOut Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 442 4 3 5 9 S
271. er 5704 Bh counting is set to 1 If the time interval is exceeded again parameter 5704 Bh counting is reset to O Each time the time interval is exceeded another change takes place This makes it possible for example to switch time dependent pumps ttt y 100 200 300 400 h 500 aeit Bz Ist z B 150h Intervall Bal 1 Eh Z hlung U The operating hour counter can be reset to 0 with the binary source parameter 5703 Q Reset BZ Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5700 t set point 0 99999 0 h Time BZ is integer 5701 Interval BZ 1 set point 0 9999 9999 h integer 5702 Q actual value deletable deleted Q input BZ boolean 5703 Q_R actual value deletable deleted Q Reset BZ boolean 5704 Bh counter actual value 0 boolean 5705 Minutes set point 0 59 0 min integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 221 4 3 2 19 S329 Heat volume P Function summary The function of software object heat volume P is to measure the heat capacity provided as an analog signal and to count the calculated heat volume The heat capacity is recorded with the analog source parameter Q heat capacity and can be scaled using the scaling and scaling exp parameters With scaling via parameter 5715 Scaling C and 5716 Scaling C Exp the heat capacity is set to 100 10 V The scaled heat capacity is shown in 5711 heat cap
272. erarchie Verwendet Anz Stellen Start LV Pos I Tel R i F CEU GSS CA EUR El fi F ener nl 1 Anlage El Orte DDC Anlagen TAB 3000 TAB 4000 7 x DDC3000 Eigenschaften DDC4000 Eigenschaften __DDC4000 Objektsuche Jagoschinski A Stant G B Ci Jagoschinsti di St nderrack PS 40 Dg sa URAAN gaoa SY 09 36 Now the data backup can be assigned a name and saved Then an automatic query appears as to whether the projection file should be transmitted If you confirm this dialog box with yes the transmission of the file to the DDC4000 starts Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 504 Ch St nderrack PS 4000 a l8 sl Projekt Funktion Datenaustausch Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe 18 xi ps ooo Projekt Einstellungen St nderrack 001 DDC4200 Projekt Name St ndersck EG 0017017000 DDC4000 DDC4000 H 01 Heizungsanlage Auftragsnummer m 0 05 00002 Sa H 02 L ftungsanlage Speichern unter _2 x Speichem in E PML x ek Fe Zuletzt verwendete D Desktop rs Eigene Dateien er Arbeitsplatz St nderrack Orte J DDC J Anlagen TAB 3000 TAB D Ki ISO Dateiname St nderack v Speichem Dateityp mL files Cam v Abbrechen DDC3000 Eigenschaften DDC3000 Parametersuche DDC4000 Eigenschaften DDC4000 Objektsuche
273. erden kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Basic functions 4 2 63 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 64 4 2 3 Behind the front cover Short description of the elements behind the DDC4200 front cover Zugriffe auf Compact Flash Karten solange diese LED blinkt wird z B eine Datensicherung oder ein Update durchgef hrt VVarmstart a Stift bet tigen Kaltstart 1 Taster im Loch bet tigen 2 kurz danach gleichzeitig Warmstart Taster bet tigen 3 Taster im Loch loslassen 4 Warmstart Taster nach 3 Sek loslassen Achtung Daten k nnen verloren gehen Als Best tigung ist ein langer Ton wa kieback peter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 65 Reset Die DDC Zentrale wird unkontrolliert herunter gefahren Achtung Daten k nnen verloren gehen Stand August 2004 Bootloader l uft LEDs blinken Danach sind sie unkontrolliert an oder aus Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure 4 2 4 Units Basic functions 4 2 66 Summary of usable units in the DDC No unit description 0 m Quadratmeter m2 1 ft square feet ft2 2 mA Milliampere mA 3 A Ampere A 4 Ohm 5 V Volt V 6 kV Kilovolt kV 7 MV Megavolt MV 8 VA Volt Ampere VA 9 kVA Kilovolt Ampere kVA 10
274. et point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 SMS Provider 2 set point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 SMS Provider 3 set point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 10 SMS Provider 4 set point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 13 SMS Provider 5 set point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 16 SMS Provider 6 set point multistate value text 1 D1 2 D2 3 Eplus 4 A1 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 483 4 4 2 1 12 Email Email in the DDC4000 takes place like this The DDC4000 has an email server that can send but not receive emails The email client communicates with an email server in the BMS that can forward the email as appropriate In place of the BMS it is also possible to state a different email server It is not possible to dial in by modem to an Internet provider to send an email 4 4 2 1 12 1 Email recipient SY_Email Function summary 1s settable This object administrates 6 different email connections The email addresses and the related participant names are saved as string parameters There is no default entry Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 EmailAdr 1 set point deletable deleted text 2 Name 1 set point deletable deleted
275. eter Value Impact SM SMFu Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual Fu On Z FC On Zw On PuFu 1 PuBy 0 Zw On if no malfunction FC SMFu PuFu 1 PuBy 0 otherwise PuFu 0 PuBy 1 ZwSw vs Zs if Zw On and Z FC On are active ZwSw is used as Y Manual Bypass on PuFu 0 PuBy 1 DOL Z closed PuFu 0 PuBy 0 Z Bypass on PuFu 0 PuBy 1 lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Manual influence In this object 32 force control ZW and 34 set point force control ZwSw must be used for the manual influence Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 409 4 3 3 34 H904 Pump BUS Function summary The pump bus function block controls a rev controlled bus pump with a set point Ptarget The function block supports Minimum pump operation Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Pump blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deleted Begin Automatic operation deletable boolean 2 Psoll set point 0 100 0 Pump setpoint integer 3 Pu actual value
276. etnew TStarget TStarget correction If the DDC software object room correction or optimize are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the XS remote control This for example influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction Room correction TStargetcorrection Room temp XS remote control ER Optimization NO TStarget correction Basic PID program In this basic program the set point remote control works on the current set point XS current kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 192 XS current XS remote control End remote start remote actuating variable 100 start remote Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5260 Set size actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float 5261 Anf set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 Begin remote integer 5262 End set point 2147483648 2147483647 50 End remote integer 5263 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA setpoint remote boolean 5265 XS Remote setting actual value infinity infinity 0 float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 193 4 3 2 10 9 S317 XP svvitching Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5306 Q XP switching if not defined ON Function summary D
277. f the position feedback signal valve is not switched on the idle zone only works on control signal changes if the control signal Ytarget changes by a higher amount than the idle zone set If position feedback signal valve is switched the idle zone works on the difference between the control signal and the position feedback signal Yr l e if the difference reaches a higher amount than the idle zone set signal changes are issued Valve blocking protection The function block includes the valve block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LzVBS operating time this function does not work The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time At this time the vbs output is set to 1 Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0 malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung
278. fan heater levels Operation message heater level 1 2 or 2 target operating status Heater level 1 on Heater level 2 on or Heater level 3 on outputs Status command execution check 1 Status command execution check 2 or Status command execution check 3 If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC1 stCEC2 stCEC3 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 297 Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt 4 an die Hardware Uberwachungszeit Bsz Bst S r ZO it Riickmeldung Alarmverzogerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3 Control signal from the object Bsz BM1 or BM2 or BM3 acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3 Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC1 or stCEC2 or stCEC3 CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that oc
279. finiert werden Schaltergruppen bestehen aus mindestens 2 aufeinanderfolgenden Schaltern Die Schaltergruppen werden der Reihe nach durchnummeriert Nach Anwahl des entsprechenden Parameters lassen sich die Tasten in ihrer Funktion festlegen Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max _ init unit 1 Type set point 18 0 value text Type multistate 0 Push button switch 1 Switch 2 Group_1 3 Group_2 4 Group_3 5 Group_4 6 Group_5 7 Group_6 8 Group_7 9 Group_8 10 Group_9 11 Group_10 12 Group_11 13 Group_12 14 Group_13 15 Group_14 16 Group_15 17 Group_16 2 s set point deletable deleted Switch Status boolean 4 3 4 5 BO S_11 Switch single stage ON OFF Function summary Ein einstufiger Schalter mit dem Text EIN AUS Eltako Funktion rastender Taster Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 427 s 01 h Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 2 0 value text Switch Status multistate 0 MANUAL OFF 1 MANUAL ON s 01 s 01 set point 0 ON OFF boolean 4 3 4 6 BO S_12 Confirmation switch Function summary A sensor with confirmation function Resets to O after 1 second Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 2 0 value text Switch Status
280. from those described in the Repeating function elements section Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 289 Betriebsmeldung Anteuersignal BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I S Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter Erh1 or Erh2 Control signal BM1 or BM2 Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status for both fan heater levels Operation message heater level 1 or 2 target operational status Heater level 1 on or Heater level 2 on outputs Status command execution check 1 or Status command execution check 2 If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC1 stCEC2 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 290 Note The parameter names of t
281. fter the self test In order to specify malfunctions during the self test final position closed must be connected Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters for the actual operating status that is formed from final position open and final position closed that is formed as described above The target operating status is control cover the output is Status command execution check In order for the command execution check to be operational final position closed must be connected final position open is optional Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Ansteuersignal S gt an die Hardware Uberwachungszeit Bsz BAR Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardvvare BAR Status BAR stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Y Control signal from the object Bsz OPEN CLOSED Acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 312 malfunction catch If
282. ftware structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 3 Ziel3 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 3 Wer set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 3 Q3 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 4 Ziel4 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 4 Wert4 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 4 Q4 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean Version 05 06 4 3 99 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 100 4 3 2 9 3 S303 Cascade Activation Sub function of Basic PID program can be set 1x Can be switched on off via 5210 Source EA cascade if not defined ON When switching between ON OFF and OFF ON a gliding transfer takes place in the control unit Function description Inthe DDC sub menu S303 Cascade the exhaust air temperature sensor is set in parameter 5200 Cascade sensor The supply air temperature is in parameter 5102 Source control variable from the PID basic program Example Main control variable exhaust air in DDC cascade sub menu Auxiliary control variable supply air in the basic program Ifthe exhaust air temperature main control variable varies from the current set point 5101 XSactual the supply air temperature aux
283. function disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 291 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ti weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Som a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked Erh1 and Erh2 Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs Z Off Level 1 Level 2 DOL Manual Off Level 1 Level 2 Zw Off Level 1 Level 2 SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Heater level 1 on Heater level2 on O Manual Level 2 Zw Level 2 Heater level 1 on 1 Heater level 2 on 1 depending on LS and STB Manual Level 1 Zw Level 1 Heater level 1 on depending on LS and STB Z closed DOL Heater level 1 on 0 Heater level 2 on 0 Z Level 2 Heater level 1 on Heater level 2 on 1 depending on LSU and STB Z Level 1 Heater level 1 on
284. g Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z off Fu on bypass on and Zs DOL Rep Manual off Fu on bypass on Zw offlon and ZwSw Rep SM and SMFu Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest Manual open Zw open Rep LuFu 0 LuBy 0 SM SMFu Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual Fu On Z FC On Zw On LuFu 1 LuBy 0 Zw On if no malfunction FC SMFu LuFu 1 LuBy 0 otherwise LuFu 0 LuBy 1 ZwSw vs Zs if Zw On and Z FC On are active ZwSw is used as Y Manual Bypass on LuFu 0 LuBy 1 DOL Z closed LuFu 0 LuBy 0 Z Bypass on LuFu 0 LuBy 1 lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 341 4 3 3 22 H611 Valve open closed Function summary The valve open closed function block controls a valve that can be opened or closed and considers a valve run time The function block supports Final position replication Command execution check Valve blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parame
285. g Hardware Ansteuerung 4 3 361 beschaltet man I TI HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked AnfPK Hardware control signal reg BrOn Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z on off DOL manual on off Zw on off SM Parameter Value Impact Highest priority SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner on Manual open Zw open Request pump cover 1 Request regulation if nec Burner on Z closed DOL Request pump cover Request regulation 0 Burner on 0 Z On chimney sweeping function Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 if nec Burner on Version 05 06 kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 362 Parameter Value Impact Auto Automatic operation request pump cover AnfAuto Lowest priority Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Brenner ansteuerung AnfAuto AntPK HWO Pumpe SWO Heizung AnfBrEin SF 7 BrEin er ae Version 05 06
286. g on LSU and STB DOL Y 0 Anf 0 Z Y Z Anf 1 depending on LS and STB lowest Auto Y Ytarget depending on Ytarget LSU and STB Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 304 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 14 H501 Cover open closed Function summary 4 3 305 The cover open closed function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a cover run time The function block supports Final position replication Command execution check Trouble shooting Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control The RPG function block is basically identical to Valve open closed the blocking protection is not required and some parameter names in the DDC4000 object are different Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 3 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 4 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Manual Auto 1 Manual OPEN 0 Manual SHUT 5 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Entr Malfunct
287. ge Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message Here a link creates a function Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 BM actual value deletable deleted Re msg Pu boolean 3 pbs actual value 0 Status blocking prot boolean 5 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 7 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 8 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock Fault boolean 9 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 395 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 10 Rep actual value deletable deleted Rep switch boolean 11 SM actual value deletable deleted Pump malfunction boolean 12 PuNach set point 0 120 0 min Pump coasting integer 13 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 14 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 15 DBE set point deletable deleted Dir oper level boolean 16 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Total opr hours integer 17 BhAktiv set point 0 BHActive Y N boolean 18 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset Operat
288. ger 11 Tot set point 0 50 0 Signal change deadzone integer 12 tMotAuf set point 1 2147483647 120 Ss Motor runtime OPEN integer 13 tMotZu set point 1 2147483647 120 s Motor runtime CLOSED integer 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock malfunction catch boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Valve malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z Influence integer 19 Zw set point deletable deleted Forced control boolean 20 ZwSw set point 0 100 100 Setpoint forced control integer 21 StzVBS set point 0 1440 720 min Start time blocking prot integer 22 LzVBS set point 0 2147483647 5 min Run time blocking prot integer 23 YVBS set point 0 100 100 Setp valve blocking prot integer 24 vbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 25 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Position display There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal valve input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position valve is used This may come from Target valve position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 351 Idle zone I
289. ger 6792 Priority 12 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6793 Priority 13 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6794 Priority 14 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6795 Priority 15 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6796 Priority 16 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6797 Priority 17 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6798 Priority 18 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6799 Priority 19 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6800 Priority 20 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6801 Source Manual 1 actual value deletable deleted reference 6802 Source Manual 2 actual value deletable deleted reference Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 248 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6803 Source Manual 3 actual value deletable deleted reference 6804 Source Manual 4 actual value deletable deleted reference 6805 Source Manual 5 actual value deletable deleted reference 6806 Source Manual 6 actual value deletable deleted reference 6807 Source Manual 7 actual value deletable deleted reference 6808 Source Manual 8 actual value deletable deleted reference 6809 Source Manual 9 actual value deletable deleted reference 6810 Source Manual 10 actual value deletable deleted reference 6811 Source Manual 11
290. gnized by the Ytarget as being above a limiting value GVVOn Basis 60 It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value GWOff Basis 20 In addition for a request the air flow monitoring even in Z The safety temperature limiter also ends the request chain in non automatic Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 283 In Z forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the single stage electrical fan heater can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the heater operating message is not switched the output Heater Level 1 on is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Anteuersignal Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 Run Betriebsstundenz hler Betriebs stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich _Grenzwert berschritten Set auf Wert Grenzwert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter Erh1 Control signal BM Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operat
291. h resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the Pump ON output a not malfunction blocked 0 b the output Pump ON switches to closed malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Pump ON to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z on off and Zs DOL manual on off Zw on off and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Zw Off Manual Off Pu 0 Manual open Zw open Pu 1 Zlclosed DOL Pu 0 Z On Pu 1 AnfMin if AnfAuto 1 and AnfMin 1 then Min operation lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version
292. h ft Kilowatt hours per square foot 139 MJ m Megajoule pro Quadratmeter 140 MJ ft Megajoules per square foot 141 W m K Watts per square meter degree Kelvin 142 ft s Cubic feet per second 143 obs ft Unit percent obstruction per foot 144 obs m Percent obstruction per meter 145 mQ Milli Ohm 146 MWh Megawatt Stunden 147 kBTU Kilo BTUs 148 MBTU Mega BTUs 149 kJ kg dry air Kilojoule pro Kilogram trockener Luft 150 MJ kg dry air Megajoule pro Kilogram trockener Luft 151 kJ K Kilojoule pro Kelvin 152 MJ K Megajoule pro Kelvin 153 N Newton 154 g s Gramm pro Sekunde 155 g min Gram pro Minute 156 t h Tonnen pro Stunde 157 KBTUs h Kilo BTUs per hour 158 1 100s Hundertstel einer Sekunde 159 ms Milisekunden 160 Nm Newton Meter Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 71 No unit description 161 mm s Milimeter pro Sekunde 162 mm min Milimeter pro Sekunde 163 m min Meter pro Minute 164 m h Meter pro Stunde 165 m min Kubikmeter pro Minute 166 m s Meter pro Sekunde zum Quadrat 167 A m Amperes per meter 168 A m Ampere pro Quadratmeter 169 Am Ampere Quadratmeter 170 F Farad 171 H Henry 172 Om Ohm Meter 173 S Siemens 174 S m Siemens pro Meter 175 T Tesla 176 VIK Volt pro Kelvin 177 Vim Volt pro
293. handling in greater detail The unit column lists a small table that shows the potential statuses Here the first column BACnet title states the numbering of the statuses as used in BACnet The BACnet standard prescribes the numbering of the available statuses from 1 consecutively to n number of statuses This does not match the approach at Kieback amp Peter The Kieback amp Peter numbering is found in the second column title DDC no For Kieback amp Peter numbering the same numbers always have the same meaning which can mean that the number 0 1 and 9 for OFF ON AUTO are used The importance is to be read in the third column status text The table is sorted by the Kieback amp Peter numbering The Init column states the preset status This is BACnet numbering The Max column indicates the highest BACnet index Selection list A selection list enables you to choose from several statuses for a parameter Example Par No Parameter name Description Parameter type Min Max Init Unit 5127 Uncontrolled condition Set point 0 Selection list pull list BitPos Text 0 YL1 1 YL2 2 YL3 3 YL4 For this the parameter is viewed in its binary depiction form A bit bit position is used for each status In this example this means when YL2 and YL are to be selected binary 0110 decimal 6 If YL1 YL2 and YL3 are to be selected this looks as follows binary 0111
294. he image button is for version 1 0 x and 1 1 x without function It is planned to display plant images to make the plant easier explainable for the customer Status information can be displayed in the quick start bar This makes it visible whether a plant is on off or in manual Anlagen w hlen f r weitere Informationen Heizung mode Plant malfunctions are also visible Luftung K lte RLT Kuche ER BackOffice 1 EG Anmelden Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Plant components and bus systems 3 11 3 Plant components and bus systems 3 Plant components and bus SYSTEMS _ uunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 11 3 2 Central unit bus Ethernet une ne 12 3 2 1 DDC Central Units uuuesssssnsnsnensnnneneeennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsennennnnennnnn 12 8 211 EE Gegend Massdiaccaneccenhdaanncedeeetsectdeacaduecehe sncsudadasud iaabdansudadsabudssasdsaveluddvrnescontedcaadecaaattiuase 12 DE NT NC OMS ene 12 3 2 1 1 2 Technical data 12 3 2 1 1 3 LV help 0 0 eee 14 82 25 QUE PANG MH 16 3 22 k DD 7 1 9 0 T WEEN 16 3 2 2 1 1 Connection OCCUPANCY eege dee gedet 16 D El lee E EEN 16 3 2 3 Central communication Ethernet cccccccccccccceececceceseseseceeeeeeceseecaeeeueeceeeeeeeessesaesuseasseeeeeeeees 16 9 20 l General EE 16 3 2 9 2 EC E 17 Ke Eent CET 17 3 2 3 2 2 Other DDC Central Units in the network
295. he names of these are marked with the supplement source or Q This should make locating them easier Summary Integer Floating comma digit Binary value Boolean Multistate Selection list String Reference Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 57 Integer The integer type has a maximum range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 As this size can not be achieved in practice the value infinity is given in the table if this value range is not restricted A typical example of the integer type is operating hours These are only recorded in full hours Example Par No Parameter name Description Parameter Min Max Init Unit type 9 Bh Operating hours counter level 1 and or Set point 0 infinity 0 h Operating hours level 2 Integer Explanation of statements Par No 9 Parameter number This number is used to address the parameter within the object This number is not unique in the whole system Parameter name Bh Bh ges Parameter name A difference is made between basic text here Bh and default text here operating hours The basic text can be a maximum of 8 characters and can be used for addressing The default text is 15 characters long and provides a longer description This description can be adapted to the customer s wishes Description set point actual value for counting operating hours level 1 and or level 2 The descr
296. he command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt an die Hardvvare Bsz Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK N N HVVO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Erh1 or Erh2 Control signal from the object Bsz BM1 or BM2 acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Erh1 or Erh2 Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC1 or stCEC2 CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may influence the control of the outputs Heater level 1 and Heater level 2 1 not malfunction blocked 0 2 switches off the Heater level 1 on and Heater level 2 on outputs malfunction blocked 1 A malfunction caused by the command execution check stCEC1 or stCEC2 switches off the relevant output Heater level 1 on or Heater level 2 on If the malfunction switches off the outputs Heater level 1 on and Heater level 2 on this can only be reset by activating the release malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the mal
297. here is a request if Ytarget exceeds the value of GwYtarget Request steam moistening unit is then set to 1 If the standby message is deleted Y is immediately set to Ytarget otherwise the occurrence of the standby message is awaited AnfAuto is not deleted After the existence of a request AnfAuto 1 request steam moistening unit is set to 1 and the operating message is awaited If this does not occur in time the control execution check is released If the standby message is deleted Y is immediately set to Ytarget otherwise after setting the request steam moistening unit the occurrence of the standby message is awaited Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 278 Dampfbefeuchter stetig Dampf Dampf vvird angefordert erzeugt ist vorhanden Y Signal AnfAuto Y S gnal Y S gnal ohne Betrieb AnfAuto d d GW es wird geheizt GW o 5 bedeutet AnfAuto Optional e keine BAR ra keme BAK Ventil fahrt Advance switch off The function block includes an input for advance switch off In automatic operation the steam moistening unit is switched off if this input Advoff is switched to 1 The aim is to ventilate the channel to fight legionella in line with VDI 6022 Advance switch off is ignored for non automatic operation Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check for description and parameter refer to command execution check section for the actual ope
298. hing the Ethernet to active in the DDC4000 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 502 Ile 01 Zentrale L 000 DDC4200 L 002 Digital IO L 001 Analog IO L 102 BMD4064 L 101 BMA4024 L ULC L 01 000 DDC4200 ei 00 Anlage 0 L Heizungsa L VC L ftungsanl OO Anlage 0 00 Gruppe 0 01 000 00 00 Gruppe 0 5Yy_Config 01 System Konfigur 5Y_Modul 01 System 5Y_Datsi 01 Datensicherung SY ModConf 01 5Y_Network 01 Netzwerk Konfi 01 000 00 00 5Y_Network 01 SY_Hosts 01 Hosts Netzwerk Konfig L S _Simu 01 Simulationwert Et ctive Ethernet Aktiv 1 DV DSub 01 D SUB Konfig EtIP Addr Ethernet IP Adr EtMask Ethernet Maske EtBcast Broadcast Adr EtMac Ethernet MAC RsActive R5465 Aktiv RsIPAddr RS485 IP Adr RsMask R5465 Maske The sub network mask must be the same as in the laptop The IP address must not be the same as in the laptop but must match the sub network mask The Ethernet must still be switched on via the lt EtActive gt parameter Now it is possible to access the DDC4000 from the laptop via Explorer To do so enter the DDC4000 s IP address in the address field in Explorer If it is not possible to access the DDC4000 this may be due to the Java 2 Runtime Environment software not being installed on the laptop This software must be installed and can be downloaded from the intranet fr
299. his DDC software object can be used for example as a command value in DDC software objects e g for time dependent glide of a set point Function description With the DDC software object time glide a value that is larger or smaller depending on the time is created The bigger or smaller is set as a slope in the parameters 5680 slope h and 5681 slope h For this the desired slope is defined as a numerical value 0 01 999 per hour The value produced from the slope positive or negative and the time passed is indicated in parameter 5684 time glide A starting value and an end value must be stipulated The gliding starts with the starting value and ends with the end value It is possible to access this value with source parameterizing The time glide is controlled as follows using the two binary source parameters timegl and timegll Time gliding Timegl Timegl Start value lt End value Start value gt End value 0 0 The value is reset to the start value The value is reset to the start value 1 0 Value becomes larger as per slope h Value becomes larger as per slope h Start value gt End value End value gt Start value 0 1 Value becomes smaller as per slope h Value becomes smaller as per slope h End value gt Start value Start value gt End value 1 1 No changes No changes Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 1 i 0 i i _
300. i aE EEEa 466 a BEE 466 Ee e E 466 4 3 8 2 1 CD WA volume counter 2 cee ce cece eee e cee eecetecee cea e eee eaaaaaaaeaaaeaaeeaecaaeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteess 466 4 3 8 2 2 CD WA Volume counter OT 467 4 3 8 2 3 CD WA Volume Counter OU 467 4 2 8 9 NERT 468 4 3 8 3 1 CD_WM Electrical counter nn 468 4 3 8 3 2 CD_WM Electrical counter 0 468 4 2 84 SBMS un ae ee nee 469 e EE 469 4 4 parameterizing imminent semen 471 4 4 1 Plant structifing irarria A aE EE Naa Aa AE ERANT PIERA 471 ABN D GE 471 E te e EE 471 4 4 2 Malfunction message management uu42440444HnnHnnnannnn none nn nn nnnnnnen nun nnnnan nennen 471 4 4 2 1 Plant Ee 471 AA 8 AN eege eege eet 471 4 4 2 1 3 Message memory SY_MsgMan 242442444444444040H0n none nnnnnn Hann nnnnnn nenn nannnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnn 474 4 4 2 1 4 Output definition SY_MsgOut nen 475 4 4 2 1 5 Selection message set FSelMO 2 2 4u4444444444000Rnnnnn nn aan nnn ann nnnnnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnen 476 4 4 2 1 6 Sensor failure message FAIM 2 uuus4444444440HH RR nnnnanannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnn nn 478 4 4 2 1 7 Modem configuration Gy Mod ont nn nen nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 479 4 4 2 1 10 Plant status signalizing encetat Gaseta een an nannten 481 da lid EE 482 EE 483 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 47 4 4 2 1 13 Fax recipient SY FAX sn 484 82 ne 485 4 4 3 Creating th
301. ibe an object more precisely Akey example is a PIN Each clamp in the system is represented by a PIN This PIN can be determinated by a sub object to a digital or analog input or output Therefore the parameterizing is very structured and clear Version 05 06 Kleback neter Operation 2 8 2 Operation Set E CL e E 8 2 1 Introduction to operation tveiciisccsivecsecsecevisesveisverdeaseesveneecostessceubececteeceetencwateecedeecevieecuevenseiivedeesnes 9 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Operation Introduction to operation 2 1 9 2 1 Introduction to operation Please refer to the DDC4000 instruction manual for detail information The user interface is created exclusively with the PS4000 parametering tool Already by structuring into plants the first operating page is determinated Therefore there is a summary of the plants in the DDC4000 Central Unit and a quick start bar on the first page Anlagen w hlen f r weitere Informationen Depiction of opening page with summary of all plants and the quick start bar Heizung b Luttung Kalte RLT K che ER BackOffice 1 EG Anmelden You can obtain a quick overview of the plant s status with the aid of the quick start bar located on the right Green means plant running white plant is off flashing red plant has produced an unconfirmed malfunction red constant on plant has a malfunction hand symbol a plant element was switched to manual ope
302. iegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Som a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch stCEC Malfunction s occurring StLock Malfunction blocked Y Hardware control signal Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Control valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output AnfAuto open closed Z open closed DOL Manual open closed Zw open closed stCEC Priority Parameter Value Action Highest StCEC Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual Closed Zw Closed Control cover closed Manual open Zw open Control cover open Z closed DOL Control cover closed Zlopen Control cover open lovvest Auto Automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 15 H502 Fire protection cover with drive Function summary 4 3 309 The fire protection cover with drive function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a motor run time The function block supports Monitoring soldered strut contact Self test Command execution check malfunction catch Status control unit using
303. iliary control variable is raised or lovvered The supply air set point 5205 XS supply air Casc counteracts the offset in the room and ensures fast stable control The exhaust air control circuit works in the normal setting with a P control behavior The influence of the offset room exhaust air on the supply air change is set with parameter 5201 ER Xs supply air XS current ER xw room exhaust air Ifthe room or exhaust air temperature works as a Pl control function on the supply air control circuit the reset time for the exhaust air control circuit is entered in parameter 5202 tN cascade Depending on the setting in 5202 tN cascade the following control behaviour can be set P P PI PI P PI PI P behavior For the supply air temperature it is possible to set both a minimum and a maximum limit parameter 5203 supply air min limit 5204 supply air max limit If the supply air temperature is lower than 5203 supply air min limit or exceeds 5204 supply air max limit the internal output 1021 Limit cascade is set to 1 If a valid value is entered in parameter 5273 XP limit for all basic program XPYs are switched to XP Limit cascade and the 120 XP switching is also activated If the max limiting value is below the min limiting value the max limiting value is invalid Parameter 5208 Maxdiff sets a limit for the temperature difference between the supply air temperature and room temperature The precondition for limiting the temperatu
304. imum 1 Maximum 5273 1 XP1 set point 0 5 200 10 XP limitation float 52741 inv set point 0 Inv limitation boolean 5275 1 Q_Fg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Lead size limit float 5276 1 EFg set point 10 10 0 EFg float 5277 1 Anf set point 50 150 22 Slide begin limit integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 133 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5278 1 End set point 50 150 32 Slide end limit integer 5279 1 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA limitation boolean v10 1 Limitation actual value 0 boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5270 2 Q actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q limitation sensor float 5271 2 Limitation value set point infinity infinity 150 float 5272 2 Limitation set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 Minimum 1 Maximum 5273 2 XP2 set point 0 5 200 10 XP limitation float 5274 2 inv set point 0 Inv limitation boolean 5275 2 IQ Fg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Lead size limit float 5276 2 EFg set point 10 10 0 EFg float 5277 2 Anf set point 50 150 22 Slide begin limit integer 5278 2 End set point 50 150 32 Slide end limit integer 5279 2 EA actual value deletable deleted
305. in Start time blocking prot integer 29 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK1 or stBAK2 delayed integer 30 Ra actual value 0 2147483647 0 min Rest time to switch over integer 31 Z set point 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 Pump1_ON 2 Pump2_ON 32 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON 33 SM2 actual value deleted Pump 2 fault deletable boolean 34 UZeit set point 0 2147483647 0 s Overlap time integer 35 gBh1 actual value 0 Limit value violation oper hrs pump 1 boolean 36 pbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 37 stbak1 actual value 0 Command exe control status pump 1 boolean 38 stbak2 actual value 0 Command exe control status pump 2 boolean 39 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 40 gBh2 actual value 0 SS Limit value violation oper hrs pump 2 boolean 41 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 416 Function description Pump switching If the input Pump switching is not switched operation changes between the two pumps in automatic mode and for Zw On depending on the operating hours For this the pump that is not running is activated when the operating time of the currently operating pump exceeds the limiting value pump switching since the last pump swi
306. in B Wassermenge 3 200 m 17200 m 2 200 m W rmemenge B 600 m 116 dT 200 m 116 dT 400 m 1 16 dT 0 1 2 3 tinmin Example e g Scaling B 2 and Scaling EXP B 2 means 2 x 10 2 200 m is added for each pulse Via a 0 1 flank of the binary source parameter 5731 Q Reset heat volume A the 5726 Delta heat volume B counted to date is reset to 0 Via a 0 1 flank of the binary source parameter 5732 Q Reset water volume A the 5728 Delta water volume counted to date is reset to 0 The 1 0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5726 Delta heat volume B or 5728 delta water volume counting again We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 224 The calculated volumes of 5725 heat volume B 5726 Delta heat volume B 5727 water volume and 5728 delta water volume can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Status 0 5733 EAWB If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Note A counting object F015 FO count can be used for example as a source for the counting input 5722 Counting value in B But it is also possible to link the counting value of any binary plant parameter as a source refer to FSource documentation Pa
307. in which the actual operating status may differ x from the target operating status without releasing stCEC VzCEC stCEC is output with a delay for the stated time x ResCEC Resets the stCEC D stCEC Signals that the actual operating status was longer than x the tCEC of the target operating status Signal interaction depiction Ansteuersignal an die Hardware Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Uberwachungszeit Bsz BAR Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardvvare BAR Status BAR stBAK Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 3 3 5 Operating hours Objects Operation hours counting with and without limiting value The command execution control is used to measure the duration of binary actual operating statuses Anteuersignal Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 GE Betriebsstundenz hler Betriebs stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich _Grenzwert berschritten Set auf Wert Grenzwert The counting can be reset to 0 set by default or changed Exceeding an operating hour limiting value is signaled in parameter gBh limiting value infringement Par No Parameter name plain text Description Input Ed BhZ Input for the binary actual status x BhGw Operating hours limiting value x Re
308. inary inputs BE can be switched individually as binary outputs BA by the software Transistor output Contact load 24V DC max 50mA Input to be attached through potential free contact of which 8 BE for counting pulses to 80Hz um 24 analog inputs AE can be switched individually as analog outputs AA by the software Sensor type Value range and unit 0 10V 0 to 100 KP10 50 to 150 C Pt100 50 to 150 C Pt1000 50 to 150 C Ni100 50 to 150 C Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 14 Sensor type Value range and unit Ni1000 DIN 50 to 150 C Ni1000 L amp G 50 to 150 C KP250 50 to 150 C ML2 50 to 150 C Operating voltage for DDC Central Unit 24V AC 10 50 60Hz 33 VA 1 4A or 24V DC 10 14 4 VA 0 6A or 12V DC 10 12 VA 1 0A For inputs and outputs 24V DC 10 More data Fuses Mains fuse T 3 15A Displays Back lit color TFT LCD display Switches buttons 1 button to reset the device Processor MPC855T 32 Bit 80 MHz Memory 128 MByte Flash Disc 48MByteSDRAM 1 MByte Flash PROM boot Operating plant Embedded Linux Power outage data backup 10 years clock component battery buffered enclosure type IP30 Ambient temperature 0 45 C Environmental humidity In service 20 80 rF no
309. infinity infinity 0 Lower limit value float 4 3 6 4 F004 catch Function summary Used to maintain a status of a parameter The setting of another parameter releases the status of the parameter that is to be retained on which the catch works Function description Die Selbsthaltung kann nur an einen Parameter vom Typ Boolean angehangt werden Dies bewirkt wenn der Parameter auf 1 wechselt dass er durch die Selbsthaltung auf diesem Wert bleibt bis ein separates Rucksetzsignal Reset St rungsselbsthaltung aktiviert wird Erst nach Quittierung der nderung durch diese bin re Quelle wird der neue Wert g ltig Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 res set point 0 Reset SH boolean 4 3 6 5 F005 Command execution check Function summary Sie dient der berwachung von bin ren Betriebs Ist Zust nden Ein Betriebs Ist Zustand oder Betriebsmeldung muss innerhalb einer bestimmten Zeit tCEC dem Wert eines Betrieb Soll kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 452 Zustandes entsprechen anderenfalls wird ein bin rer Ausgang FehlerBAR auf 1 gesetzt Ist der Betriebs Ist Zustand nicht beschaltet wird kein FehlerCEC signalisiert Der FehlerCEC wird zur ckgesetzt wenn der ResCEC Eingang von 0 auf 1 wechselt Ist der ResCEC Eingang nicht beschaltet wird FehlerCEC zur ckgesetzt wenn der Betrieb
310. ing boolean 19 Pu actual value 0 Pump ON boolean 20 gBh actual value 0 Limit value viol boolean 21 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Start delay Aut integer 22 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 Ss Time BAK integer 23 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 24 StzPBS set point 0 2147483647 720 min Block start time integer 25 LzPBS set point 0 2147483647 0 min Block run time integer 26 stBAK actual value 0 Command Status boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 396 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 27 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs integer 28 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Switching delays It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation Delay automatic start This can be used for example to avoid peak loads It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation Pump hunting AnfAuto AnlVerz PuNach Pu Pump blocking protection In order to avoid blocking the pump if it is inactive for longer periods of time this function can be used to run the pump once a day even if it is otherwise not required Start time block corresponds to the minutes of the day calculated from midnight Run time block is also stated in minutes If the value 0 is en
311. ing hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 284 Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message heater single stage target operating status Heater level 1 on output Status command execution check Ifthe actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal S gt an die Hardware aus dem Objekt Uberwachungszeit Bsz BAR Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardvvare BAR Status BAR stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Erh1 Control signal from the object Bsz BM acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Erh1 Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch An adjoini
312. inity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 2 EA2 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 2 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 2 active boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 3 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 71 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 173 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5311 3 Q3 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 3 G3 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 3 MMBegr3 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 3 Inv3 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 3 XP3 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 3 EF3 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 3 Anf3 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 3 End3 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 3 EA3 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 3 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 3 active boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 4 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5311 4 Q4 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted
313. inked into once cover with a release The HWO outputs are designed for coupling via supports with the hardware outputs In order to avoid run time differences for the switching signals the contacts for one device e g fan must be on an output module Otherwise the steps or on and off signals may take place at the same time Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 267 Parameters names and classification Parameters can be addressed in two different ways 1 via the parameter number and 2 via the parameter name The parameter number is unique to only one object Each object can have for example a parameter with the number 12 and the text Rep For this addressing is possible in sources and links both via voice led parameters and via parameter names The use of texts instead of numbers is advantageous for planning plant assignments and when reading sources A customer specific plain text can still be set for the relevant parameter There are different types of parameters Binary values Boolean Logical value 0 or 1 Integer Number without places after decimal point 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Floating comma Number with digits after the decimal point 3 402823466E38 to 3 402823466E38 Multistate Value has one of several statuses O OFF 1 ON 9 AUTO For this BACnet in the parameter table means the BACnet number of the status and DDC No means the DDC4000 number Selecti
314. int 0 2147483647 0 min Start time blocking prot integer 29 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 31 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 AUTO 0 Z OFF 1 Z ON 32 ZW set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 AUTO 0 FORCED OFF 1 FORCED ON 33 Zs set point 0 100 0 Spoint Z influence integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 411 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 34 ZwSw actual value 0 100 0 Setpoint forced control integer 35 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 36 pbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 37 stBAK actual value 0 Status pump command exe control boolean 39 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 40 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Minimum pump operation If the pump is in automatic mode and the input AnfMin is activated the pump is operated in a pump specific minimum mode usually minimal transport height Minimal operation On On Switching delays It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation Delay automatic start It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation Pump hunting Pump blocking protection The function block includes the pump block pro
315. io 3 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 899 Prog Version actual value Revision Head text AnmCount LogonCounter actual value 2147483648 2147483647 0 integer BACPrio BACnet Prio set point 1 16 9 integer Devid BACnet Deviceld set point 0 4194303 0 integer DubAdr Address double actual value 0 boolean ErrNo Fault Code actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer Error Fault module actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 436 No name of parameter parametertyp min max init unit HwRev HardwareVersion actual value text SetFree Send release set point 1 boolean State State actual value 3 2 value text multistate 0 passive 1 active 99 virtual BACPrio The parameter describes the priority used to change a DDC parameter The following peculiarity is important If parameters are changed via the DDC interface priority 9 applies to it for example Then it is stipulated that the DDC should be given priority 10 If the BACPrio parameter is now set to 10 all the values changed in the DDC are moved to priority 10 Warning This may mean that superordinate setting commands etc take sudden effect if their priority is now larger 4 3 5 3 SY_Config plant configuration Function summary DDC ce
316. ion catch boolean 6 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 7 Stell actual value 3 1 value text Setting multistate 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 24 Running 8 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s StBAK delayed integer 9 Y actual value 0 Flap drive boolean 10 vr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Set feedb flap integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 306 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 11 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 1 Z OPEN 0 Z SHUT 12 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 13 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Forced Auto 1 Forced OPEN 0 Forced SHUT 14 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK boolean 15 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 Ss Time BAK integer 16 tMot set point 0 600 120 s Motor runtime integer Function description Final position replication The final position open final position closed and position feedback signal cover inputs can be wired if required If the position feedback signal cover is wired but not the final position open and final position closed both final positions are determined via the position feedback signal cover If position feedback signal cover lt 3 a closed final position is assumed if position feedback signal cov
317. iorities The limit with the object index 10 is prioritized higher than the one with object index 02 The limitation function of the DDC sub menu limit has a higher priority than that of the DDC sub menu XP switching But the following functions are differentiated XP change and XW change Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Priorities of the limitation function a change to the current control variance Objects Priority Function Highest S312 1 Limitation 1 S303 Cascade only PID lowest S312 2 Limitation 2 The current control variance is determined as follows 1 XWcurrent Limitation 2 XWbasic program XWlimitation2 2 XWcurrent cascade XWcurrent XWcascade only PID 3 XWcurrent Limitation 1 XWcurrent XWlimitation1 Priorities of the limitation function b change to the XP range Priority Function Highest 312 1 Limitation 1 312 2 Limitation 2 lowest 317 XP conversion 4 3 180 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5270 1 IQ actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q limitation sensor float 5271 1 Limitation value set point infinity infinity 150 float 5272 1 Limitation set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 Minimum 1 Maximum 5273 1 XP1 set point 0 5 200 10 XP limitation float 52741 inv set point 0 Inv limitati
318. iption gives information on the importance and use of the parameter as well as any peculiarities to be observed Parameter type Set point Integer Two pieces of information are included in the parameter type In the top line the term set point or actual value is found This states whether it is a stipulated target value or a calculated actual value As a result actual values can not be changed directly by the user The second line contains the parameter type e g integer or string Min 0 Min states the minimum value permitted here 0 Sometimes this states the limitation from the DDC s technological perspective and thus not every permitted value is always appropriate Max Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure General background 4 1 58 infinity Max state the maximum permitted value here infinity 2 147 483 647 which corresponds to 245 000 years that is permitted for this parameter Init 0 The value stated under Init matches the default for the first installation of the relevant object Here the 0 means that the operating hours counter starts to count at 0 if it is not overwritten with a different value Unit h The unit is only stated when this is appropriate In this case h stands for hours This document also includes a list of units Float The float or floating point type has a maximum range of 3 402823466E38 to 3 402823466E38 E38 stands for 10 to the power of
319. is available the input values final position open or final position CLOSED are analyzed for the synchronization When the final positions are reached for entered sources for open and close final positions the drive moves to stop until it receives a command in the opposite direction lt 97 or gt 3 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 3 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence integer 4 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Entr malfunction catch boolean 5 SM actual value deletable deleted Malf with flap boolean 6 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 7 Tot set point 0 50 0 Signal change deadzone integer 8 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp flap integer 9 YAuf actual value 0 OPEN Impulse boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 315 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 10 YZu actual value 0 CLOSED Impulse boolean 11 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Position display integer 12 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Servo feedback of flap integer 13 Ysoll set point 0 100 0 Setp flap integer 14 Z set point
320. ities apply Priority Function Highest S313 1 Set point switch 1 S313 2 Set point switch 2 S313 3 Set point switch 3 S313 4 Set point switch 4 S316 Set point remote control lowest S315 Set point correction Example 5261 Start remote 5262 End remote 5265 XS remote control at 0 100 value change 10 C 25 C 10 C 25 C 20 rF 80 rF 20 rF 80 rF 0 mBar 5 mBar 0 mBar 5 mBar Note Basic heating program The DDC submenu set point correction only works for day regulation The set point correction influences RH parallel movement of heating curve if the DDC softvvare object S318 room correction or S300 optimization is not active TStarget correction XS remote control End remote start remote actuating variable 100 start remote TStargetnew TStarget TStarget correction If the DDC software object room correction or optimize are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the XS remote control This for example influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction Room correction TStargetcorrection Room temp XS remote control ER Optimization NO TStarget correction Basic PID program In this basic program the set point remote control works on the current set point XS current kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 147 XS current XS rem
321. ivation Sub function of basic ventilation program 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5438 Q EA start up if not defined ON Function summary The movement switch only switches the ventilation plant on when the heating register is heated Function description The movement switch is released 1022 Movement 1 when the external temperature falls below the value parameterized in 5332 TOgrenz AF and the control NIGHT is in automatic operation via a timing program or the control OFF due to forced control Remote OFF or Z contact OFF The lower external temperature is just one criterion for movement switching If the external temperature goes up during an active movement phase this does not abort If the ventilation plant is operational e g as a result of usage times or remote switching the selected heating valve opens first 5331 Target movement Y After the entered opening time 5335 Opening time has ended the heating valve is 100 open The length of the total cleaning time depends on whether a return temperature sensor was connected a There is no return temperature sensor available Atthe same time as the opening the release delay is also active 5336 Release delay After it ends the internal contact I011 Plant ON 1 is switched on b There is a return temperature sensor 5333 Return sensor available The heating valve is opened until the return temperature sensor the limiting value 5334 Limit T Return A
322. ize Switching to a firm TS target TR target excludes night falls If the optimize sub menu is active the nevv TR target influences intermediate heating pre lovvering preset the heating up time and the adaptions Basic PID program In the PID basic program for active set point switching the current set point XS current is overwritten If in addition to the basic program the DDC software object S314 set point glide also works this calculated XS current is overwritten Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 1 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 1 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 1 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 1 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 2 Q XS actual value deletable 50 1150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 2 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 2 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5288 2 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No nam
323. k again No inverting takes place if the binary source is invalid If access is made on the Y output in the PID basic program in other DDC software objects the inverted direction is adopted The limits of the Y outputs on the PID basic program 5141 Y1 min to 5148 4 max are still operational E g if a Y output works with the limits 20 100 the inverted Y output also works with these limits Priorities If the DDC sub menu M310 energy selection is installed and active at the same time the function of the DDC sub menu M311 sequence reversal is prioritized higher Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5240 QY1 actual value deletable deleted Source SU YL1 boolean 5241 QY2 actual value deletable deleted Source SU YL2 boolean 5242 QY3 actual value deletable deleted Source SU YL3 boolean 5243 QY4 actual value deletable deleted Source SU YL4 boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 130 4 3 2 9 12 S312 Limitation Activation Sub function of basic heating and ventilation program 0 can be set 2 x Can be switched on off via 5279 Q EA limitation if not defined ON Function summary The DDC control function of the main control circuit is restricted using DDC software object limitation The limitation is required for example for keeping the s
324. ked 1 If parameter malfunction fan blocked is set any malfunction must switch off outputs request cover fan FC ON fan bypass ON and request control If the parameter malfunction FC blocked is set the output Fan FC ON is switched off If the parameter malfunction FC requires bypass is set the output fan bypass ON is activated when the automatic functions require the fan In manual operation there is no automatic malfunction switch to bypass mode If a malfunction sets the output fan FC ON to off or bypass operation is activated this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m anliegende St rung E anliegende St rung IT 7 E im E weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung m St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Sionale Soo I MI gt Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 340 HVVO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM and SMFu Malfunction s occurring StCEC and stCECFu StLock Malfunction blocked AnfRI LuFu LuBy re
325. keneter Software structure Objects 4 3 135 F hrGr lt Gleitende BegrSoll BegrWert F hrGr lt Gleitende BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang Gleitende EFg Gleitende lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll Begrvvert Gleitanfang F hrGr Gleitende Gleitanfang Gleitanfang F hrGr EFg EFg Gleitanfang lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang Gleitende EFg XVV pax BegrF hl BegrSoll Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 136 4 3 2 9 13 S313 SP switching Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 4 can be set Can be switched on off via 5288 Q EA Special target if not defined ON Function summary In the DDC software object S313 set point switching a constant is defined that replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit depending on a binary source In addition any analog value can be assigned as a set point via an analog source Function description Inthe DDC software object set point switching an analog value is set from a source parameter 5285 Q Special set point e g a characteristic value or a constant parameter 5286 Special set point The value of the analog source has a higher priority than the constant Depending on a binary source parameter 5287 Q EA special set point replaces the value of the analog source or the const
326. kepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 461 4 3 6 15 6 FB_BV binary parameters Function summary Dies ist ein an Parameter anh ngbares DDC Funktions Objekt oder auch Anhangsobjekt Es bewirkt dass der Wert eines Parameters als ein BACnet Binary Value Objekt auf dem BACnet sichtbar wird Dieses Objekt ist als Anhangsobjekt f r Parameter vom Typ Boolean konzipiert Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer Z Z actual value 0 boolean 4 3 6 15 7 FB MI multistate input Function summary Signaleing nge an Ger ten Inputs die mehr als zwei diskrete Werte liefern k nnen in BACnet als Multistate Input Objekte abgebildet werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer 4 3 6 15 8 FB_MO multistate output Function summary Analoge Werte die auf einen Gerateausgang wirken werden im BACnet als Multistate Input Objekte abgebildet Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter 4 3 462 Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Z E actual value 0 boolean
327. l 1 Request pump cover Request regulation if nec activate burner level 1 Z closed DOL Request pump cover Request regulation 0 Burner level 1 on 0 Burner level 2 on 0 Z Level 2 chimney sweeping function Request pump cover 1 Request regulation Activate burner level 1 and level 2 without Delay12 Z Level 1 Request pump cover Request regulation 1 if nec activate burner level 1 Auto Automatic operation request pump cover AnfAuto Lowest priority Status command execution check operation Version 05 06 malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 370 AnfAuto Brenner ansteuerung wi AnfPK HWO Pumpe SWO Heizung AnfBrEin SE Z ur Hand Zw kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 371 4 3 3 28 H703 Burner modulating 3 point Function summary The burner modulating function block controls a modulating burner using 3 point control The implementation of the analog setting signal 0 100 9o in the 3 point control is described at 3 point valve The inputs final position open and final position closed are not available in the burner modulating function block therefore there is no synchronization using these final positions The function block supports pump and cover control during the warm u
328. l 2 is switched on and the operating messages Request control also remains when switching between the levels If the plant switches from level 1 to level 2 the plant waits for VZBAk2 If the operating message for level 2 is not yet available the request control is set to 0 again If the output Fan ON level 2 is active the output Fan ON level 1 is blocked mutual locking This HWO does not work with fans that have to be switched to both level 1 and level 2 at the same time For operational message cover open this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Switching up and down the levels Level 2 is always switched on with a time delay switching up delay via level 1 i e level 1 must run for a Switching up delay time before level 2 is switched on This is independent of warm up delay automatic level 1 Ifthe request for level 2 is placed when level 1 has already been active longer than Switching up delay level 2 is activated immediately Switching up delay is to be viewed as a minimum time for level 1 Switching back from level 2 to level 1 occurs via an off phase for the switching down period Switching up and down the levels does not work in non automatic modes i e for Z manual and forced When switching back from level 2 to level 1 the request control stays setto 1 even
329. l Unit occurs via the system object SY_ModemConfiguration 01 The modem s general operating parameters and the SMS dial numbers and protocols for the supported providers are shown here Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Sender set point 49 30 60095 0 Sender text 2 init1 set point ATI 1 Initstring text 3 init2 set point atz 2 Initstring text 4 init3 set point att 3 Initstring text Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 480 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5 esc set point Modem Escape text 6 hup set point ath Modem Hangup text 7 SMSC_D1 set point 001712521002 Login SMSC D1 text 8 SMSC_D2 set point 001722278020 Login SMSC D2 text 9 SMSC_E set point 001771167 Login SMSC E text 10 SMSC_A1 set point Ow0 Login SMSC A1 text 11 Prot_D1 set point 2 0 value text SMSProtocol D1 multistate 1 TAP8 2 UCP51 12 Prot_D2 set point 2 1 value text SMSProtocolD2 multistate 1 TAP8 2 UCP51 13 Prot_E set point 2 0 value text SMSProtocol E multistate 1 TAP8 2 UCP51 14 Prot_A1 set point 2 0 value text SMSProtocol A1 multistate 1 TAP8 2 UCP51 15 IP SMTP set point IP_AdrSMTP Serv text 16 AbsEmail set point
330. l during the warm up phase request for control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 AnfRI actual value 0 Begin Flap boolean 3 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Start delay Automatic integer 4 BM actual value deletable deleted Re fan message boolean 5 BMFu actual value deletable deleted Re message FU boolean 6 BMHRIAuf actual value deletable deleted Re flap OPEN message boolean 7 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 8 BhAktiv set point 0 Re Activate oper hrs counting boolean 9 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 10 ByAktiv set point 0 Bypass activation boolean 11 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 335 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 12 Hand set point 4 0 value text Manual switch multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 21 FU_ON 31 BY_ON 13 LuBy actual value 0 Fan bypass ON boolean 14 LuFu actual value 0 Fan FU ON boolean 15 RMAna actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Setting feedback FU integer 16 Ren actual
331. ldung Uberwachungszeit Alarmv BAK von der Hardware tBAK rz gerungszeit Ansteuersignal S gt an die Hardware Bst BAK Status stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter BrOn Control signal from the object Bsz BMBr acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Br1On and Br2On Control signal to the hardvvare Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 376 Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs a not malfunction blocked 0 b switches the outputs request pump cover request control and Burner on off malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the outputs to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m gt anliegende St rung E anliegende St rung IL E 7 im 7 weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entri
332. le deleted DBE boolean 10 Hand set point 5 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 11 Ysoll actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Yset integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 294 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 12 LS actual value deletable deleted Air stream monitoring boolean 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Rep switch boolean 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted SelfRestore boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Clear malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 S stBAK delayed integer 18 Z set point 5 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 0 Z OFF 1 Z Level 1 2 Z Level 2 3 Z Level 3 19 Zw set point 5 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 20 gBh actual value 0 LV viol Bh boolean 21 Erh1 actual value 0 Anfo heater 1 boolean 22 Erh2 actual value 0 Anfo heater 2 boolean 23 Erh3 actual value 0 Anfo heater 3 boolean 25 stBAK1 actual value 0 Malf BAK 1 boolean 26 stBAK2 actual value 0 Malf BAK2 boolean 27 stBAK3 actual value 0 Malf BAK3 boolean 30 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 S D
333. le infinity infinity deleted C Sensor back float 5334 Limit T back AF set point 0 50 30 C float 5335 Opening time set point 1 99 10 min float 5336 Release delay set point 0 99 10 min float 5337 Structure delay set point 0 99 10 min float 5438 EA actual value deletable deleted Source EA Start up boolean i022 Anf actual value 0 Start up boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 109 4 3 2 9 5 S305 Optimization ventilation Activation Sub function of Basic PID program can be set 1x Can be switched on off via 5348 Q EA OptAufh if not defined ON Function summary The DDC sub software object Optimization ventilation has the function of controlling the ventilation plant such that the desired room temperature is reached at the start of the usage time Thus the optimization fan only works in automatic mode with a usage time assigned to the PID control This requires various parameters that represent the building s room s temperature behavior and compares various temperatures with each other This calculates time for the PID control to switch on Function description For a difference in the outside temperature 5103 Source TO from set point XS 5100 XS in the PID basic program the switch on time for the assigned usage time program is brought forward This applies both to necessary heating TO lt XS and cooli
334. lower than TASBY DAY by the switch back difference XSD StandBy Usage time changes are not considered The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source 5398 Q EA StandBy If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON When switching between ON OFF and OFF ON a switching transfer takes place in the control unit The Y signal stands as per the offset and is not moved by gliding In standby the Y signal is set to 0 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5391 Typ set point 2 0 value text StandBy type multistate 0 MRP 1 ZQD 5392 Q actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q StandBy float 5393 Tag set point 0 30 20 C TO SBY day float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 200 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5394 Nacht set point 0 30 12 C TASBY night float 5395 xsd set point 1 20 2 K XSD StandBy float 5396 Ruecks set point 1 3 1 d Back switch ZQD integer 5397 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA StandBy boolean i008 StBy actual value 1 StandBy boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 201 4 3 2 10 12 S348 Adaptive heating curve Activation Sub function of basic heating program 0 can be set once Can be switche
335. lta SW sliding float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 142 4 3 2 9 15 S315 Set point correction Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5292 Q EA Target correction if not defined ON Function summary DDC software object S315 address an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read This analog value works as a correction on the DDC control circuit set point Function description Parameter source target correction 0 100 sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system The value range produced by this analog source is interpreted as 0 100 Effect like source target correction in the DDC3000 The value range for the set point correction is set with parameters upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being corrected SPC release SPC UL release SPC LL 100 Q SPC in 0 100 release SPC LL Parameter source target correction absolute value sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system The value range produced from this analog source is processed as a real value e g 5 5 K The imported
336. lzelt gt Zeiten mammale Aufbeizzeit K Faktor lt 4h ist lt 6h berechnet 2 6h Aukin Adaptionszeiten TAUauf Adaption TAUauf Adaption Heating up If the heating circuit is in the lovvering status the heating status is started vvhen the calculated heating time tAuf gt the remaining time before usage starts The heating up operation is ended Advance switching on If the rule is for target day value or usage time start the heating operation and usage time start is lt 4h and room temperature gt RoomTargetDay or TO lt TOGrenzabs if from 4 hr before usage starts TR gt TRtarget 0 5K transfer from heating to preset a if the continuing calculation of tAuf shows that the room temperature reached the set point by more than 6 hrs too soon change from heat up to lovver m if the usage time start TR gt TRtarget transfer from heating to day regulation if at usage time start TR lt TRtarget but the maximum heating time Parameter 5150 is cancelled transfer from heating up to Day regulation kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 163 Reduction operation The relevant heating circuit moves to the lower status if end of usage is reached Schedule output night or advance lowering is calculated presets Advance lowering In order to save energy the heating circuit can be changed to lowering operation if there is over heating as a result of
337. m Objekt werden die Ausgabe Ziele Melde Sets von Meldungen definiert Im Melde berwachungs Objekt FO_SelectionMessageOutput kann im Parameter 1 Auswahl Mset ein Melde Set eingetragen werden welches die Ziele der generierten Meldungen festlegt Weiterhin kann zur Verz gerung bzw Verhinderung von Meldeschauern eine Master Meldung generiert werden Falls das Versenden von Meldungen fehlgeschlagen ist kann ein Ersatz Meldeset eingetragen werden Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 3 glob set point 0 Dest global boolean 5 SMS set point 0 selection list Selection SMS selection list No text 0 SMS No 1 1 SMS No 2 2 SMS No 3 3 SMS No 4 4 SMS No 5 5 SMS No 6 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 476 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6 FAX set point 0 selection list Selection FAX selection list No text 0 FAX No 1 1 FAX No 2 2 FAX No 3 3 FAX No 4 4 FAX No 5 5 FAX No 6 7 Drucker set point 0 selection list Selection printer selection list No text 0 Printer 1 1 Printer 2 2 Printer 3 3 Printer 4 4 Printer 5 5 Printer 6 8 Ersatz set point deletable deleted Replacement MSet text 9 weiter set point 3 0 value text Forwarding multistate 0 no forwarding 1 destination error 2 no destination reach
338. malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0 malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output Ytarget Z DOL Manual Zw and ZwSw SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Zw Y ZwSw Manual Y Manual DOL Y 0 Z Y Z lowest Auto Y Ytarget Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 317 4 3 3 17 H504 Cover constant Function summary The cover constant function block controls a constant cover with target setting of 0 100 The function block supports Trouble shooting Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter ty
339. mand execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 378 AnfAuto Brenner ansteuerung wi AnfPK HWO Pumpe SWO Heizung AnfBrEin SE Z ur Hand Zw kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 379 4 3 3 29 H704 Burner modulating Function summary The burner modulating function block controls a modulating burner and supports pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control mu Chimney sweep function Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic operation boolean 2 AnfBrEin actual value deletable deleted Begin Burner ON boolean 3 AnfPK actual value 0 Begin Pump Flap boolean 4 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 s Startup delay of the automatic integer 5 BMBr actual value deletable deleted Burner plant message boolean 6 BMPukl actual value deletable deleted Plant message Pump Flap boolean 7 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 8 BhAktiv set point
340. marized in plants This may include a contact output or a full air conditioning plant The term plant is just a sorting criterion It is mainly used for structured visualization All plants are offered to the user in the first operating page 4 4 1 2 Groups Why groups A group is a grouping of the functions from part of a plant For example a heating register can be summarized under a group This would include e g the valve sensor and pump Within the switch page the group name would be inserted as a divider from the other LEDs A controller can be found in each group Therefore an air conditioning plant for example can have a temperature control circuit in one group and a humidity control circuit in another group 4 4 2 Malfunction message management 4 4 2 1 Plant messages 4 4 2 1 1 Messages A message in the DDC4000 system is depicted via an attachment function FSelMo The information for malfunctions incoming message and normal operation outgoing message are administrated Plant messages are generated if an appropriate parameter monitoring has been set Plant messages are generated in line with the status of the hardware of the separate control technology Plant messages have a delay so that only ongoing failures are reported Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Parameter FSelMO Parameter berwachung Vergleichsparameter Text kommend Text gehend Meldeset
341. modem can be connected to the serial interface A connection to the BMS can be established via the modem with PPP point to point protocol It is not possible to directly connect the BMS via the serial interface 3 2 3 6 BACnet A DDC4000 system parameter becomes a transportable parameter through a BACnet attachment function This occurs for example by selecting the desired parameters in the BMS or the relevant stipulations in the parameterizing tool What the DDC4000 can do Medium BACnet via Ethernet Ethernet ISO8802 3 Ports For hexadecimal range BACO BACF 47808 47823 dec The DDC4000 is a B BC The current PICS are found on the intranet Initial start up Ensure connection Ethernet cable 1 1 patch cable on the DDC to switch or router Ethernet cable 1 1 patch cable from laptop to switch or router Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 26 or Ethernet cable cross over direct from DDC to laptop Network settings The customer must provide the settings even if the DDC network is not initially connected to the customer network it is advisable to obtain the setting data from the customer so that no address conflicts occur when connection is made later IP address e g 192 168 8 60 Network mask e g 255 255 0 0 Gateway e g 172 20 11 75 Details on IP address Certain addresses and address ranges are assigned special functions 127 0 0 1
342. mpen Nachlauf 5182 Z Einfluss Y1 Z H01 Handeingriff H01 Y 0 und Pumpe aus wenn TVsoll nahe TRsoll Pumpensteuerung Bi h 4 300 Heizungs optimierung 302 set 4 S302 Y Set 3 S302 Y Set 2 S302 Y Set 1 y 0 100 Auto undefiniert gt gt y 0 100 Auto undefiniert gt 4 3 159 e b AEE 319 Stand by S300 Heizungs optimierung YH1 5173 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 160 The statuses 117 i Schedule p Tag undef Nacht Objekt Modelnfo Di zur Tag Nacht Undefiniert Auto Aufheizen Aus ss Bi Se FermbadienungT ag Nacht Aus Undefiniert Auto gt Q 200 Heizungs optimierung Regeln Tag ee i004 Hmmm Regeln Nacht i 300 Heizungs i005 optimierung Aufheizen LEE ge At l Regelzustand AUS i009 Zwischenheizen d OO 300 Heizungs nenn optimierung S319 Stand by u e Kessel Anforderung i003 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 161 4 3 2 10 2 S300 Optimization Activation Sub function of basic heating program can be set once Can be switched on off via 5380 Q EA Optimization if not defined ON Condition A usage time program schedule object S117 must be assigned to the basic program Function summary The DDC software object S300 Optimization heating has the function of controlling a heating plant su
343. must be defined for plant monitoring 1 vvhich parameter is to be monitored 2 where the message is displayed or to where it is transferred Re 1 To monitor a parameter a sub object FSelMO is installed on the relevant parameter The type of monitoring can be stipulated with the parameters for the FSelMO object Via parameter 3 E A you switch the monitoring on or off Parameter 2 monit stipulates whether 0 or 1 is the normal response e g for binary parameters whether monitoring is for falling above or exceeding a limit for numbers or whether equality or lack of equality is being monitored for selection parameters or numbers In parameter 4 value the comparison value is entered this is compared with that of the monitored parameter such as parameter 2 monit A hysteresis for the comparison value can be set in parameter 5 Xdz switch back difference This prevents the occurrence of many messages if the parameter being monitored moves around the comparison value This would produce messages time and again In order to provide operating staff with useful information if a message is produced a text can be defined in parameter 6 Txt_IN and this is output with the message if the monitored status occurs Correspondingly a further text 7 Txt_OU can be defined when a malfunction state is resolved These are referred to as incoming and outgoing messages The current monitoring result is shown on message output 101 Afte
344. n Position display There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal valve input is occupied If position feedback signal inverted is activated the inverted value 100 Yr is indicated by position feedback signal valve If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position valve is used This may come from Target valve position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Valve blocking protection The function block includes the valve block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LzVBS operating time this function does not work The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time At this time the vbs output is set to 1 If this function works in HWO the VBS function programmed in MC200BUS does not start as the valve is moved within 24 hr Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY Kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 348 a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0
345. n 3 QB actual value deletable 0 Blinking light boolean 4 Farbe set point 8 0 value text Color selection multistate 0 Red RedOFFBI 1 Green RedOFFBI 2 Green Red 3 Green Yellow 4 Yellow Red 5 undefined 6 undefined 7 undefined 4 3 4 2 BO M Markers Function summary This object represents a control link marker Variable e1 e2 e3 e4 m Expressions OR AND NOT XOR brackets are optional parts of the link Depiction of the marker s parameters Version 0 3 33 and 29000 01701 M 01 16 33 45 1 0 x Merker dE i Status Merker D 1 Eingang 1 2 Eingang 2 D A Eingang 3 d Eingang 4 S ANDOR b E1 OR fe The marker is displayed better from Version 1 1 XX Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 423 same marker with clearer depiction Logik Eing nge 16 36 14 Eingang 1 o Op Eingang 2 lo m Eingang 3 lo Eingang 4 lo c el ORez If the inputs flap is pressed the technician can view all the inputs with their source assignments at Logik Eing nge 18 33 57 a glance Adresse Klartext to moom mars_41 01 02 Eingang 1 ajo mwonm msrs_41 018 02 Eingang 2 3 fo Eingang 3 4 o Eingang 4 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 E1 actual value deletable 0 Input 1 boolean 2 E2 actual value deletable 0
346. n Control boolean 35 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK Fan boolean 36 stBAKFu actual value 0 Status BAK FU boolean 37 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time stBAK integer 38 tBAKFu set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time stBAKFu integer 39 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Bypass The optional bypass branch secures fan operation if a frequency converter malfunction occurs the fan runs without control in this case The outputs fan FC ON and fan bypass ON are never active at the same time The bypass function is switched on or off with parameter ByAktiv A source can be linked and used to consciously switch the bypass on Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 337 cover control during the vvarm up phase request for control If the fan is to be switched on the cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational cover open 1 if this input is wired Then Fan on or if nec fan bypass on is set to 1 and if connected the plant waits for operating message fan 1 Only then is request control set to 1 II For operational message cover open this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Switching delays It is possible to delay switching on the automati
347. n condensing inoperative 5 90 rF non condensing Housing 19 short plastic cassette 4 way cassette with a base and special connections for Ethernet and RS232 W x H x D 202mm x 132mm x 137mm Front panel cutout 200 4mm x 112 0mm Weight 2 200kg Designation CE 3 2 1 1 3 LV help bids To complete service directories SD Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 15 Automation station Processor type MPC 855T Word length bit 32 Max cycle time ms 100 AD DA converter bit 16 Max buffer time real time clock At least 5 years Max buffer time data Compact Flash unlimited Size and type MB read only memory 128 MB Compact Flash main memory 48 MB RAM Max number of control circuits that can be processed 21 Max number of information points that can be processed Physical 2 x 16 x 24 binary inputs communicative approx 5000 Max number of connectable physical input output components 2 x 63 Basic software functions can be extended Type of expansion Software objects Local operating and display unit Variation 1 Does the Modular AS have an integrated operating and display unit as standard Yes Variation 2 Can the Modular AS be extended with an integratable operating and display unit Yes Type DDC4001 Variation 3 Can an external operating and display unit be connected Yes Type PC with
348. n the DDC Central Unit starts the control program The parameter t on the T 92 becomes 1 after 60 seconds t can be used for further connection like 1137 in the DDC3000 system Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 494 237000700700 oY CAMO CAM Bus Anm Kund Gruppe 0 d st Genial Di ser Schnitt CH Sr_TelCharge 01TelKosten Limit oY User Ui Benutzergruppe Sr JON UI Gebietsschema i MO Merter b T 92 Timer b L T Controlled DDC Central Unit start up There is a setfree source parameter in each insert card and module Dzr00 005Y_Modul 01 6 51 55 System CH DAC bro D netbro 3 oetFree sendefreigabe pi HwRew Hardwareversion This parameter includes a source If this source 0 it blocks the physical outputs This source is linked automatically with timer 92 If the DDC Central Unit is switched on the time is O This blocks all the outputs After the timer ends all outputs are released by this source link Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 495 4 5 Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 1 Service level 4 5 1 1 Service level access to parameterizing Service level The service level is offered when you log in with the relevant code The screen is switched over by pressing the service button This process may take a few seconds so that the pages to be
349. nce multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 11 Ysoll actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Yset integer 12 LS actual value deletable deleted Air stream monitoring boolean 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Rep switch boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 287 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted SelfRestore boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Clear malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK delayed integer 18 Z set point 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 0 Z OFF 1 Z Level 1 2 Z Level 2 19 Zw set point 4 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 20 gBh actual value 0 GW Verl Bh boolean 21 Erh1 actual value 0 Anfo heater 1 boolean 22 Erh2 actual value 0 Anfo heater 2 boolean 25 stBAK1 actual value 0 Malf BAK 1 boolean 26 stBAK2 actual value 0 Malf BAK2 boolean 30 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 Ss Delay BAK integer 31 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 32 BhAktiv set point 0 Active opr hours boolean 33 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Total opr hours integer 34 ResBh actual value deletable
350. nde BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang Gleitende EFg Gleitende lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitende lt F hrgr lt BegrSoll Begrvvert Gleitanfang F hrGr Gleitende Gleitanfang Gleitanfang F hrGr EFg EFg Gleitanfang lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang lt F hrgr BegrSoll BegrWert Gleitanfang Gleitende EFg XVV pax BegrF hl BegrSoll Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Objects 4 3 184 4 3 2 10 6 S313 SP switching Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 4 can be set Can be switched on off via 5288 Q EA Special target if not defined ON Function summary In the DDC software object S313 set point switching a constant is defined that replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit depending on a binary source In addition any analog value can be assigned as a set point via an analog source Function description In the DDC software object set point switching an analog value is set from a source parameter 5285 Q Special set point e g a characteristic value or a constant parameter 5286 Special set point The value of the analog source has a higher priority than the constant Depending on a binary source parameter 5287 Q EA special set point replaces the value of the analog source or the constants the set point of the DDC control circuit Grundprogramm DDC Regelkreis aktueller Sollwert Sollwertums
351. neter Software structure Objects 4 3 157 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit i020 XPU actual value 0 XP Changeover boolean Z Z actual value 5 4 value text Z contacts multistate 1 21 Day 35 Z2 Night 36 Z3 Heating up 0 24 Off 9 Automatic Nr Beschreibung 1 H01 Bem RPG Index und instanziiert Bit Red 25 7 03 nach Fehlermeldung Sti 2 State Gibt den Zustand des Heizautomaten wieder 0 Aus 1 Vorabsenken 2 Absenken 3 Zwischenheizen 4 Aufheizen 5 Vorein 6 Regeln Tag 7 Regeln Nacht 8 Economy 9 Stand By What is missing better image file for heating curve original is aWord graphic TO reduction T design image file original is a Word graphic Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 158 4 3 2 10 1 Graphical summaries TStarget calculation gt Mittelung 5 QTA ees TAmittel 5103 u Vv 5169 d gt Verz gerung Zeitkonstante TAvz 5168 gt gt TAvz 5153 Regeln nach TA 5152 i gt EF 5155 i i wirkt nur bei 8315 316 i Regeln Tag KH KH i Sollwert i Sollwertfem j Heizkennlinie wenn S318 5186 korrektur insteller Raumkorrektur i i i 300 i Heizungsoptimierung 8348 adaptive ER i SCH gt eh Heizkennlinie v nein Nacht Ja Tag Regeln Tag e
352. ng TO gt XS The move forward is XS TO 5345 Fakt heat for heating and TO XS 5346 Faktcool for cooling The maximum time change is stipulated in parameter 5343 Max time The following is switched when the switch on time is moved forward The optimization ventilation works on Y output in the PID basic program set in parameter 5342 Y outside air cover For this the Y output that controls the outside recirculating air cover must be entered By comparing the outside and room temperature energies the outside recirculating air cover is opened or closed as per the need to heat cool The optimize status ventilation is indicated with the internal contact 1026 Optimization 1 m The internal contact of the PID basic program 1011 plant ON is switched to 1 This controls the ventilators With the return message from the ventilators via source parameter 5140 release control the internal contact 1012 control ON is then switched to 1 If no Y output is selected in 5342 Y outside air cover the optimization ventilation only switches the 1011 plant ON signal on The operation of the sub menu can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5348 Q EA OptAufh In order to ensure fast heating and cooling pure recirculating or outside air is used without a minimum outside air rate until the regular usage time start is reached During this time no limits in the PID basic program Ymin Ymax work for the selected Y output Limits that ar
353. ng malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the Heater level 1 on output 1 not malfunction blocked 0 2 switches off the Heater level 1 on output malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Heater level 1 on to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction latch Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 285 If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m gt anliegende St rung E l anliegende St rung TI E im 7 weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signale I Saale II Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked Erh1 Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs Z onloff DOL manual on off Zw on off Rep SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Heater level 1 on O M
354. nit unit 5371 2 Ziel set point 4 0 value text Y standstill multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5372 2 b_r actual value deletable 50 150 deleted Q back sensor SR float 5373 2 TAg set point 0 20 3 C TA limit Frost float 5374 2 XSr set point 2 50 10 C XS back float 5375 2 XP set point 0 5 200 10 C XP standstill reg float 5376 2 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA standstill reg boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5371 3 Ziel set point 4 0 value text Y standstill multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5372 3 b_r actual value deletable 50 150 deleted Q back sensor SR float 5373 3 TAg set point 0 20 3 C TA limit Frost float 5374 3 XSr set point 2 50 10 C XS back float 5375 3 XP set point 0 5 200 10 C XP standstill reg float 5376 3 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA standstill reg boolean Version 05 06 4 3 124 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 125 4 3 2 9 10 S310 Energy selection Activation Sub function of basic ventilation program 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined ON Function summary The choice of energy for ventilation plants selects the energy source that is most effective cheapest for the relevant control status Example In line with the control status cooling is to take place The
355. nt XS basic program Delta_glide Delta_glide EF comvalue glide start Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 140 glide end lt comvalue Set point XS basic program Delta glide Delta glide EF glide end glide start a Set point raised for increased command signal and positive EF value Setting glide start SG1 lt glide end SG1 EF positive value a Set point lovvered for increased command signal and negative EF value Setting glide start SG1 lt glide end SG1 EF negative value c set point lowered for falling command signal and negative EF value Setting glide start SG1 gt glide end SG1 EF negative value a Set point raised for falling command signal and positive EF value Setting glide start SG1 gt glide end SG1 EF positive value Example Gliding as per AT k Gleitbereich _ _ gt Sollwert verschiebung Xs e EF positiv eingestellter Sollwert Gleitanfang gt Gleitende F hrungsgr e x Gleitbereich L Gleitbereich _ Xs eingestellter Sollwert Sollwert i verschiebung Es i i i i i i 2 i EF negativ Gleitanfang S Gleitende F hrungsgr e x L _ _Gleitbereich gt ce EEES el steil me 2 Xs eingestellter Sollwert Sollwert verschiebung x EF negativ Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e x i i i Sollwert i verschiebung vA EF
356. nt deletable 0 100 deleted Setp valve forced control float 32 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 33 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 34 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK Burner boolean 35 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 36 tMotAuf set point 1 2147483647 120 s Motor runtime OPEN integer 37 tMotZu set point 1 2147483647 120 s Motor runtime CLOSED integer 38 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal burner input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position burner is used This may come from Target burner position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control If the burner is to be switched on the pump cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational message pump cover 1 if this input is wired Atthe same time as request pump cover the request control is set to 1 This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat Ifthen the signa 1 the burner is switched on burner on 1 Version 05 06
357. nteger 6930 Min Switched off time 10 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6931 Min Switched off time 11 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6932 Min Switched off time 12 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6933 Min Switched off time 13 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6934 Min Switched off time 14 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6935 Min Switched off time 15 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6936 Min Switched off time 16 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6937 Min Switched off time 17 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6938 Min Switched off time 18 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6939 Min Switched off time 19 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6940 Min Switched off time 20 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6941 Power consumption 1 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6942 Power consumption 2 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6943 Power consumption 3 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6944 Power consumption 4 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6945 Power consumption 5 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 262 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6946 Power consumption 6 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW floa
358. ntion through operation on near the DDC manual on manual off manual automatic etc or manual values Z Z influence intervention by switching on building technology Z on Z off Auto Automatic operation if nec by influencing time programs DOL Direct operating level intervention through direct operation e g front switch modules Most of the abbreviations above and following are refering to German expressions therefore they are not reasonable for English understanding Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 271 4 3 3 4 Command execution chech CEC Command execution check The command execution control is used to monitor binary operating actual statuses An actual operation status or operating message must with a specific period of time tCEC match the value of a target operating status otherwise the binary output stCEC is set to 1 If the actual operating status is not switched no stCEC is signaled The stCEC is reset when the ResSM input changes from 0 to 1 If the ResCEC input is not switched stCEC is reset when the actual operating status matches the target operating status again The 0 1 flank from stCEC is out put with a VZCEC delay The monitored signal is withdrawn for malfunction recognition after the time tCEC VzCEC Par No Parameter name plain text Description Input Ed Bsz Input target operational status x CEC Input for the binary actual status x tCEC Time with
359. ntral parameters can be viewed internal temp and set in this object The most important parameter here is the central unit address Many program process are based on this address so if it is changed a cold start is required Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 437 Hoddi SY Config 1 Konfiguration La Battery Batterie sp 317 Y Restart Wamstart 0 er Address eq zentralenadress 1 Frojekt o00 00 00000 d Metz 1 A AmlPretyPrint 1 4 CF Typ TOSHIBA THMC The screen shot is from Version 1 0 19 Here the network and XMLPrettyPrint parameters are found in the object These two parameters will not be available in future versions Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 3 XmiPret set point 0 XmiPrettyPrint boolean 4 CF Type actual value text Address Central U address set point 1 99 1 integer Battery Battery voltage actual value infinity infinity 0 V float BeepD ToneDuration set point 0 5000 60 ms integer Brightn Brightness set point 10 100 93 integer CalA Calibration A set point 2147483648 2147483647 O integer CalB Calibration B set point 2147483648 2147483647 O integer CalC Calibration C set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 438
360. ntrol circuit can be switched by frost or a similar Off The sources are also prioritized If a further source is attached to the input parameter it finally describes the parameter and therefore has the highest priority 4 4 5 Manual analysis A manual input is found on the hardware objects The input can receive the information visualization YES This makes this parameter changeable in the interface of the DDC4000 Central Unit Then for non auto mode the status is visualized in the quick start bar right by the hand symbol if a corresponding F017 was attached The value can also be used for visualization in the BMS Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 491 Solwertanderung neuen Wert eingeben Heizventi aktuell 7 8 ale 20 K d Hand Parameter Hand in DDC visualisieren erzeugt Extra Eingabemaske in der DDC 4 4 6 Converting multistate to binary Multistate parameters are used in the DDC4000 system If a status is to be used from these 5 01 CJ Auto 9 parameters e g for links this status must be filtered out and converted to a binary parameter For 5 92 Aus 0 this each multistate parameter in the PS4000 can ef T 1 be entered in a source that is normally designed for ag 1 a binary value By selecting the connection line So Nacht 2 there is the option of assigning a multistate value a SE 1 and other values a 0 Nacht 1
361. ocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output request electrical fan heater constant to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 303 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ti weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal Som a Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC StLock Malfunction blocked Anf Hardware control signal Status control switch priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target position electrical heater constant The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs Z on off DOL manual on off Zw on off Rep SM Priority Parameter Value Action Highest SM See effects of malfunctions on operating behavior section Rep Y 0 Anf 0 Zw Y ZwSw Anf 1 depending on LSU and STB Manual Y Manual Anf 1 dependin
362. oduce heat Ifthen the signal request burner on is set to 1 by the control and operational message pump cover 1 the burner is switched on burner on 1 For operational message pump cover this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a pump or cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Chimney sweep function The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the chimney sweep function time span if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the chimney sweep function time span even if the request automatic operation is set to 0 in this time When the chimney sweep function is activated the chimney sweep function active parameter is set to 1 Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the burner can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output burner on is used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 359
363. of conversion in the tool The forced control Zw parameter is a multistate parameter If the forced control is to have no effect on the HWO s output Pu Zw is to be set to Auto In the upper image the Zw is switched via a binary input By defining the value conversion two multistate values are to be stipulated for the two binary statuses off on The result is that for binary 0 the HWO is switched from Zw to Off The manual switch and the auto request have no influence on the Pu output The status control takes place as per the following priority Example H901 Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Pu 0 Manual open Zw open Pu 1 Z closed DOL Pu 0 z On Pu 1 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 493 Priority Parameter Value Impact lowest AnfAuto if AnfAuto 1 then automatic operation The switching is correct in the lower image If binary is 0 Zw Auto If binary 0 the manual switches and the auto requests also affect the Pu output Schlosshotel Friedrichsruhe DDC4000 03 Fubbadenhetzung 1001 68 00 k ao DIEN Furkion Datenaustausch Einstellungen Fenster Hille Bembetem Ansicht Einf gen Format E ar Shape Hie 8 x PS54000 DDC400002 statische Heizung 001 68 000 DDE4000 03 Fu bodenh
364. of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Ansteuersignal P an die Hardware Uberwachungszeit Bsz g Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK x HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter LOn Control signal from the object Bsz BMLu Acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC LOn Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 324 Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the Fan ON output 1 not malfunction blocked 0 2 switches the outputs request cover fan on and Burner on off malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output request cover to off this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e ifthe malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet P anli
365. om exhaust air temperatures affects the supply air movement with a P control behavior tN Cascade min Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Settings Set point XS 20 C basic program Influence exhaust air IR 3 Figure 1 Current exhaust air value agrees with set point XS 20 C In this case supply air is also 20 C Figure 2 Current exhaust air value increases to 21 C control difference 1K Without min limit the supply air is reduced to 17 C supply air movement offset 1K ER 3 3K Figure 3 Setting suppairminlimit 18 C supply air may not be below 18 C Figure 4 Current exhaust air value falls to 18 C control difference 2K Without max limit the supply air is raised to 26 C supply air movement offset 2K ER 3 6K Version 05 06 Objects 4 3 102 Bild 1 ch Acc Raum T Zuluft Abluft C C A Raum A Abluft Zuluft L Raum Abluft L Zuluft Bild 4 Zuluft MIN Begr kiebackepeter Software structure Figure 5 Setting suppairmaxlimit 25 C supply air may not exceed 25 C Figure 6 Setting Diff limit between room and supply air to 5 0K Objects 4 3 103 ES De Dees Zuluft Maxdiff 5 0K temperature vc 5 difference between room and supply air may not be larger than I Diff Jo O NSU
366. om laptop to PC or patch network cable when connecting the DDC4000 e g via switches Pre selections The DDC4000 and laptop must be in the same network For this it is necessary to set the IP addresses of the DDC 4000 and the laptop to the same sub network Laptop settings using Windows XP as the example In the Windows taskbar click on lt Network connections gt via the following path Start gt Settings gt gt Control panel gt Network connections Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 499 Netzwerkverbindungen Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Erweitert 7 aik z 3 T wi Le Suchen Ordner Er Adresse Netzwerkverbindungen Name T DFO b GLT Callback DF 2 DDC4000 DF LAN oder Hochgeschwindigkeitsinternet AEA Deaktivieren N oder Hochgeschwir 1394 Verbir Status N oder Hochgeschwir Reparieren Verbindungen berbr cken Verkn pfung erstellen schen Umbenennen Eigenschaften Select the corresponding connection from network connections e g LAN connection and right click on lt Properties gt Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 500 In the properties window displayed click on the lt Internet protocol TCP IP gt element under lt General gt and click on properties 4 Eigenschaften von LAN Verbindung m kiebacke
367. om the following path Documents gt Technical gt DDC4000 system gt Network technology It can also be found on the Internet by entering the search term re Please note Access from the browser to the DDC4000 is not required for importing data to the DDC kleback neler Version 05 06 Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 503 Send data After making the default settings and an existing physical network connection the projection is sent as follows in the PS4000 In Project move to TAB4000 and using the right mouse button click on a DDC4000 and select Create projection file D4PML Ensure that the set IP and central unit address in the properties of the DCC4000 in the PS4000 agree with the settings on the DDC4000 device The BACnet device ID set in the PS4000 is written in the DDC4000 and must not be set on the device dh St nderrack PS 4000 Projekt Funktion Datenaustausch Einstellungen Fenster Hilfe u lal x PS4o00 jix R e Projekt Einstellungen St nderrack E o gei DDC4200 Projekt Name JSt nderrach E S Bb 01 He Sn Zeichnung erzeugen posa 53 eichnung kopieren aus ze 02 L f Tag ei dE a Beasch DD ientralgerat loscter DDC Zentralgerat Eigenschaften Projektierungsdatei D4PML erstellen Projektierung ins Ger t senden Aktualisieren I MRP E DDC 4000 IT LAP HRP IT FSM r LV Hi
368. on MIN 100 5314 YB Inverting YES Y max Grundprogramm Stellbereich abh ngig von der Y min Grundprogram DUC Regelung 0 gt Begrenzungsgr e Stellung abh ngig von YB Grenzwert Begrenzungsgr e Figure 3 A Y limitation as 5313 YB limitation MAX 10 Stellung abh ngig von Grundprogram KT Version 05 06 Y min Grundprogramm 0 Stellbereich abh ngig von der DDC Regelung gt Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 93 Figure 4 A Stellung abh ngig von Y limitation as Begrenzungsgr Re 5313 YB limitation MAX 100 T SES Re 5314 YB Inverting YES Y max Grundprogramm l RS Stellbereich abh ngig von der Y min DDC Regelung Grundprogramm 0 gt Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert Parameters Parameter 5313 Min Max selection yes 1 means Max No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 1 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5311 1 Q1 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 1 G1 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5312 2 G2 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 1 MMBegr1 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 1 Inv1 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 1 XP1 set point 1 200 10 X
369. on screw terminal number does not match a Pin object e g screw terminal number 4 logical terminal 1 P 01 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 33 P xx Pin type selection determines vvhich function objects sub objects are attached to the Pin object The module object depends on a CDI digital input function and a CDO digital output function Digital input P xx CDI 01 Digital output P xx CDO 01 Refer also to the description of the Pin object Each terminal is configurable to the digital input or digital output with acknowledgement The digital input value is available from P xx CDI 01 k The output value is expected on P xx CDO 01 K The returned value from the output is available on P xx CDO 01 k General parameters SY_Module 01 Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module In SY_Module 01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored Peculiarities 899 Version number of the firmware module Active The module is reachable and has full function If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module 01 Active is set to O DubAdr The module notifies a double address malfunction The module notifies a malfunction If tne module detects a malfunction itself it sets SY_Module 01 malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module 01 Err No ErrNo malfunction code Warnings and malfuncti
370. on block supplies an output signal Control valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output AnfAuto open closed Z open closed DOL Manual open closed Zw open closed stCEC Priority Parameter Value Action Highest StCEC Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual Closed Zw Closed Control valve closed Manual open Zw open Control valve open Zlclosed DOL Control valve closed Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 345 Priority Parameter Value Action Zlopen Control valve open lovvest Auto Automatic operation Status command execution check operation Version 05 06 malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 346 4 3 3 23 H612 Valve bus drive Function summary The valve bus function block controls a constant valve with target setting of 0 100 The function block supports Inverting position feedback signal Valve blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos
371. on boolean 5275 1 Q_Fg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Lead size limit float 5276 1 EFg set point 10 10 0 EFg float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 181 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5277 1 Anf set point 50 150 22 Slide begin limit integer 5278 1 End set point 50 150 32 Slide end limit integer 5279 1 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA limitation boolean v10 1 Limitation actual value 0 boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5270 2 IQ actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Q limitation sensor float 5271 2 Limitation value set point infinity infinity 150 float 5272 2 Limitation set point 2 1 value text multistate 0 Minimum 1 Maximum 5273 2 XP2 set point 0 5 200 10 XP limitation float 5274 2 inv set point 0 Inv limitation boolean 5275 2 IQ Fg actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Lead size limit float 5276 2 EFg set point 10 10 0 EFg float 5277 2 Anf set point 50 150 22 Slide begin limit integer 5278 2 End set point 50 150 32 Slide end limit integer 5279 2 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA limitation boolean v10 2 Limitation actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06
372. on list Value that can have one of a choice of statuses Each status is one bit position Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 2 All hardware objects object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 H000S Sim unreleased H001 Circul pump 0 3 33 H002 Pump 0 3 33 H004 Device on the M Bus 0 2 1 H010 Network Var unreleased H045 Control channel unreleased H101 Sensor general unreleased H102 Sensor pressure unreleased H103 Sensor humidity unreleased H104 Sensor CO2 unreleased H105 Sensor temperature unreleased H106 Sensor volume current unreleased H201 Detector general unreleased H202 Detector diff pressure ventilator unreleased H203 Detector frost protection unreleased H204 Detector STB TR unreleased H301 Steam humidifier cont 0 1 9 H302 Steam humidif constant unreleased H401 One level electro heater 0 1 9 H402 Two level electro heater 0 1 9 H403 Three level electro heater 0 1 9 H404 Electroheater contin 0 1 9 H501 Flap OPEN SHUT 0 1 9 H502 Fire protection flap 0 1 9 H503 Flap 3 Point 0 1 9 H504 Flap continuous 0 1 9 H601 1 level fan 0 1 9 H602 2 level fan 0 1 9 Version 05 06 4 3 268 Kleback neter Software structure Objects object no name of object release stage 24 07 2006 H603 3 level fan unreleased H604 Fan FU Byp 0 1 9
373. on messages are coded here The importance can only be queried in the R amp S Terminal occupancy 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 3 10 ll 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 GND GND GND GND DC K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 E27 E28 K29 K30 K31 K32 K K K K El DC 3 4 4 BMD4064 Function summary All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type Below the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub issues in the bus module The module is usually created via planning This may also take place by logging on such a module to kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 34 the control cabinet or field bus After creating a BMD other objects are installed automatically This results in the following object structure 01 lt central unit gt 101 lt Module gt BMD 00 lt plant gt always 00 00 lt group gt always 00 P 01 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 1 P 02 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 2 P 30 lt Object Index gt Pin object for contact 30 SY_Module 01 lt Object Index gt general information on the module For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined For example this switches a contact input to a contact output Function description Module address
374. ons restrictions Sinus generator minimum period duration gt 10 cycle time Ramp sawtooth signal t1 Time for increasing ramp gt cycle time t2 Time for falling ramp gt cycle time connected to t1 t1 t2 must be lt period time if t1 t2 lt period time the signal looks like this A A Rectangular generator tPulse On pulse time must be gt cycle time and lt period time Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 tPer_sin set point 1 infinity 10 s T_Periode_Sinus float 2 Halt Ampl sin set point 0 infinity 1 float 3 Offs_sin set point infinity infinity 0 float 4 Res Sin set point 0 Reset_sin boolean 5 tPer_ramp set point 1 infinity 10 s float 6 t1_ramp set point 0 1 infinity 9 9 s float 7 t2_ramp set point 0 1 infinity 0 1 s float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 265 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 8 Ampl_ramp set point 0 infinity 1 float 9 Offs_ramp set point infinity infinity O float 10 res ramp set point 0 Reset_ramp boolean 11 tPer_pulse set point 0 1 infinity 1 Ss float 12 tPulse_pulse set point 0 05 infinity 0 5 s float 13 Ampl_pulse set point 0 infinity 1 float 14 Offs_pulse set point infinity infinity O float 15 Reset_puls
375. ontrol unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 AnfBrEin actual value deletable deleted Begin Burner ON boolean 3 AnfPK actual value 0 Begin Pump Flap boolean 4 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 S Start delay Automatic integer 5 BMBr actual value deletable deleted on burner message boolean 6 BMPuRI actual value deletable deleted on pump flap message boolean 7 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 8 BhAktiv set point 0 Oper hrs of activation boolean 9 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 10 BrEin actual value 0 Burner ON boolean 11 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 12 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual switch multistate 9 Auto 0 OFF 1 ON Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 357 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Repare switch boolean 14 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 15 ResSM actual value deletable
376. ooling for ventilation plants aims to release the heat in the building by inserting cool outside air at night The function can only be used in summer The PID basic program moves to free night cooling under the following conditions Version 05 06 The SWO function can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source 5226 Q EA Free Night Here for example using an annual program the menu function can be restricted to certain summer periods If no binary source is set the SWO is active Summer operation in summer interval If the average outside temperature 5169 TOaverage exceeds the limiting value 5225 TO limit FN it is assumed to be summer The internal contact I030 Summer FNK switches to 1 The temperature of sensor 5103 Source TO is analyzed as the outside temperature The outside temperature is at least delta T2 5223 dT2 lower than the room temperature The room temperature is at least delta T1 5222 dT1 larger than the current room temperature set point The current set point 5101 XS current from the PID basic program and the room temperature are analyzed in line with 5221 Room sensor FN If no separate room sensor is set the sensor value of the basic program 5102 source control variable is analyzed The room temperature must be above the current set point by 5222 dT1 Parameter I13a becomes logical 1 when the requests stated above are met Parameter 113a can be be linked further in the DDC system In contrast to
377. oring boolean 13 Rep actual value deletable deleted Repare switch boolean 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted SelfRestore boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Clear malf boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 282 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 S stBAK delayed integer 18 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 19 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Auto 0 Off 1 On 20 gBh actual value 0 Limit value infringement boolean 21 Erh1 actual value 0 Anfo heater 1 boolean 25 stBAK actual value 0 Malf BAK boolean 30 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 Ss Delay BAK integer 31 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 32 BhAktiv set point 0 Active opr hours boolean 33 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Total opr hours integer 34 ResBh actual value deletable deleted Reset opr hours boolean 35 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Generating the operating release forced or manual operation must provide a normal message operation Version 05 06 A request in automatic operation is reco
378. osition display There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal valve input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position valve is used This may come from Target valve position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Valve blocking protection The function block includes the valve block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LzVBS operating time this function does not work The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time At this time the vbs output is set to 1 Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0 malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3
379. ote control End remote start remote actuating variable 100 start remote Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5260 Set size actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float 5261 Anf set point 2147483648 2147483647 0 Begin remote integer 5262 End set point 2147483648 2147483647 50 End remote integer 5263 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA setpoint remote boolean 5265 XS Remote setting actual value infinity infinity 0 float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 148 4 3 2 9 17 S317 XP switching Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5306 Q XP switching if not defined ON Function summary DDC control circuit control setting parameters are switched with the DDC sub menu XP switching Depending on a binary source the proportional ranges of the Y outputs the rate and regulating periods can be switched Function description The binary source is set in parameter source XP switching If the digital source Q XP switching is 1 or the controller setting parameters are replaced by the set setting values The working XP switching is displayed via internal contact 120 XP switching in the basic heating program or PID Note In the basic heating program 120 XP switching only becomes
380. ows into the calculation TAUdown 0 6 TAUdownOLD 0 4 TAUdownNEW When starting up a different basic time setting can be set The TAUdown Adaption can be permitted or prohibited with the 5563 TAUdown Adapt parameter Pumpe U Vorlauf Zeit gt Kessel K Vorlauf Zeit Ventil Toizeit pe Raumtemperatur gen K Factor The 5562 K factor no unit parameter influences the heating phase It considers the room temperature for the past three days This provides a longer heating period This may be necessary if there was no heating operation for a longer period of time due to holidays or a weekend U starting K starting The 5566 U starting recirculating pump starting and 5567 K starting boiler starting parameters are the time constants that characterize the plant technology These can be set as per the specific plant technology At the time of changing from lovvering to intermediate heating or heating the recirculating pump is first controlled via 1001 After the end of the U starting time the boiler request 1003 is active Only after the end of the K starting time is valve 5173 YH1 opened Idle time The 5568 idle time parameter is a time constant that characterizes the plant technology These time constants are automatically re calculated for an active TAUup Adaption by the circuit and represent the time that the controller requires after heating starts until the relevant change in room tempe
381. p burner automatic float 26 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence float 27 Zw set point deletable deleted Forced control boolean 28 ZwSw set point deletable 0 100 deleted Setp valve forced control float 29 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 30 reg actual value 0 Begin Control ON boolean 31 stBAK actual value 0 Status BAK Burner boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 381 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 32 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 33 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal burner input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position burner is used This may come from Target burner position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control If the burner is to be switched on the pump cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational message pump cover 1 if this input is wired At the same time as request pump cover the request control is se
382. p min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 Ysoll actual value 0 100 0 Setp flap automatic float 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 i deleted Servo back flap float 5 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Setting no float 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp flap float 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE Status boolean 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence integer 14 ResSM set point deletable deleted Enter malf msg boolean 15 SM actual value deletable deleted Malf with flap boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 18 Z set point deletable 0 100 deleted Z influence integer 19 Zw actual value deletable deleted Forced control boolean 20 ZwSw set point 0 100 100 Setp flap forced control integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 318 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 21 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description Position display There is a position display output This indicates this value if the position feedback signal cover input is occupied If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the target position cover is used This may come from Target cover
383. p min max init unit 5310 3 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 71 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 95 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5311 3 Q3 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 3 G3 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 3 MMBegr3 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 3 Inv3 set point 0 YB Inversion boolean 5315 3 XP3 set point 1 200 10 XP Y limitation float 5316 3 EF3 set point 0 10 0 EF Y limitation float 5317 3 Anf3 set point infinity infinity 22 C Slide begin YBegr float 5318 3 End3 set point infinity infinity 32 C Slide end Y limit float 5319 3 EA3 actual value deletable deleted Q EA Y limitation boolean 5320 3 YBegr actual value 0 Y Limiting 3 active boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 4 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5311 4 Q4 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 4 G4 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5313 4 MMBegr4 set point 1 YB limitation boolean 5314 4 Inv4 set point 0 YB Inversion boole
384. p phase request for control Chimney sweep function Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 2 AnfBrEin actual value deletable deleted Begin Burner ON boolean 3 AnfPK actual value 0 Begin Pump Flap boolean 4 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 s Startup delay of the automatic integer 5 BMBr actual value deletable deleted Burner plant message boolean 6 BMPuRI actual value deletable deleted Operation pump s flaps boolean 7 Bh set point 0 2147483647 0 h Operating hours integer 8 BhAktiv set point 0 Oper hrs of activation boolean 9 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 2000 h Oper hrs limit value integer 10 BrEin actual value 0 Burner ON boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 372 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 11 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 12 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence float
385. peration kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 386 AnfAuto Brenner ansteuerung wi AnfPK HWO Pumpe SWO Heizung AnfBrEin SE Z ur Hand Zw kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 387 4 3 3 30 H801 Volume flow regulator constant Function summary The constant volume flow controller function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a cover run time The function block supports Final position replication Command execution check Trouble shooting Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Servo back fan integer 6 Y actual value 0 Actuation of fan boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted DBE Status boolean 10 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Manual Auto 1 Manual OPEN 0 Manual SHUT 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Enter malf msg boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 StLock boolean 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s StBAK delayed integer 18 Z set point 3 0 v
386. peter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 501 Eigenschaften von Internetprotokoll TCP IP el xil A properties window for the internet protocol TCP IP Allgemein opens Click on the Use following IP address option IP Einstellungen k nnen automatisch zugewiesen werden wenn das 9 H Netzwerk diese Funktion unterst tzt Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an den Netzwerkadministrator um die geeigneten IP Einstellungen zu beziehen C IP Adresse automatisch beziehen fe Folgende IP Adresse verwenden IP Adresse 132 168 O 30 Subnetzmaske 255 255 Dep 0 Standardgateway O DNSSER Eradresse automatisch beziehen Folgende DNS Serveradressen verwenden Bevorzugter DNS Server Alternativer DNS Server I Erweitert Abbrechen Enter the relevant IP address e g 192 168 0 30 and the appropriate sub network mask e g 255 255 255 0 For the example above the DDC4000 s IP address may only contain 192 168 0 xxx for communication to be established After changing a firmly assigned IP address the laptop must be restarted DDC4000 settings In the DDC4000 the IP address and sub network mask must be adapted in the following parameters xx central unit 000 Module Module 000 00 plant plant 0 00 group group 0 SY_Network 01 Object index EtIPAddr Parameter IP address EtMask Parameter Sub network mask EtActive Parameter switc
387. position in automatic operation Z influence set point forced control or manual influence i e from the input with the highest active priority Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the output Y to 0 malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock malfunction catch If Unlock malfunction catch is not connected any malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the trouble shooting is stopped p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung pi vveiterverarbeitetes Signal vveiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung m St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e gt Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM Malfunction s occurring stCEC Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 319 HVVO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter StLock
388. positiv i i J Xs eingestellter Sollwert Gleitende lt Gleitanfang F hrungsgr e Set point movement from 20 C to 25 C 5K glide range AT from 22 C to 32 C 10K EF Influence guidance signal 5K 10K 0 5 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 141 The DDC sub software object set point glide not only works on the XSactual but also moves the supply air min limitation of the cascade if parameter 5207 gliding cascade is set to YES Note On the PID basic program for active set point glide the current set point XS current is overwritten Priorities If in addition to the basic program the DDC sub menu cascade is also working the supply air min limit is moved by the same amount at the same time if parameter 5207 gliding cascade is set to yes If in addition to the basic program the DDC sub menu set point switching is also operational than only the set point switching is operational Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5250 Lead size SG actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted float 5251 Anf set point infinity infinity 22 Slide start SG float 5252 End set point infinity infinity 32 Slide end SG float 5253 EF set point 10 10 0 5 EF SG float 5254 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA sliding boolean 5255 Delta actual value infinity infinity O De
389. ptimieren Temperaturbedingungen 4 3 106 mn kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 107 5332 TAgrenz AF TA lt TAgrenz AF N gt lt oder gt TAundefiniet _ nein 5103 TA Es N a Regelung Se Nacht im Automatikbetrieb i ber ein Zeitprogramm nein AUS durch Fern AUS _oder Z Kontakt AUS lt Ende y a Anfahrschaltung Anfahrschaltung wird gt freigegeben 1022 Anfahren B 1 v Heizventil ffnet 3 Verfahrzeit 100 gt gt 5335 ffnungszeit 00 5331 Ziel Anfahr Y 100 _R cklaufthermometer Vorhanden2 lt _ 9 gt 5333 F hler R ck angeschlossen nein R cklauftemperatur T ja v h 4 x Warten bis Temperatur 5334 Grenz T R ck AF erreicht yY gt Warten auf Zeit 5336 Freigabeverz gerung y Anlage ein gt 1011 Anlage EIN 1 _ Regelung gt lt innerhalb von 3 nein 1012 Regelung EIN Minuten ein y Anfahren ya abbrechen Sto freier pn bergang zum Ventil zu 0 8 gt Regelbetrieb 5331 Ziel Anfahr Y a mb re Anlage bleibt ein gt W hrend Zeit PID Regler IOT1 Anlage EIN arbeitet al P Regler mit 1 K gt gt Regelabvveichung und gt gt Par 5337 Strukturverz gerung min doppeltem 1011 Anlage EIN 1 Proportionalbereich E 1022 Anfahren 0 Y _ Ende Anfahrschaltung
390. r defining when a plant message is created you must still define where and how it is displayed For this a reference is entered on a s g message set see below in parameter 1 MSet Re 2 Up to 20 message sets system object SY_MesgOut can be defined and these define separately from the message where and how messages are processed Plant messages Plant messages are produced by the plant automatically Plant messages can only be displayed on the relevant central unit they are not transmitted to other central units Certain groups of messages can be suppressed or displayed to facilitate trouble shooting Potential groups of plant messages Central unit hardware Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 474 modules of CAN buses Ethernet bus central bus 4 4 2 1 3 Message memory SY_MsgMan Function summary n x settable This object is used as to save messages When starting the plant in 000 00 00 the object SY_MsgMan 01 of this type is created All messages are attached to parameter 103 akt Anz Meld Function description If the maximum number of messages is reached a new message pushes out the message with the lowest priority For this the following priority rules apply Priority class Message status Display on DDC4000 screen 1 High incoming not quit red flashing triangle 2 incoming quit red constant triangle 3 outgoing not quit green flashing triangle
391. r the 1st target sequence 5521 YS1 Beg 5522 YS1 End for the second target sequence 5527 YS2 Beg 5528 YS2 End The result is sequences 5537 YS1 and 5538 YS2 For YS1 and YS2 a fixed min and max limit 5524 YS1 min 5526 YS1 Max 5530 YS2 Min 5532 YS2 Max can be set It is also possible to create variable limits for all starting and end values 5521 5522 5527 5528 as well as for all min and max values 5524 5526 5530 5532 by setting analog sources An analogue source has priority over the fixed entered value e if the source is valid the value of the source is operational otherwise the fixed value Via a binary source 5536 Q EA Notreg Sequ the function of a sequence object can be switched to the uncontrolled condition A status is assigned to the YS1 and YS2 outputs via parameter5535 Notreg Sequ In the uncontrolled condition the min max limits continue to work There is the option of setting fixed values externally for the two sequences YS1 and YS2 For this the operating parameters are available via BMS 44305 BMS Y1 and 44306 BMS Y2 as well as manual operation 7855 manual Y 1 and 7856 manual Y2 The manual operation has a higher priority than the BMS operation The min max limits can be overwritten with the BMS or manual operation Priorities 1 manual operation manual Y1 manual Y2 2 BMS operation BMS Y1 BMSY2 3 Automatic control Q Sequ Example Classification of an analog signal to 40 of the fist target sequ
392. rameter parameter typ min max init unit 5000 Zustand actual value 10 0 value text State multistate 0 Off 1 Pre lowering 2 Lowering 3 Interim heating 4 Heating up 5 Previous 6 Regulations day 7 Regulations night 8 Economy 9 Standby Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 155 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5102 Q Reg actual value infinity infinity deleted C Source controlled variable deletable float 5103 QTA actual value infinity infinity deleted C Source TA deletable float 5105 xw actual value infinity infinity O K XW float 5106 tN set point deletable 1 99 3 min tN integer 5115 Q N actual value deleted State N deletable text 5120 XPY1 set point 0 5 999 9 50 K XPY1 float 5125 D set point deletable 1 299 deleted s Vorhalt integer 5128 xwh set point 0 50 0 K xwh float 5141 Y1min set point 0 100 0 Y1 min float 5145 Y1max set point 0 100 100 Y1 max float 5151 TVSakt actual value infinity infinity 0 C TVSoll current float 5152 RegNach set point 0 Regulate with TA boolean 5153 TAvz set point infinity infinity O C TAvz float 5155 EF set point 0 10 1 5 EF float 5156 KH set point 100 100 0 K KH integer 5160 TARed set point deletable 50 30 deleted C TA Reduction in
393. rameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5720 WMNG Sensor warm actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C float 5721 WMNG Sensor kalt actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C float 5722 Impulse in B actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer 5723 Volume current actual value 0 9999999 0 m h float 5724 Heat power B actual value 0 100000000 0 kW float 5725 Amount of heat B set point 0 infinity 0 kWh float 5726 Delta VV set point 0 infinity 0 kWh Delta amount of heat B float 5727 amount of water set point 0 infinity 0 m float 5728 Delta amount of water set point 0 infinity 0 m float 5729 Scaling B set point 0 1 999 9 1 float 5730 Scaling B Exp set point 3 3 0 integer 5731 Q Reset amount of heat B actual value deletable deleted boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter 4 3 225 Softvvare structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5732 Q Reset amount of water actual value deletable deleted boolean 5733 EAWB actual value deletable deleted WmCalcEA boolean Formulas Q V p cP DT heat volume Water volume 1 16 DTemperature Q heat volume in kWh V Volume water volume in m p Density of water 1000 kg m cP heat capacity 1 16 Wh kg K DT DTemperature sensor warm sensor cold in K Version 0
394. rating status operating message steam moistening unit the target operating status requests steam moistening unit and the output Status command execution check Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Ansteuersignal an die Hardware Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Bsz Uberwachungszeit Bst tBAK Riickmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK x HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Anf Control signal from the object Bsz BM acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Anf Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling 4 3 279 If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch A neighboring fault SM may not influence the control of outputY 1 fault blocked 0 2 sets the output Y to 0 and Anf to 0 Fault blocked 1 If a fault sets the output Y to 0 this can only be reset by activating the Unlock fault catch If unlock fault catch is not wired neighboring faults are not saved i e if the fault disappears the fault handling disappears Switching priorities The function block supplies an output signal Target setting steam moistening unit Priority Parameter Value Action
395. ration In addition it is also possible to select the desired plant very quickly with the aid of the plant indicator shown in the middle of the screen Via log in each user can be registered on the DDC Central Unit Depending on the code level entered this enables changes to the set points and times If one of the plant sensors located centrally on the screen is pressed the first switch page is opened This page contains the name that the group has in the DDC All binary information that have a tick under visualization in the PS4000 planning tool are found under this title e g delivery air fan Switch groups or LEDs are blend correspondingly If not all switches LEDs etc can be depicted on the first page it is possible to scroll forward using the arrow keys Version 05 06 Kleback neter Operation Introduction to operation 2 1 10 Anlagen schalten Zuluftventilator C2 Stufe 1 DN The formation of the Values page s is similar All parameters that are also selected for visualization in the PS4000 planning tool are displayed in succession e g current and set points If times have been installed in a plant e g weekly program these are offered for selection and editing via the times button As the depiction is set in the DDC Central Unit a change to the visualization regulations can only be made via the PS4000 planning tool The page settings are generated here and stored as a data backup T
396. ration Delay automatic start It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation Pump hunting The transfer from bypass to FC operation can be equipped with a delay RzByFu this delay only works in automatic operation Pump blocking protection The function block includes the pump block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LzPBS operating time this function does not work The pump blocking protection switches the FC mode Y on with a fixed set point of 10 The pump blocking protection only switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time and automatic operation is activated Blocking protection active is set to 1 in this time The function block delivers an output signal request control that switches when the pump output and not the Blocking protection active is due Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the pump can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting Operating hours are counted in bypass and FC operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 405 Aneen ana Betriebsmeldung g BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Rese
397. rature occurs When starting up a different basic time setting can be set Outputs Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 165 setzt e Bssht IM Optimierung Zuischenheizen 007 Autheizen Aufleizern 10 Aischenheizen Regeln Tag IM Kassel Anforderung 104 Regeln Tag 0S Regeln Nacht Pre lovvering lower intermediate heating and heating are used to set the internal output 1006 Optimization If the heating circuit is in heating mode the internal 1007 heating output is set For intermediate heating the internal output 1010 intermediate heating is active In the heating day regulation night rules and intermediate heating modes the internal output 1003 boiler request is set The preset status is a quasi day rule mode all outputs are reset Neither 1006 Optimization nor 1004 day rules is active In preset 5151 TStarget 5105 XWcurrent and 5173 YH1 regulate how the rules in day rules work In pre lowering or lower the actuating signal 5173 YH1 is set to 0 Special features A forced extraordinary heating process chimney sweep via the Z influence Z03 Heating can falsify the TAUup Adaption if this lasts longer than 40 minutes By deactivating the DDC sub menu Optimization for a short time or changing the 5563 TAUup Adapt NO parameter you can avoid adaption malfunctions Version 05 06 Kleb
398. rces are parameterized These inputs initiate a regulation in the software objects links are processed in the hardware objects The output signals are then sent to the terminals via PIN objects Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Basic functions 4 2 62 4 2 Basic functions 4 2 1 central unit address Netzwerkkonfiguration Wer bin ich Wer bin ich Wo finde ich die anderen 1 SY Config SY_Network SY_Hosts TCP P TCP IP Adresse Adressen Zentralenname zB z B 192 168 0 3 1 192 168 0 1 2 192 168 0 2 DDC4000 Zentrale 3 4 2 2 Time administration Please refer to the user manual for entering and operating the time control the description is written here from the object perspective 4 2 2 1 S118 Schedule Activation Function summary Mit Hilfe des Software Objektes SO ScheduleSE ist es m glich sowohl t glich wiederkehrende Ereignisse Wochenprogramme als auch einmalige Zeitpunkte Sondernutzungszeiten zu beschreiben Der Zeitplan besitzt eine Schaltzeittabelle die die Schaltzeiten aller Ausg nge z B Regler Schalter verwaltet Ein Eintrag in dieser Liste besteht aus dem Wochentag Mo So der Uhrzeit im Format hh mm 00 00 23 59 einer Liste von Ausg ngen die dieser Eintrag beeinflussen soll sowie den Wert den jeder in der Liste befindliche Ausgang annehmen soll Die einzelnen Schaltzeitpunkte k nnen jedoch nur durch eine Bedienoberfl che angezeigt editiert oder gel scht w
399. re To operate and project a DDC4000 central unit you only need a network connection and Internet explorer No plug in or additional programs are required The usual port 80 is used for communication As a result of the Internet integration access is possible from almost anywhere in the world checked controls for plant elements The hardware objects commented later provide all the usual functions to control the common plant parts such as pumps valves burners etc The processing of many functions such as operating hour counting and command execution check has already been integrated and is ready for use 2 CAN buses for each DDC4000 central station each can be switched as a control cabinet or field bus Both CAN buses can be used as either a field bus or control cabinet bus This permits higher flexibility for utilizing resources Many of the known bus devices from the DDC3000 system can still be used new modules will receive additional functions Switch modules on the touch screen With the depiction of switches lamps and values you can easily and effectively implement the individually produced manual operating level separate customer and service interface The service interface is separate from the intuitive operating interface It provides a structured and fast access to all functions The complete plant functionality can be produced or changed from this interface Integration in the planning tool For fast and effective DDC4000 proj
400. re difference is placing the control variable sensor in the room This limit function prevents temperature layers in high cold rooms or halls For an unlimited increase in temperature difference between supply air and room the cooler heavier air in the lower part of the room would act as an air cushion that is not penetrated by the warmer lighter supply air from the ceiling Parameter 5208 Maxdiff can also be set to negative In this case the supply air on 5208 Maxdiff is kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 101 forcibly changed to less than the room temperature This control behavior is for example necessary for operating theatres which require a cooler supply air cone above the operating table Maxdiff therefore influences the cascade s supply air max limit There is a Min selection between supply air max limit and room temperature Maxdiff Parameter 5209 Diff supply air Room presets a difference between the supply air set point and room set point The maximum limit for the supply air has priority over the limitation of the temperature difference between supply air and room Internal loads and constant heat requests would create a permanent difference to the room set point This constant difference would require cooler or warmer supply air to remain constant To prevent this a difference value between the supply air temperature and room temperature can be set Example Zuluft Raum If parameter 5209 Diff
401. re structure Y Stillstand 100 i 80 60 40 7 20 Objects XP StilstReg Regelfunktion wirksam ab i TA lt TAgrenz Frost 0 10 20 XS R ck 30 40 C 50 Q R ckF hr SR _ 4 3 123 Using the binary source in the Q_EA Standstill parameter the object s function can be switched on off Priorities If no outside temperature sensor and no return temperature sensor is installed Set the standstill regulation does not take place If several standstill controls work on one and the same Y output the following priority applies Priority Function Highest Standstill 1 Standstill 2 lowest Standstill 3 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5371 1 Ziel set point 4 0 value text Y standstill multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5372 1 b_r actual value deletable 50 150 deleted Q back sensor SR float 5373 1 TAg set point 0 20 3 C TA limit Frost float 5374 1 XSr set point 2 50 10 C XS back float Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5375 1 XP set point 0 5 200 10 C XP standstill reg float 5376 1 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA standstill reg boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max i
402. red malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m anliegende St rung E anliegende St rung _ Tl ooo Tl vveiterverarbeitetes Signal vveiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signale Son I ma Hardware Ansteuerung Hardware Ansteuerung HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter ResSM Release malfunction catch SM1 and SM2 Malfunction s occurring stCEC1 and stCEC2 StLock Malfunction blocked AnfPK Hardware control signal reg BriOn Br2On Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Status control switch priorities Objects 4 3 369 The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs AnfAuto Z Off Level 1 Level 2 DOL Manual Off Level 1 Level 2 Zw Off Level 1 Level 2 SM1 and SM2 Parameter Value Impact Highest priority SM1 SM2 Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep Request pump cover 0 Request regulation 0 Burner level 1 on 0 Burner level 2 on 0 Manual Level 2 Zw Level 2 Request pump cover 1 Request regulation 1 If nec activate burner level 1 and level 2 without Delay12 Manual Level 1 Zw Leve
403. refore a choice is to be made as to whether the cooling takes place using the cooling register or whether any cool outside air is available that can be used for cooling Then for example the air covers are switched appropriately Example In line with the control status heating is to take place Therefore a choice is made as to whether the heating register is used for heating or whether any warm outside air may be used Then the air covers are switched as appropriate Function description The two analog values required for selecting the energy can be chosen freely as required However they must be analog values with the same unit e g two temperatures or two humidities To release the switch function the analog value 5231 Source ESelection 2 must be larger than the analog value 5230 Source ESelection 1 If the difference of the two values is larger than the set point 5235 ESelcet Difference the following switching functions are carried out m The effect of the Y output signals selected in parameter 5232 Inv ESelection is inverted The internal output 1023 Energy selection is set If the different between the two analog values is less than the set point ESelect Difference by the return difference Xsd Energy selection the Y output signals and the internal output 123 Energy selection are returned to their original status Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 126 Funktion aktiviert Q Eausw 22 n
404. register from freezing when the fans stand still To do so from a particular outside temperature the return temperature of the heating register is controlled separately Function description The DDC sub software object is operational when the PID basic program has the status Control ON 12 0 The outside temperature recorded in the basic PID program with source parameter source TO is compared with the limiting value set in TOlimit Frost As soon as the outside temperature falls below this value a separate P control works on the PID control circuit s Y output set in parameter Y standstill The connected heating valve start to open If no outside temperature sensor is installed set in the PID basic program the standstill control function is always active when Control ON is 12 0 The separate P control for the heating valve regulates using a set point XS return and a proportional range XP StillstReg The return temperature with the temperature sensor set in source parameter Q return SR is recorded as the current value for the P control If no return temperature sensor is installed Set the Y output is setto 100 If the outside temperature exceeds the value TOlimit Frost or the PID control is switched on 112 1 the control switches back to the original Y signal The Y limits in the basic program Ymin Ymax and sub menu Y limit are not operational It is always controlled from O 100 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Softwa
405. rget TStarget lt TRtarget 5K On TStarget gt TRtarget 2K TStarget gt TRtarget 7K Version 05 06 kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 154 If the DDC software object S318 room correction or S300 optimize heating is installed and active the target room value TRtarget is set in this DDC sub menu TRtarget MIN TR target source room temperature Otherwise the economy function works with a fixed TRtarget 20 C Frost protection The frost protection function is switched on with parameter 5171 frost protection It ensures that the recirculating pump does not switch off outside regular operation at an outside temperature lt 3 C This prevents the heating plant from freezing The recirculating pump is only switched off when the outside temperature exceeds 6 C Pump blocking protection The pump blocking protection is now implemented by hardware objects Set point remote control correction switching For active set point switching by software object S313 set point switching the set points are not switched for day regulation and night rules Only the set point stipulated by the set point switching is operational The current set point is calculated with the following priority Priority Function Highest S313 Set point switch 1 4 S316 Set point remote control S315 Set point correction lowest S239 Basic program heating Parameters No name of pa
406. rnatively sensor failure messages only make sense for registered modules or I O cards If a general failure monitoring is desired for all sensors within the central unit each related Type CO_AnalogInput object should have a FO AnaloginputMessageOutput attached Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 MSet set point deletable deleted Selection MSet text 2 E A set point deletable deleted ON OFF boolean 101 u actual value 0 Signaling output boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure parameterizing 4 4 479 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 102 Status actual value 6 0 value text internal Status multistate 0 Start 1 1 Logon running 2 Logged on 3 Logoff running 4 Logged off 5 Feedback running 201 Delay set point 1 3600 600 s Delay integer 202 MTxt actual value 5 0 value text Message text multistate 0 OK 1 Malfunction 2 Short circuit 3 Sensor break 4 wrong poles 4 4 2 1 7 Modem configuration SY_ModConf Function summary The modem task provides all communication routes between a DDC4000 centre and the V 24 interface For the DDC4000 message plant it means that the message destinations SMS email fax and BMS can be used by the modem task Function description The configuration of the modem connected to the DDC4000 Centra
407. rogram lowest Q_N Schedule object S118 If no time program is assigned to the basic heating program day regulation are used Function description extended functions Reducing the start up lowering For particularly low outside temperatures the value for night falling can be reduced automatically in order to avoid excessive room building cooling This ensures that the rooms can be heated up to the target temperature The range for automatically reducing the lower start set point for night rules is stipulated by m the outside temperature from which the fall in supply temperature is no longer completely effective parameter 5160 TO reduction the design temperature for the heating plant parameter 5172 T design If parameter 5160 TO Reduction is deleted no automatic reduction occurs i e the TS reduction TS abs remains fully operational There is no TS reduction if the outside temperature is close to the design temperature of the heating plant 5172 T design In this case the heating continues to to be controlled via the day regulation If TO lt T design TR target 18 then night rules gt day regulation Example Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 153 TVsollA f r Regeln Tag f r Regeln Nacht 20 10 0 10 20 C TA T Auslegung TA Reduzierung wb Bereich gleitend in dem die parametrierte Absenkung des Vorlaufes reduziert wird a
408. rol circuit For this Y set can work repeatediy on the same Y output The address of the binary source is entered in parameter 5327 Q Y SET If the binary source 1 the analog value set in parameter 5326 Y SET value 0 100 is transferred to the Y output Parameter 5325 destination Y SET sets the Y output that is to be influenced For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs For the basic heating program the Y set always works on the heating control for a Y output Priorities Priority Function Highest Manual intervention Central influence Y set Index 01 Y set Index 04 Limitation functions lowest Basic program control function Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Grundprogramm YL1 YL2 YL3 YL4 Y Set YL2 digitale Quelle alel de EL 4 Y SET Wert 40 Q Y SET 001 000 X1 0 Parameters 4 3 176 Parameter 5325 x only applies if used in the GP PIDI No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 1 Ziel1 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5326 1 Wert1 set point 0 100 0 Y set value float 5327 1 Q1 actual value deletable deleted Q Y fix boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5325 2 Ziel2 set point 4 0 value text Destination Y set multistate 1 Y
409. rt float 5286 3 XS set point 50 1150 10 C custom setpoint float 5287 3 Klmin set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 3 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5285 4 Q XS actual value deletable 50 150 deleted C Q Sondersollwert float 5286 4 XS set point 50 1150 0 C custom setpoint float 5287 4 K min set point deletable 0 1 60 deleted K min Q EA custom setpoint float 5288 4 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA custom setpoint boolean Version 05 06 4 3 186 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 187 4 3 2 10 7 S315 Set point correction Activation Sub function of basic heating program and PID 0 can be set once Can be switched on off via 5292 Q EA Target correction if not defined ON Function summary DDC software object S315 address an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read This analog value works as a correction on the DDC control circuit set point Function description Parameter source target correction 0 100 sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system The value range produced by this analog source is interpreted as O 100 Effect like source target
410. ructure Objects 4 3 343 replication occurs in the same way for both final positions but a command execution check is not hovvever effective Valve blocking protection The function block includes the valve block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LzVBS operating time this function does not work The valve blocking protection opens the valve if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time At this time the vbs output is set to 1 Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters for the actual operating status Setting that is formed as described above The target operating status is control valve the output is Status command execution check Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Ansteuersignal S P an die Hardvvare Bsz berwachungszeit Bst tBAK R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware ne BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Y Control signal from the object Bsz Yr acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardw
411. s Motor runtime integer 17 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description In automatic operation the fire protection cover can be controlled using AnfZu If the final position closed is switched and there is no acknowledgement closed 1 after the tCEC has ended the command execution check is carried out stCEC 1 This can be used for example to close the fire protection covers at night e g relevant requirements in Switzerland If AnfZu is not connected the position of the fire protection cover can only be changed using Z manual Zw and AnfTest To switch off the fans etc the SMlot soldered strut contact malfunction message is used Monitoring soldered strut contact If parameter malfunction message soldered strut contact goes to 1 the setting output is set to closed Self test The self test is started if AnfZu is O or is not switched and request self test goes to 1 During the self test display self test is set to running The cover is first moved to control cover 0 The cover is only opened again if there is a acknowledgement Closed 1 for a switched closed parameter or the motor run time tMot and then the tBaktime has run out kiebackeneter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 311 If in this time a malfunction for the command execution check is detected display self test is set to malfunction otherwise it is set to OK a
412. s Ist Zustand dem Betriebs Soll Zustand wieder entspricht Die 0 1 Flanke von FehlerCEC wird um die Zeit VZCEC verz gert ausgegeben siehe Pkt 4 3 3 4 CEC Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 reset set point deletable deleted Reset boolean 2 zeit set point 1 60 10 s Time integer 3 Fehler set point deletable deleted Error input boolean 4 Aktor set point deletable deleted Feedback boolean 4 3 6 6 F006 Damping Function summary This object has parameters that are used for damping the target parameter The calculated new value is entered in the current value of the target parameter Function description Es kann eine Beruhigung eines analogen Signals z B eines Fuhlerwertes realisiert werden Der Parameter tn wirkt dabei wie ein PT1 Glied ndert sich der Wert des Eingangssignals sprunghaft so wird nach der Dampfungszeit eine nderung des Wertes von 63 des urspr nglichen Eingangssprunges erreicht Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 tn set point deletable 1 3600 deleted s tn 63 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 453 4 3 6 7 F007 Delay Function summary This object can be installed on Boolean and multistate parameter types Delays the setting of a value when the mode changes Cl
413. s can be set Function summary The DDC software object S126 MMM storage supplies the maximum value minimum value and average of an analogue source In addition the values determined by the analogue source can be saved for a particular point of time 2165 source MMM plannable source on any analogue value of the DDC4000 system If the source is invalid or deleted the current min max and average values are frozen When the source is valid again the current min max and average values are reset to the current source value The saved values are not affected by this 2166 Max act Maximum value determined since the time of the last reset 2167 Min act Minimum value determined since the time of the last reset 2168 Average act Average value calculated since the time of the last reset 2195 Q storage plannable source on any binary value of the DDC4000 system With the change from 0 to 1 the min max and average values are reset and saved For example the values can be saved for a defined period of time through the use of a time program output Through the use of a timer the saving can be released at regular intervals 2196 Max stor Maximum value at the reset time 2197 Min stor Minimum value at the reset time 2198 Average stor Average value at the reset time 2199 Input stor Current value of the 2165 source MMM at the reset time Version 05 06 Kleback neter
414. s for organizing the order of calculations Spaces are possible Parameter 2152 result depicts the result of the arithmetic calculation This result can be set as the analog source for other arithmetic calculations or a true value 0 or 1 The result is invalid if a source that is not available is set as an operand for division by zero if the calculation overruns With the parameter a binary source is used to switch the execution of the arithmetic calculation If no binary source is set the calculation is constant If this parameter is written with a valid zero the result is set to zero Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2146 Qa actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Arithmetic 1 Source float 2147 Q b actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Arithmetic 2 Source float 2148 Oe actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Arithmetic 3 Source float 2149 Qd actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Arithmetic 4 Source float 2151 Formel set point deletable Formula text 2152 erg actual value infinity infinity 0 RESULT float 2153 Q_EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Arithmatic boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 82 4 3 2 5 S126 MMM storage Activation Sub function of 20 time
415. sBh Resets Bh to 0 x Bh Time in which BhZ was 1 x x gBh Limit value infringement x Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 273 4 3 3 6 Malfunction catch A set malfunction message signal prevents the occurrence of a new malfunction message A malfunction that occurs SM may influence the control of output Y a not malfunction blocked 0 b sets the Y output to 0 or for binary outputs to 0 and if nec Anf to 0 malfunction blocked 1 The malfunction message can be reset with ResSM An important note How does malfunction blocked work The malfunction blocked parameter can be set to yes or no If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM Reset malfunction message Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message Here a link creates a function Parameters Parameter name plain text Description Input Ed Reset is controlled by level indicator Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 274 4 3 3 7 Malfunction message output Malfunction message output SMout Almost all hardvvare objects have a malfunction message output SMout that displays the occurrence of a malfunction from DDC4000 Version 1 2 The output is independent of the status of the command execution check CEC and parameter
416. signal Status control switch priorities The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs Z Off Level 1 Level 2 DOL Manual Off Level 1 Level 2 Zw Off Level 1 Level 2 Rep SM Priority Parameter Value Impact Highest SM Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual open Zw open Rep LOn1 0 LOn2 0 Manual Level 2 Zw Level2 LOn1 0 LOn2 1 Manual Level 1 Zw Level 1 LOn1 1 LOn2 0 Z closed DOL LOn1 0 LOn2 0 ZlLevel 2 LOn1 0 LOn2 1 Z Level 1 LOn1 1 LOn2 0 lowest Auto Automatic operation If request automatic operation level 1 and request automatic operation level 2 are in place level 2 is activated taking switching up delay into account Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 333 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 3 21 H604 fan constant FC bypass Function summary 4 3 334 The fan constant function block controls a fan or motor with an optional bypass switch as per a set point Ytarget and supports Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence repair switch forced control cover contro
417. st auf einem BACnet als Datenpunkt erreichbar wird Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer Z E actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 3 6 15 3 FB_AV analog parameters Function summary Objects 4 3 460 Dieses Objekt soll an Parameter angehangen werden k nnen die ein BACnet Analog Value nach au en repr sentieren Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer Z Zz actual value 0 boolean 4 3 6 15 4 FB BI binary input Function summary Signaleing nge an Ger ten Inputs die zwei diskrete Werte liefern werden in BACnet als Binary Input Objekte abgebildet Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer 4 3 6 15 5 FB_BO binary output Function summary Bin re Zust nde bzw Werte die auf einen Ger teausgang wirken werden in BACnet als Binary Output Objekte repr sentiert Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Objld BACnet Objld set point 0 4194303 0 integer z E actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 kiebac
418. stem Version 05 06 Ethernet communication betvveen the DDC4000 Central Units and BMS The central station communication of the DDC4000 system is implemented over the Ethernet Through the use of current network technology it is possible to connect to the service laptop BMS or customer networks as well as to network various DDC4000 Central Units cost effective If an existing JY St Y cabling is to be used there is still the option of communicating via this traditional telephone cable But for this it is not possible to use the Ethernet s data rate Flexible user friendly user interface The use of a touch screen TFT color display provides a flexible future oriented interface that is easy and intuitive to operate and does not have restrictions for future extensions BACnet native The DDC4000 communicates via the standardized protocol BACnet BACnet operates in the DDC Central Unit down up to the database structure This is called a native BACnet implementation Each parameter is administrated as a BACnet object and for example transported to the BMS This means unproblematic connection to BACnet clients and therefore minimal projecting effort Structured parameterizing By illustrating individual plants and their classification in groups a clearly structured re usable projecting is possible On that ground existing plant elements can be combined with new ones with the lowest effort Remote control via any Windows PC without additional softwa
419. structure Objects 4 3 364 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 11 BhGw set point 0 2147483647 0 h Oper hrs limit value integer 12 BriEin actual value 0 Burner level 1 ON boolean 13 Br2Ein actual value 0 Burner level 2 ON boolean 14 DBE actual value deleted Direct operating level active deletable boolean 15 Hand set point 4 0 value text Manual switch multistate 9 Manual Auto 0 Manual OFF 1 Manual level 1 2 Manual level 2 16 Rep actual value deleted Repare switch deletable boolean 17 ResBh actual value deleted Reset opr hours deletable boolean 18 ResSM actual value deleted Unlock Malfunction catch deletable boolean 19 SF set point deleted Chimneysweep function deletable boolean 20 SFZeit set point 0 300 30 min Continuous chimneysweep function integer 21 SFaktiv actual value 0 Chimneysweep function is active boolean 22 SM1 actual value deleted Malf burner level 1 deletable boolean 23 SM2 actual value deleted Malf burner level 2 deletable boolean 24 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 25 Verz12 set point 0 2147483647 0 min Delay level 1 level 2 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 365 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 26 V
420. t 6947 Power consumption 7 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6948 Power consumption 8 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6949 Power consumption 9 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6950 Power consumption 10 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6951 Power consumption 11 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6952 Power consumption 12 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6953 Power consumption 13 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6954 Power consumption 14 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6955 Power consumption 15 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6956 Power consumption 16 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6957 Power consumption 17 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6958 Power consumption 18 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6959 Power consumption 19 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6960 Power consumption 20 actual value deletable 0 1 10000000 deleted kW float 6961 Priority 1 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6962 Priority 2 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6963 Priority 3 actual value 1 3 1 integer 6964 Priority 4 actual value 1 3 1 integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter
421. t auf 0 I S Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter PuFu or PuBy Control signal BM Operating message ResBh Reset operating hours Bh Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw Set limiting value Bh Operating hours gBh Limiting value exceeded Command execution check Command execution checks refer to command execution check section for description and parameters exist for Target operational status Operating message pump Target operating status Pump FC ON Pump Bypass ON output Status pump command execution check Target operational status Operating message FC Target operating status Request FC control output Status FC command execution check If the actual operating statuses are not switched no corresponding command execution check kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 406 malfunction is signaled stCECorstCECFu Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt Uberwachungszeit S gt an die Hardware Bsz Bst R ckmeldung an von der Hardware Z BAK Status en
422. t multistate 1 20 RBaud 2 40 RBaud 3 80 RBaud Error Error count actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer FP3000 FB3000 Release set point 0 boolean Mode Mode set point 0 boolean RXFrame RX Frames actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer SB3000 SB3000 Release set point 0 boolean TXFrame TX Frames actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 440 Nr Beschreibung 1 AutoAnm Ist dieser Parameter auf true werden alle an diesem Can Bus vorhandenen Module automatisch Angemeldet Ist dieser Parameter false werden nur projektierte Module Angemeldet 2 Baudr Es sind 3 verschiedene Baudraten zul ssig im System hier k nnen f r den CAN Bus diese gew hlt werden 3 Error Errors ist ein Statistik Parameter Er zeigt die Anzahl der vom CAN Controller gemeldeten Fehler an Es ist die Summe der BUS OFFs 4 FP3000 Die Zentrale kann mehrere Protokolle gleichzeitig auf dem CAN Bus bearbeiten hiermit kann die Funktion des DDC3000 Feldbusses EIN oder AUS geschaltet werden 5 RXFrame RX Frames ist ein statistik Parameter Er zeigt die Anzahl empfangener Frames an 6 SB3000 Die Zentrale kann mehrere Protokolle gleichzeitig auf dem CAN Bus bearbeiten hiermit kann die Funktion des DDC3000 Schaltschrankbusses EIN oder AUS geschaltet werden 7 TXFrame TX Frames ist ein statistik Paramet
423. t set point 1 2147483647 120 S Motor runtime integer 30 Stell actual value 3 1 value text Setting OPEN SHUT Running multistate 1 OPEN 0 SHUT 24 Running 31 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Final position replication The final position open final position closed and position feedback signal valve inputs can be wired if required If the position feedback signal valve is wired but not the final position open and final position closed both final positions are determined via the position feedback signal valve If position feedback signal valve lt 3 a closed final position is assumed if position feedback signal valve gt 97 an open final position is assumed otherwise running If the plant in addition to position feedback signal valve is also wired for final position open or final position open these inputs have higher priority If only one of the final position open or final position closed is switched but not position feedback signal valve the final position that is not switched is determined via the motor operating time If e g only final position closed is switched after an open control the Setting output is first set to running and after the end of the Motor operating time set to open If both final position open and final position closed are not switched the final position kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software st
424. t to 1 This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat If then the signal request burner on is set to 1 by the control and operational message pump cover 1 the burner is switched on burner on 1 For operational message pump cover this does not include a command execution check as request pump cover should always be linked to a pump or cover hardware object that contains its own command execution check Chimney sweep function The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the chimney sweep function time span if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the chimney sweep function time span even if the request automatic operation is set to 0 in this time Here the Y signal goes to 100 When the chimney sweep function is activated the chimney sweep function active parameter is set to 1 Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the burner can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output burner on is used for counting Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 382
425. tCEC CEC status stCEC Switching priorities 4 3 390 The function block supplies an output signal Control valve The following input parameters influence the control of this output AnfAuto open closed Z open closed DOL Manual open closed Zw open closed stCEC The statuses Z manual forced and that of the DOL are considered Z closed Manual closed Zw closed or DOL gt reg 0 Priority Parameter Value Action Highest stCEC Refer to Trouble shooting section Manual Closed Zw Closed Control valve closed Manual open Zw open Control valve open Zlclosed DOL Control valve closed Zlopen Control valve open lovvest Auto Automatic operation Status command execution check malfunctions that occur are not reset by non automatic operation kieback neler Software structure Objects 4 3 391 4 3 3 31 H802 Volume flow regulator constant Function summary The volume flow regulator constant function block controls a constant cover with target setting of 0 100 The function block supports Trouble shooting malfunction catch Status control unit using Z influence DOL manual influence forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value d
426. ta restore backup updates DDC4200 00 01 02 4 5 506 Sum Anlage 0 Heizungsal L ftungsanl 01 000 00 00 Gruppe 0 Dy Config 01 SY Modul 01 SY Datsi 01 SY ModConf 01 5Y_Network 01 5Y_Hosts 01 Div Simu 01 SY DSub 01 System Konfigur System Datensicherung Netzwerk Konfig Hosts Simulationwert D SUB Konfig Command is a set point This value is set to 4 in order to force data backup on the front CF compact flash card The status state 6 backup running changes and in procBar you can see the progress from 0 100 Version 05 06 kiebackeneter Software structure Service level data restore backup updates 4 5 507 This value is set to 5 in order to force data file restoration on the front CF compact flash card The status state 7 backup running changes and in procBar you can see the progress from 0 100 For Command 6 a firmware or program update of the card takes place Refer also to software update Bereit Abbruch BACnetAnfrage Datensicherung Datenr cksicherung Frogrammupdate In order to ensure problem free data file restoration a cold start must be carried out before data file restoration AN Please note For data file restoration the planning should be saved as an xml file with the file name Datasave on the CF card Other file names are not considered for data file restoration with the aid ofthe CD card 4 5 2 4 Data format
427. tching At the same time Remaining time to switching is set to limiting value pump switching and starts to count down If the parameter Pump switching is switched in automatic mode and for Zw On the relevant pump is activated depending on the value of the parameter Pump switching 0 gt Pump 1 Pump switching 1 gt Pump 2 The malfunction dependent pump switching is described in the trouble shooting section the input Pump switching has no influence on the malfunction dependent pump switching Priorities for the various pump switchings Highest priority malfunction dependent pump switching parameter dependent pump switching operating time dependent pump switching Lowest priority Switching delays It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation Delay automatic start It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation Pump hunting When switching from Pump 1 On to Pump 2 On or vice versa the pump to be switched on is activated the pump to be switched off still operates for the overlay time so as to prevent a fall in pressure when building up the pressure in the pump that is to be switched on Pump blocking protection The function block includes the pump block protection function If the value 0 is entered for the LZPBS operating time this function does not work The pump blocking protection is only activated when neither of the two pumps is running at the s
428. tection function If the value O is entered for the LzPBS operating time this function does not work The pump blocking protection switches the pump on with a fixed set point Y of 10 The pump blocking protection only switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time and automatic operation is activated Blocking protection active is set to 1 in this time The function block delivers an output signal request control that switches when the pump output and not the Blocking protection active is due Operating hours limiting value The pump operating hours can be counted the operating time counter can not be preset but rather is only adopted by the pump hardware The operating hours counter can be occupied with a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 412 Note The parameter names of the operating hours counter are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters for the actual operating status Operating message pump Target operating status Pump ON output Status command execution check Ifthe actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC Release malfunction catc
429. tection sensor at low temperatures Note In addition the return sensor can be delayed with a attenuation to slow down the menu Priorities If the heating valve s Y output is controlled at the same time by regulating the basic program the larger setting signal always takes effect i e a MAX selection operates automatically Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5351 Y set point 4 0 value text Cont frost protection multistate 1 for Y1 2 for Y2 4 for Y3 8 for YA 5352 b_r actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q back sensor SF float 5353 Begin open set point 0 50 12 C float 5354 End open set point 0 50 7 C float 5355 deltaSlide begin opening set point deletable infinity infinity deleted K float 5356 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA Frost prot Cont boolean Calculation Start opening lt Q return sensor CF Y constant Frost protection Y min End opening lt Q return sensor CF lt Start opening Y constant Frost protection start opening Q return sensor CF start opening end opening Y max Y min Y min Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 119 Q return sensor CF lt End opening Y constant Frost protection Y max Start opening NEW Start opening deltaglide start opening Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4
430. ted from the value of the change in the Y output and the motor operating timestMotAuf or tMotZu The hardware object can be used for 3 point actuators with and without position feedback signal If no position feedback signal is available the input values final position open or final position CLOSED are analyzed for the synchronization When the final positions are reached for entered sources for open and close final positions the drive moves to stop until it receives a command in the opposite direction lt 97 or gt 3 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 Ysoll actual value 0 100 0 Setp valve automatic float 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 100 deleted Sevo feedback valve float 5 Yist actual value 0 100 0 Position display float 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp setting of valve float 7 YAuf actual value 0 OPEN Impulse boolean 8 YZu actual value 0 CLOSED Impulse boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted Forced control boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 350 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 10 Hand set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence inte
431. teger 5165 TVmin set point 0 999 20 C TV min integer 5166 TVmax set point 0 999 95 C TV max integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 156 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5167 TVabs set point 999 0 12 K TV abs integer 5168 TAvz set point 1 99 24 h Time constant TAvz integer 5169 TAm actual value infinity infinity 0 C TA middle float 5170 Eco set point 0 Economy boolean 5172 Ausleg set point 50 0 12 C T Configuration integer 5173 Y actual value 0 100 0 YH1 float 5175 QFern actual value 4 0 value text Source remote control multistate 9 Auto 1 Source remote day 35 Source remote night 0 Source remote OFF 5182 Put set point 0 30 20 min Pumps return flow integer 5183 TVSoll e actual value infinity infinity deleted C TV Set ext deletable float 7801 h Y1 set point deletable 0 100 deleted Manual influence Y1 float i004 Tag actual value 0 Regulate day boolean i005 Nacht actual value 0 Regulate night boolean i006 Opt actual value 0 Optimize boolean i007 Aufh actual value 0 Heating boolean i009 Aus actual value 0 Control condition AUS boolean i010 ZHeiz actual value 0 Intermediate heating boolean i019 Eco actual value 0 Economy boolean Version 05 06 Kleback
432. ter 5698 calculation interval Basis 1 minute Each counting value change is firmiy assigned a heat volume parameters 5693 Scaling A and 5694 Scaling A Exp The max counting frequency depends on the hardware input pulse counting or digital input For example the output of a counting object F015 FO Count can be used as a source for the counting input But it is also possible to link the counting value of any binary plant parameter as a source refer to FSource documentation 0 24 kWh Impulse Zzahlvert in A H rmemenge A 3 OD D4 Ah 1 TU DA Ah 27 0 04kVVh 0 1 2 3 tin min Example e g Scaling A 4 and Scaling A EXP 2 means 4 x 10 2 0 04 kWh is added for each pulse The result appears in parameter 5690 heat volume A based on vvith the unit RVVh The unit can be changed Via a 0 1 flank of the binary source parameter 5696 Q Reset heat volume A the 5691 Delta heat volume A counted to date is reset to 0 The 1 0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5691 Delta heat volume A counting again We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 219 The calculated volumes of 5690 heat volume A and 5691 Delta heat volume A can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source 5697 Q EA p
433. ter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Auf actual value deletable deleted End pos OPEN boolean 2 Zu actual value deletable deleted End pos SHUT boolean 3 AnfAuto actual value deletable deleted Begin Automatic boolean 4 Yr actual value deletable 0 130 deleted Sevo feedback valve float 6 Y set point 0 Valve actuation boolean 9 DBE actual value deletable deleted Direct operating level active boolean 10 Hand set point 3 0 value text Manual influence multistate 9 Manual Auto 1 Manual OPEN 0 Manual SHUT 14 ResSM actual value deletable deleted Unlock malfunction catch boolean 16 StSperr set point 0 Malfunction blocked boolean 17 VzBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s StBAK delayed integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 342 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 18 Z set point 3 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 1 Z OPEN 0 Z SHUT 19 Zw set point 3 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Forced Auto 1 Forced OPEN 0 Forced SHUT 21 StzVBS set point 0 1440 720 min Start time blocking prot float 22 LzVBS set point 0 1440 5 min Run time blocking prot float 24 vbs actual value 0 Blocking prot active boolean 25 stBAK actual value 0 Status Bak boolean 26 tBAK set point 0 infinity 30 s TimeBAK float 27 tMo
434. ter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3 4 40 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit ConfigWA H O Typ set point 3 0 value text Water counter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum 2 Allmeas ISWZ ConfigWM WMZ Typ set point 2 0 value text Heat counter type multistate 0 Standard 1 Standard Maximum Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Plant components and bus systems Field bus 3 5 41 3 5 Field bus 3 5 1 General 3 5 2 Modules The field bus modules of the DDC 3000 system are integrated step by step into the DDC4000 system They are subject to the same connection conditions and wiring guidelines These modules only understand an address assignment up to 63 The circular or intranet state which modules have already been integrated Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure 4 42 4 Software structure 4 Software Structure un a 42 4 1 General backgrsund na 48 QUE ING WPRABERNERRREHRELDERPEENDHELETFEFENLPENPENDILUENDERTELFELRSBLTUEERINEEDELLE SEBIEERESPEBENIERTDIENFUDELEBERLDETPEIEREREEERERTN 48 421 121 Addressing examples au ae aiia i raaa a AA A aa aaia 53 4 1 2 Parameter DES srein inona a aaa EA AAE EE EEA E A AEE RAEE 56 4 1 3 Object pDrincples eee 60 4 2 Basic leed 1 1 SEPAPPRREPPEHRHRBRER APPEEFUFSDERFERERTEREREEEHESFERERE
435. tered for the LZPBS operating time this function does not work The pump blocking protection switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time Start time block and automatic operation is activated Status blocking protection is set to 1 in this time Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 397 Y Startzeit Pumpenblockierschutz StzPBS Betriebsart AUTO und PU 0 Pu 1 pbs 1 y kein PBS Pu 1 f r Laufzeit LzPBS y Pu 0 pbs 0 l Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the pump can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded the parameter limiting value infringement is set If the input for the pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting When setting the Reset operating hours parameter the operating hour value is setto 0 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 398 y y Betriebsmeldung BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet A Ansteuersignal berwachte Gr e Reset nesan auf 0 Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler gt gt gt gt gt Set stunden Bh Bh auf Wert vergen Grenzwert RX _ berschritten gBh Set BhGW auf Wert Grenzwert Command ex
436. the 5185 Reset parameter can reset an adapted heating curve or a heating curve with user defined sites back to its original process WARNING If 5185 Reset ON no adaption takes place The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source 5693 Q EA Adapt HKL If no binary source is set the function is always ON Priorities The feed lowering 5167 TS abs set in the basic heating program also works for the TStarget of the adaptive heating curve in the night rules status Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5180 TRsoll set point infinity infinity 20 C TR set float 5184 Hkla erl actual value deletable deleted Adaption allowed boolean 5185 Res HKLa actual value deletable deleted Reset boolean 5381 QRt actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted C Q room probe float 5630 TV 20 set point 50 150 20 C TV 20 float 5631 TV 15 set point 50 150 33 5 C TV 15 float 5632 TV 10 set point 50 150 41 C TV 10 float 5633 TV5 set point 50 150 48 5 C TV5 float 5634 TVO set point 50 150 56 C TVO float 5635 TV 5 set point 50 150 63 5 C TV 5 float 5636 TV 10 set point 50 150 71 C TV 10 float 5637 TV 15 set point 50 150 78 5 C TV 15 float 5638 TV 20 set point 50 150 86 C TV 20 float 5639 EA actual value delet
437. there The Sy_Network object contains all parameters that are important fO1 000 00 00 for TCP IP communication Gruppe 0 av Modula System o Datei Datensicherung Sr_Netw ork 01 Netzwerk Kong GV _Hosts 01 Hosts SY Dimu D Simulation wert av MsgMan 59 Meldespeicher of Printer 01 Drucker ov _User 01 Benutzergruppe 10000888888 Funde Version 05 06 Kleback neter Plant components and bus systems central unit bus Ethernet 3 2 18 The selection vvhich of TCP IP interfaces are to be set is made mi AQOO O0 00 5 wv Network OU here The following are available for selection Ethernet RS485 a Wale Fonny ta JY St Y and RS232 modem Gateway Gateway Adr 192 168 1 100 If you type in the middle column Port Port 50 the relevant parameters are displayed CEth 01 L CR5465 01 L CRS2J32 01 L The address is made up of 3 components 01700000r0075 _Network 017CEth 01 1 The first two numbers 2 the sub network preset to 1 for Ethernet 2 for RS485 and 3 IP substring 169 254 for RS232 Netz 10 3 central control unit address Aktiv 1 The active IP address is made IPAdrakt 189 254 10 1 up or this In the IPAdrSet you can also MAC Adr 00 06 64 00 00 64 state an independent number This is required for example if on mm cn Co ru Broadcast 132 168 1 250 the last number shall be gt 99 Mack 25 200 200 IFAdrset Function summary This object contains the setting
438. third party heating or the room s storage behavior even before the end of the usage time The calculation as to whether early switching off is possible is activated when TR gt TRtarget 2K Advance switching off takes place if the Cooling time gt the remaining usage time The cooling time is the period in which the room cools to the TRtargettemperature The heating switches on again Day regulation if TR lt TRtarget The advance lowering can be permitted or prohibited using the 5565 Advlow parameter Interim heating Interim heating is used in lowering operation if the temperature falls below the lowering temperature 5181 TRmin The intermediate heating status is quitted again if TR gt TRmin 1 K transfer from intermediate heating after falling if TR gt TRmin 3 K if the time to the next usage time is still more than 12 hours AND the difference TRtarget TRminis gt 6 K transfer from intermediate heating and lovvering if TO lt T design TRtarget 18 K transfer from intermediate heating to Heating if the time span to the next usage time is lower than the calculated heating time transfer from intermediate heating to heating TAUup Adaption The parameter 5560 TAUup describes the temperature increase in K per hour when heating the building TAUup is a relatively long term average value for the building physics facts building constants and is stated in the basic setting at 0 420
439. ting and ventilation basic program 0 can be set 4 x Can be switched on off via 5319 Q EA Y limitation if not linked ON Function summary The DDC software object S301 Y limitation influences the min or max limits of the Y outputs for the DDC control circuits basic program A difference is to be made between two influence options that can jointly affect the basic function of the DDC control circuits 1 Depending on a limitation factor the Y outputs Y min or Y max set in the basic program for the DDC control circuits are altered The influence on the Y min or Y max occurs after the limitation factor reaches a particular limiting value For the MAX limit the limiting value must have exceeded the limiting value for the MIN limit the limitation factor must be below the limiting value so as to influence the setting range of the Y outputs By inverting the Y limit YES NO the direction of influencing the Y setting range is stipulated 2 In addition to the functions stated in 1 the limiting value of the limitation factor can itself glide in a particular range l e depending on the outside temperature basic program the limiting value of the limitation factor is also changed Function description Re 1 The limitation factor is set in parameter 5311 source Y limitation Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set The Y limitation influences the Y output parameterized on parameter 5310 Y limit on The DDC sub m
440. tion of the sub menu can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Status 0 Q EA TargetRemote If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Grundprogramm DDC Regelkreis akt Sollwert Sollwertferneinsteller digitale Quelle Of 0 Stellgr e 0 100 Q Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 191 Priorities If in addition to the DDC software object set point remote control a DDC software object set point switching and or set point correction is active the following priorities apply Priority Function Highest S313 1 Set point switch 1 S313 2 Set point switch 2 S313 3 Set point switch 3 S313 4 Set point switch 4 S316 Set point remote control lowest S315 Set point correction Example 5261 Start remote 5262 End remote 5265 XS remote control at 0 100 value change 10 C 25 C 10 C 25 C 20 rF 80 rF 20 rF 80 rF 0 mBar 5 mBar 0 mBar 5 mBar Note Basic heating program The DDC submenu set point correction only works for day regulation The set point correction influences RH parallel movement of heating curve if the DDC softvvare object S318 room correction or S300 optimization is not active TStarget correction XS remote control End remote start remote actuating variable 100 start remote TStarg
441. tions that occur SM1 or SM2 or stCEC1 or stCEC2 may influence the control of the outputs Pump 1 ON and Pump 2 ON as follows a switches the pump that is not currently being used malfunction blocked 0 b switches the outputs Pump 1 ON and Pump 2 ON off malfunction blocked 1 The switch due to a malfunction only occurs in automatic mode or for Zw On When switching to the pump that is not currently being used the pump operating at the time of the malfunction is switched off after the end of the overlay time If the malfunction is resolved SM1 or SM2 and stCEC1 or stCEC2 returns again to 0 the pump requested at this time refer to parameter dependent pump switching or operational hours pump switching is re used to reset to this If the malfunction switches off the outputs Pump 1 ON and Pump 2 On this can only be reset by activating the release malfunction catch Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 419 If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet m gt anliegende St rung E anliegende St rung IL TI vveiterverarbeitetes Signal vveiterverarbeitetes Signal Entriegelung St rungsselbsthaltung gt gt St rung sperrt 1 zus tzlich Signal e Signal e gt
442. to the parameters e g a connection terminal for a BMD In this for example a contact connection can be set as an input or output Please note A screw number i e a number of the physical contact connection e g on a BMD must not be the same as the PIN number A PIN is not a physical but rather a logical contact connection Example Screw 4 is PIN no 1 because screws 1 to 3 are for the CAN bus The following table lists examples of sub objects Value Notes CAI Analog input CAO Analog output CDI Digital input CDO _ Digital output Address element lt Parameter gt The parameter is a property of an object or sub object An object or sub object comprises one or more parameters whose values influence the behavior of the object sub object For this the parameter must be unique in its object sub object The parameter is an alphanumeric chain of characters e g 5891 b or TAUdown Address element lt Function object Index gt Parameters may contain function objects that change them or extend their function A function object may occur several times under a parameter The unique nature of the function object within the parameter is guaranteed by an index So for example you can attach to parameter Source outside kleback neter Version 05 06 Software structure General background 4 1 53 temperature 5103 in the basic heating program a Source FSource function object in or
443. tons AUTO OFF Manual Level 1 Level 2 Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 4 Schaltern Zustand Taste 1 AUTO Zustand Taste 2 AUS Zustand Taste 3 HAND STUFE 1 Zustand Taste 4 HAND STUFE 2 Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 4 0 value text Switch Status multistate 9 AUTO 0 OFF 1 MANUAL ON LEV 1 2 MANUAL ON LEV 2 s 01 s 01 set point 1 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 OFF boolean s 03 s 03 set point 0 MANUAL ON LEV 1 boolean Version 05 06 4 3 430 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit s 04 s 04 set point 0 MANUAL ON LEV 2 boolean 4 3 4 13 BO S_42 4 Push buttons AUTO DAY NIGHT OFF Function summary Eine Schaltergruppe mit 4 Schaltern a Zustand Taste 1 AUTO Zustand Taste 2 Fern Tag a Zustand Taste 3 Fern Nacht a Zustand Taste 4 Fern Aus Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit h hand actual value 4 0 value text Switch Status multistate 9 Remote Auto 0 Remote OFF 1 Remote Day 35 Remote Night s 01 s 01 set point 1 AUTO boolean s 02 s 02 set point 0 DAY boolean s 03 s 03 set point 0 NIGHT boolean s 04 s 04 set point 0 OFF boolean
444. tructure 4 43 4 3 2 9 15 S315 Set point correction nn nnnnnnennnennannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 142 4 3 2 9 16 S316 Set point remote Control 145 4 3 2 9 17 S317 XP switching EE 148 4 3 2 10 S239 Basic e Enn e ET 150 4 3 2 10 1 Graphical summaries cece cee ce cece cece cece cece eeeeaaeeaaaeaaeaaecaaecaecceceeeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeteees 158 4 3 2 10 2 S300 Optimization E 161 4 3 2 10 3 S301 Y limitation EE 168 4 3 2 104 E EE a a en ter aaa Aara aia SA 175 4 3 2 10 5 8312 Limitation EE 178 4 3 2 100 3312 SP switching EE 184 4 3 2 10 7 S315 Set point correction nn nsnnnnennnennannennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 187 4 3 2 10 8 S316 Set point remote Control 190 4 3 2 10 9 S317 XP switching EE ER 193 4 3 2 10 10 S318 Room correchon nen nnennennnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 195 4 3 2 NOS Bee LC at EE 198 4 3 2 10 12 S348 Adaptive heating curve 1 ea Eege egebet 201 e aus CD melic ae ee ee esse 204 4 3 2 12 5322 Ee ai seda ini 205 4 3 2 13 8328 Binary Yallalion es u u 208 4 2 14 8924 SCANN ne 210 4 3 2 19 Nie WE Ee EE 213 4 22 18 5326 lime MAG are ee 215 A 2 17 8827 P lse COU es sieniin a E aa iaag ais 218 4 3 2 16 S328 Operation hours ae beta os Maio Had ae data 220 4 3 2 19 S329 Heat volume P 221 4 3 2 20 S330 Heat volume DT 223 4 32 21 5338 Ring COUNTE anna ee ne eee eee a E 226 4 3 2 22 S334 Spreadsheet function ccc cece cece eect cette tet ee eee eae eaaeaaaeaaaaeaaeaaaeeaeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 22
445. tual value 0 boolean 5772 Ring exit 10 actual value 0 Ss boolean 5773 Ring exit 11 actual value 0 boolean 5774 Ring exit 12 actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 229 4 3 2 22 S334 Spreadsheet function Function summary Using the DDC softvvare object S334 table function a nevv analog output signal Y is formed from an analog input signal X The value assignment occurs via up to 10 value pairs X Y The DDC software object is used for example to linearize unlinearities from machine parts in the technical operation plant e g non linear transfer behavior of heat ransfer units The analog input signal X is set as source parameter 5791 Tab command value X The output signal Y calculated in line with up to 10 X Y value pairs is depicted on parameter 5792 Tab output Y An output signal Y is calculated by interpolation for all input signals that are between the set value pairs X Y This requires complete upward setting for the input signals The input signal setting must start with X1 Y1 No X Y inputs between the first and last X Y value pair can be released The X values must be set going up X1 lt X2 lt X3 The interpolation ends with the last X Y value pair eg X1 Y 1 X5 Y5 Immediately after activating the DDC software object all input parameters command value X Y inputs are deleted and have
446. ue 0 60 0 min integer 6911 Min Switched on time 11 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6912 Min Switched on time 12 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6913 Min Switched on time 13 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6914 Min Switched on time 14 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6915 Min Switched on time 15 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6916 Min Switched on time 16 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6917 Min Switched on time 17 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6918 Min Switched on time 18 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6919 Min Switched on time 19 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6920 Min Switched on time 20 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6921 Min Switched off time 1 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6922 Min Switched off time 2 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6923 Min Switched off time 3 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6924 Min Switched off time 4 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6925 Min Switched off time 5 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6926 Min Switched off time 6 actual value 0 60 0 min integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 261 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 6927 Min Switched off time 7 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6928 Min Switched off time 8 actual value 0 60 0 min integer 6929 Min Switched off time 9 actual value 0 60 0 min i
447. ue exceeded Command execution check The function block contains a command execution check refer to the command execution check for description and parameters both pumps for the actual operating status Operating message pump 1 or 2 Target operating status Burner 1 or 2 ON output Status pump command execution check 1 or 2 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 418 If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled stCEC1orstCEC2 Release malfunction catch resets the command execution check malfunction Note The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the Repeating function elements section Ansteuersignal Ansteuersignal aus dem Objekt 4 an die Hardware Uberwachungszeit Bsz Bst o rz gerun it R ckmeldung eat Gel von der Hardware x BAK Status BAK stBAK HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Pu1 or Pu2 Control signal from the object Bsz BM1 or BM2 acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Pu1 or Pu2 Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC1 or stCEC2 CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch Malfunc
448. uersignal Ansteuersignal gt an die Hardware aus dem Objekt berwachungszeit Bsz Bst R ckmeldung Alarmverz gerungszeit von der Hardware BAK Status BAK stBAK N HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter Y Control signal from the object Bsz Setting acknowledgement from hardware CEC tCEC Monitoring time tCEC VzCEC Alarm delay time VzCEC Y Control signal to the hardware Bst stCEC CEC status stCEC Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch No input Cover malfunction SM An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the control cover output a not Fault blocked 0 b the output Control cover switched to closed malfunction blocked 1 If a fault sets the output control cover to closed this can only be reset by activating the unlock fault catch If unlock fault catch is not wired faults that occur are not saved i e if the fault disappears the fault handling disappears Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 308 p Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung nicht beschaltet beschaltet gt anliegende St rung anliegende St rung Ti weiterverarbeitetes Signal weiterverarbeitetes Signal Entr
449. ues stated in the TASBY day or TASBY night parameters the following switching functions are executed 1 hour after exceeding the limitation values the internal contact 1003 boiler request of the basic heating program switches off 1003 0 with a hunting time stipulated in the basic heating program pump hunting the internal contact 1001 Pump ON switches off 1001 0 the internal contact 1008 Stand By switches on 1008 1 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure 4 3 199 Objects 1 0 IOO lst Au en temperatur TASBY Tag TASBY Tag 2K TASBY Nacht TASBY Nacht 2K Nachtbetrieb Zeit Tagbetrieb If TASBY day TASBY night is exceeded as a result of a change in usage time the switch to the stand by status takes place immediately The standby status is quitted again without time delay if the outside temperature falls with a switch back difference XSD StandBy under TASBY day TASBY night A 1 hour time delay switch back takes place If the switch back condition is met as a result of the change in usage time the switch back takes place immediately For standby type ZQD the following applies Ifthe average outside temperature exceeds the limiting value set in the TASBY day parameter for 3 days standby is switched on the third day The switch back to normal operation occurs with a time delay of 1 3 days depending on the setting in 5396 switch back ZQD The internal average outside temperature must be
450. ulse This makes counting with a certain time range possible If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON In parameter 5692 heat capacity A the current calculated heat capacity is entered Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5690 Amount ofheat A set point 0 100000000 0 kWh integer 5691 Delta amount of heat A set point 0 100000000 0 kWh integer 5692 Heat power A actual value 0 100000000 0 kW integer 5693 Scaling A set point 0 001 100000 1 float 5694 Scaling A Exp set point 9 9 0 integer 5695 Impulse in A actual value 0 2147483647 0 integer 5696 Q Reset amount of heat A actual value deletable deleted boolean 5697 Q EA Impulse actual value deletable deleted boolean 5698 Calculation interval set point 1 60 1 min integer Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 220 4 3 2 18 S328 Operation hours Function summary The operating hours are counted with the DDC software object S328 operating hours The count takes place if the binary source parameter 5702 Q Input Bz is logical 1 The count takes place in hours and minutes The full hours are depicted on parameter 5700 time BZ The minutes are counted in parameter 5705 minutes Control functions can be released after the end of stipulated time intervals When exceeding the time interval 5701 Interval BZ paramet
451. ump variable transformer Function summary The function block pump variable transformer also called pump frequency converter or pump FC controls a rev controlled pump with optional bypass switch as per a set point Ptarget The function block supports Operating hours limiting value Switching delays Command execution check Pump blocking protection Malfunction catch malfunction handling Status control unit using Z influence DOL repair switch forced control Parameters No name of parameter parameter min max init unit typ 1 AnfAuto actual value deleted Begin Automatic operation deletable boolean 2 Psoll set point 0 100 0 Pump setpoint integer 3 PuFu actual value 0 Pump FU ON boolean 4 PuBy actual value 0 Pump Bypass ON boolean 5 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 6 Y actual value 0 100 0 Setp setting of FU integer 7 BM actual value deleted Pump operation deletable boolean 8 SM actual value deleted Pump fault deletable boolean 9 Rep actual value deleted Repare switch deletable boolean 10 AnlVerz set point 0 2147483647 0 s Start delay Automatic integer Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 402 No name of parameter parameter min max init unit typ 11 BMFu actual value delete
452. upply air temperature in ventilation controls in comfortable limits to curb the supply temperature in heating controls before reaching technological limiting values A max or min limit is possible in line with the requests The max or min limits may glide in line with a command value E g if for ventilation controls beside lifting the room s set point depending on the outside temperature concurrently min limit of the supply air is lifted Function description In the DDC software object limitation the selected limitation sensor in the source parameter 5270 Q limitation sensor is set The limitation value is set with parameter 5271 limitation value Parameter 5272 limitation sets whether this is a max or a min limiting value The limitation works in the following 2 phases a The value of the limitation sensor nears the max or min limitation value b The value of the limitation sensor is higher or lower than the max or min limitation value Re a the limitation function is adopted gliding The variance of the limitation sensor to the limitation value is compared with the main control variance of the basic program Depending on the relevant control variance control is still made with the main control circuit XP Re b if the set Max limitation value is exceeded or the number falls below the min limitation value all XPs on the control circuit are replaced by 5273 XPlimitation in order control the limitation value infringement as quickly as
453. urce 01 pe 02 000 00 00 S239 01 5103 FSource 01 s Kleback neter Version 05 06 4 1 50 Zentrale Modul Anlage Gruppe Objekt Index Sub Objekt Parameter Funktionsobjekt Index Parameter General background Software structure 02 001 fl 1 Zentralenkarte I O 02 001 00 02 002 02 001 00 00 P 01 Pim 02 001 00 00 P 01 CAl Analog 2 Zentralenkarte UO Eingang CAl 02 001 00 00 P 01 CAl b 102 101 1 CAN Bus Modul 1 92 101 00 102 102 02 101 00 00 P 01 1 CAN Bus Modul 2 Digitaler e Eingang CDI 102 101 00 00 P 01 CDI k 102 201 Meldeset 02 101 00 00 P 01 CDI K FSelMO 02 101 00 00 P_01 CDI kK FSelMO 01 101 Meldeausgang in 101 kiebackeneter Version 05 06 Software structure General background 4 1 51 More detailed explanation Address element lt central unit gt The central unit is the first element in the technical address It can have a value in the range between 1 and 99 If this address element is not stated the own central unit is addressed The separator is retained before the individual central unit and module address elements This results in the address Module Value Notes 01 99 If your own central device is to be address is enough for central addressing Address element lt Module gt The second address element in the technical address is the module
454. urce rF i e when both sources are occupied It is possible to access these values using source setting from other objects software and hardware objects bases etc in the DDC4000 system Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5500 Source temperature actual value deletable 50 100 deleted C float 5501 Source rF actual value deletable 0 100 deleted float 5502 Source temp feucht actual value deletable 50 100 deleted C float 5505 Absolute humidity actual value 0 4000 0 g H2O kg float 5506 Enthalpie result actual value 60 10000 10 kJ kg float 5507 Relative humidity actual value 0 100 0 float 5508 Dewpoint actual value 50 100 0 C float Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 205 4 3 2 12 S322 Sequence Function summary The DDC software object S322 sequence enables the signal of an analogue source to be divided into two independent sequences and provided as analogue values These can be output for example using source setting through hardware objects By variably stipulating starting and end values min and max limits it is possible to set any format for the sequences that you desire In addition a uncontrolled condition can be assigned to both sequences The analog input signal is set using source parameterizing 5520 Q Sequ The starting and end value is set for each sequence fo
455. ure 3 Y limitation as 5313 YB limitation MAX 5314 YB Inverting NO Version 05 06 Objects 4 3 170 A Stellung abh ngig von Begrenzungsgr e 100 7 Fi Y max Grundprogram Y min Grund Grun program 5 Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert A 100 T Y max Grundprogramm Stellbereich abh ngig von der Y min Grundprogram DDC Regelung 0 gt Begrenzungsgr e Stellung abh ngig von YB Grenzwert Begrenzungsgr e A 10 Stellung abh ngig von Y max Begrenzungsgr e HERE Stellbereich abh ngig von der Y min DDC Regelung Grundprogramm 0 gt Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 171 Figure 4 A Stellung abh ngig von Y limitation as Begrenzungsgr e 5313 YB limitation MAX 100 T SS SS N 5314 YB Inverting YES Y max Grundprogramm l ES Stellbereich abh ngig von der Y min DDC Regelung Grundprogramm l 0 gt Begrenzungsgr e YB Grenzwert Parameters Parameter 5313 Min Max selection yes 1 means Max No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 5310 1 Y limit affects set point 4 0 value text multistate 1 Y1 2 Y2 4 Y3 8 Y4 5311 1 Q1 actual value deletable infinity infinity deleted Source Y limitation float 5312 1 G1 set point infinity infinity 150 YB Limiting value float 5312 2
456. ust be defined in parameter 5102 source control variable Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set As an outside sensor any analog value in the DDC system can also be set in parameter 5103 source TO This parameter is used in combination with other DDC sub software objects e g S307 constant frost protection If not required no setting is required In parameter 5100 XS the desired set point for the fixed value regulation is set On the basis of this set point and the function of other DDC sub software objects e g S314 set point gliding S313 set point switching a new set point is calculated that is depicted as the current value on parameter 5101 XS current In the basic PID program up to 4 constant Y outputs are available The calculation of the Y outputs is made if the control circuit is in Control ON operation mode Otherwise the Y outputs are in the status assigned to them for the uncontrolled status by parameter 5127 uncontrolled condition 0 0 1 100 The values of the Y outputs calculated by the basic program can be overwritten by manual intervention 7801 manual intervention 7804 manual intervention Y04 BMS intervention h01 h04 or by DDC sub software objects e g 302 Y set The current values of the Y outputs are displayed in the parameters 5110 YL1 5113 YL4 For each Y output a max and min limit parameter 5141 5148 can be set e g for stipulating a minimum outside air rate MAR In parameter 5126 S
457. uts have higher priority If only one of the final position open or final position closed is switched but not position feedback signal valve the final position that is not switched is determined via the motor operating time If e g only final position closed is switched after an open control the Setting output is first set to running and after the end of the Motor operating time set to open If both final position open and final position closed are not switched the final position replication occurs in the same way for both final positions but acommand execution check is not however effective Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 389 Malfunction catch malfunction handling If unlock malfunction catch is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch No input Valve malfunction SM An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the control valve output a not malfunction blocked 0 b the output Control valve switches to closed malfunction blocked 1 If a malfunction sets the output control valve to closed this can only be reset by activating the unlock malfunction catch If unlock malfunction catch is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved i e if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears Entriegelung St rungsselbthaltung
458. value Function summary This object has a target parameter type property as set point A value that affects the target parameter can be entered in this parameter The simulation value object is deleted automatically after a warm start after power off failure and communication break if it was entered externally Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 Simuwert set point deletable infinity infinity deleted Simulation value float 2 Loeschen set point 1 selection list Delete after selection list No text O after warm start 1 after decimal point 4 3 6 14 4 F014 Test value Function summary This object has a target parameter type property as set point A value that affects the target parameter can be entered in this parameter The test value object is also in effect after a warm start or if the power is switched off or fails It must either be deleted on the parameter or via a central parameter that causes the deletion that applies to all the set test values in the same central unit If the object is entered to the parameter online it is retained even if communication fails with the entering partner Parameters Nr Parametername Parametertyp Min Max Init Einheit 4 3 6 15 BACnet function objects 4 3 6 15 1 FB_Al analog input To transfer the DDC4000 parameters via BACnet the DDC4000 parameter must be assigned
459. value is kept in the upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC limits Higher lower values are cut off The source target correction absolute value has a higher priority than source target correction 0 100 The function of the DDC sub menu can be switched ON Status 1 or OFF Status 0 with a binary source Q EA Target correction If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON Priorities If in addition to the DDC software object set point correction a DDC software object set point switching and or set point remote control is active the following priorities apply Priority Function Highest Set point switch 1 313 1 Set point switch 2 S313 2 Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 143 Priority Function Set point switch 3 S313 3 Set point switch 4 S313 4 Set point remote control S316 lowest Set point correction S315 Example DDC control circuit set Lower limit SPC release Upper limit SPC release valid range for a set point to be corrected point correction 20 C 4 6 16 C to 26 C 5mBar 0 2 5 mBar to 7 mBar Note Basic heating program The DDC submenu set point correction only works for day regulation The set point correction influences KH parallel movement of heating curve if the DDC sub menu 15318 room correction or 15300 optimization is not active TStarget new
460. w hlte Zustand tritt ein wenn der logische Zustand des Parameters dem Input kiebackepeter Version 05 06 Software structure Objects 4 3 454 Parameter entspricht Ist das nicht der Fall so gilt der entsprechend andere Zustand des Statuspaares Beispiel Ein Objektstatus am Parameter hat f r den Input Parameter den Wert 1 und f r den Status Parameter den Wert Anlage Ein Ist der Parameter 1 so gibt der Objektstatus den Zustand Ein aus Der Zustand Aus wird ausgegeben wenn der Parameter den Wert 0 annimmt Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit Input Input set point 0 1023 1 Input valus integer State Status set point 4 0 valu Status multistate e tex 1 Pla nt ON 2 Pla nt OFF 3 Aut omat ic 4 Ma nual 4 3 6 12 FSelMO Selection message set Function summary for each 99x can be set to any scalable parameters This object activates the message monitoring of a scalar parameter The object described below SY_MsgMan 07 is used as a message memory If the monitored parameter is a BoolPar 0 or 1 can be defined as a ok If an integer or float is monitored the limiting value and switch back difference is stated for releasing a normal message Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 1 MSet set point Selection MSet deletable text Version 05 06 Kleback
461. witch on time and automatic mode is activated Blocking protection active is set at this time to 1 Both pumps are subsequently switched on for a time by operating time pump blocking protection the switching from pump 1 to pump 2 takes place without an overlay time The function block delivers an output signal request control that switches when the pump outputs and not the Blocking protection active are due Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 417 Operating hours limiting value The operating hours of the pumps can be counted the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the input for the relevant pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting Betriebsmeldung Anteuersignal BM BM nicht beschaltet BM beschaltet berwachte Gr e Reset auf 0 I 8 Betriebs Betriebsstundenz hler stunden Set auf Wert aktivieren vergleich Grenzwert berschritten Set Grenzwert auf Wert HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter Pu1 or Pu2 Control signal BM1 or BM2 Operating message ResBh1 or ResBh2 Reset operating hours Bh1 or Bh2 Set operating hours BhActive activate BhGw1 or BhGw2 Set limiting value Bh1 or Bh2 Operating hours gBh1 or gBh2 Limiting val
462. within the switching down time Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 330 Switching delays The fan can be switched on in automatic mode with a delay for each level If AnfAuto1 is activated the plant first vvaits for vvarm up delay automatic level 1 before the warm up phase starts Then comes Request cover Operational message cover open Fan on level 1 If level AnfAuto2 is activated in ongoing operation the plant first waits until the switching up delay has ended for level 1 and only then switches on fan on level 2 If in the off status AnfAuto2 is activated first the plant first waits for warm up delay automatic level 1 before the warm up phase starts Then comes Request cover Operational message cover open Fan on level 1 Switching up delay and Fan on level 2 warm up delay automatic level 1 is only considered in automatic operation Operating hours limiting value The fan s operating hours can be counted for each level individually and also for both levels together the operating counters can be preset and given a limiting value If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced If the inputs of the fan fan operating messages are not connected the corresponding control output fan on level 1 or fan on level are used for counting Note The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the Repeating function el
463. works when comparing TO TR Heating TO lt XS Cooling TO gt XS AT TR lt XS and TO gt TR Y 100 AT TR gt XS and TO lt TR Y 100 AT TR lt XS and TO lt TR Y 0 4 AT TR gt XS and TO gt TR Y 0 4 Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 111 100 A Y 100 amp Y 01 AT TA TR AT TA TR 1 0 1 IN P 0 14 IK No hysteresis works when comparing TR XS The outside recirculating air covers are switched immediately 0 U 100 as soon as TX falls below or exceeds the set point XS No hysteresis works for the term XS TO Fakt heat or TO XS Fakt cool Ifthe TO varies it may occur that ifthe Fakt heat or Fakt cool value is high that optimization ventilation switches between on and off The outside temperature and set point XSactual are considered L fter Abluft I Frostschutz 2 SS w chter L fterst rung L fter Zuluft AuRentemp Au en Pumpe Umluft f L fterst rung Klappen Filter Erh Erhitzer wartung temp Ventil Y2 100 gt 100 Au enluft Y2 0 gt 0 Au enluft 0 Umluft 100 Umluft Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 112 4 3 2 9 6 S306 Free night cooling Activation Sub function of Basic PID program can be set 1x Can be switched on off via 5226 Q EA Free Night if not defined ON Function summary Free night c
464. xpected on P xx CDO 01 K The returned value from the output is available on P xx CDO 01 k General parameters SY_Module 01 Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module In SY_Module 01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored Peculiarities 899 Version number of the firmware module m Active The module is reachable and has full function If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module 01 Active is set to 0 DubAdr The module notifies a double address malfunction The module notifies a malfunction If the module detects a malfunction itself it sets SY_Module 01 malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module 01 Err No ErrNo malfunction code Warnings and malfunction messages are coded here The importance can only be queried in the R amp S Terminal occupancy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 10 Il 12 13 14 15 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 o ME E03 K04 KOS E06 KO KOs KOS K10 Ell El2 El3 El4 K15 El K1 K18 K19 K20 K K K GND GND GND 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 50 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 E59 K40 K4l K42 E43 K44 K45 K46 K47 K48 K49 ESO K51 K52 K53 K54 K55 K56 KS KS8 K l K62 K63 Es4 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 29 30 50 K21 K22 K
465. y The basic heating program is weather oriented supply temperature control with a constant Y output Function extensions are made via DDC software and hardware objects Vorlauftemperatur Ty Function description TVsoll Ermittlung dia Heizkennlinie 1 Tysoll aktuell PD w Regler Anlage Tag Nacht a Pumpe an Regelgr e 4 3 2 10 1 Graphical summaries Basic function The supply temperature as a control variable must be defined in parameter 5102 source control variable Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 151 The command of the warm up set point occurs as per the delayed outside temperature The calculated delayed outside temperature is depicted on parameter 5153 TOvz The average outside temperature is output on 5169 TOaverage The delay with which the TOvz outside temperature follows can be set via parameter 5168 time constants TOvz If the starting set point is guided by the actual outside temperature parameter 5152 Rules as per TO must be set to YES As an outside sensor any analog value in the DDC system can also be set in parameter 5103 source TO As per the heating curve refer to image with the set values 5155 EF and 5156 KH the heating control circuit calculates a start set point On the basis of this set point and the function of other DDC sub menus e g S314 set point switching
466. y deleted C Room probe FN float 5222 dT1 set point 2 10 2 K dT1 float 5223 dT2 set point 2 10 5 K dT2 float 5224 Cooling time set point 1 24 3 h integer 5225 TAg set point 0 25 17 C TA limit FN float 5226 EA actual value deletable deleted Q EA free Night boolean 5227 Note cooling times set point deletable deleted boolean i013 Free night cooling actual value 0 boolean i013a Free night cooling possible actual value 0 boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects 4 3 116 No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit i030 So actual value 0 Summer FNk boolean Version 05 06 kiebackepeter Software structure Objects 4 3 117 4 3 2 9 7 S307 Constant frost protection Activation Sub function of Basic PID program can be set 1x Can be switched on off via 5356 Q EA Frost protection stet if not defined ON Function summary The role of the ongoing frost protection for ventilation plants is to prevent the heating register from freezing when the fans are running For this the return temperature of the heating register is controlled separately in a settable range Function description The software object operates if the PID basic program has the status Control ON 1012 1 The return temperature is set as source parameter 5352 Q return sensor S
467. z hler erwarten kann Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2222 StorZahl actual value 0 Fault counter boolean Version 05 06 Kleback neter Software structure Objects No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2251 Ser nr actual value Serial number text 2258 Volumen actual value infinity infinity O m volume float 4 3 8 2 2 CD_WA Volume counter 01 Function summary 4 3 467 Dieses sind die Standard Parameter eines Wasser Z hlers am M Bus Viele Wasser Z hler am M Bus bieten die hier enthaltenen Parameter an Somit sind diese f r viele Z hler geeignet insbesondere auch f r unbekannte Z hler Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit 2212 Betr std actual value 2147483648 2147483647 0 h Operating time integer 2222 St rZ hl actual value 0 Fault counter boolean 2251 Ser nr actual value Serial number text 2253 Volstrom actual value infinity infinity 0 m h Volume current float 2258 Volumen actual value infinity infinity 0 m volume float 4 3 8 2 3 CD_WA Volume counter 02 Function summary Die speziellen Parameter fur den Wasser Z hler IZWM von Allmess Schlumberger Parameters No name of parameter parameter typ min max init unit
468. zBAK set point 0 2147483647 0 s stBAK1 or stBAK2 delayed integer 27 Z set point 4 0 value text Z influence multistate 9 Z Auto 0 Z Manual OFF 1 Z Level 1 2 Z Level 2 28 Zw set point 4 0 value text Forced control multistate 9 Zw Auto 0 Zw OFF 1 Zw Level 1 2 Zw Level 2 29 gBh actual value 0 Limit value error by opr hrs boolean 30 reg actual value 0 Begin Control boolean 31 stBAK1 actual value 0 Status BAK burner level 1 boolean 32 stBAK2 actual value 0 Status BAK burner level 2 boolean 33 tBAK set point 0 2147483647 30 s Time BAK integer 34 SMout actual value 0 SMout boolean Function description The Auto request must always be switched on Burner level 2 always follows burner level 1 burner level 2 is never activated without burner level 1 A request burner level 2 on before a request burner level 1 on first activates burner level 1 The plant delay Verz12 is only included in automatic operation In all other cases level 2 is switched immediately Pump and cover control during the warm up phase request for control If the burner is to be switched on the pump cover request is first set to 1 Then there is a pause for the operational message pump cover 1 if this input is wired At the same time as request pump cover the request control is set to 1 This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that th

Dokumentation DDC4000

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents